DVD-Video Recorder DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

Contents Page Contents Page

1 Technical Specifications and Connection UP Sub Board: Central Controler (CECO)
Facilities 2 (Diagram 11) 128
Diversity Matrix 2 UP Sub Board: Fan Control (FACO) (Diagram 12) 129
PCB Locations 5
DVIO Board: 1394 Interface (Diagram 1) 132
2 Safety Information, General Notes 6 DVIO Board: Link + Codec (Diagram 2) 133
3 Directions for Use 8
4 Mechanical Instructions 45 DVIO Board: uP Part (Diagram 3) 134
DVIO Board: Interface + DAC (Diagram 4) 135
5 Diagnostic Software 49 DVIO Board: Clock (Diagram 5) 136
6 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram 89 Digital Board 1.5: VSM Buffer Memory and Bit Engine
Wiring Diagram 92
Interface (Diagram 1) 140
Waveforms 93 Digital Board 1.5: AV Dec. STI5519 (Diagram 2) 141
Testpoints 97
7 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts 102 Digital Board 1.5: AV Decoder Mem. (Diagram 3) 142
Digital Board 1.5: Video Enc. Empress (Diagram 4) 143
Display Panel (Diagram 1) 102 Digital Board 1.5: VIP CVBS Y/C Video Input
Front Connector (FC) (Diagram 2) 103 (Diagram 5) 144
Standby Panel (STBY) (Diagram 3) 107 Digital Board 1.5: Analog Board Cons. Video In/Out
Tray Left Panel (TRL) (Diagram 4) 108 (Diagram 6) 145
Tray Right Panel (TRR) (Diagram 5) 109 Digital Board 1.5: Progressive Scan (Diagram 7) 146
Analog Board:Fronted Video (FV) (Diagram 1) 110 Digital Board 1.5: Progressive Scan (Diagram 8) 147
Analog Board: In / Out Video (IOV) (Diagram 2) 111 Digital Board 1.5: Power, Clock and Reset (Diagram 9) 148
Analog Board: In / Out Audio (IOA) (Diagram 3) 112 DB Chrysalis 2.1: IDE, UARTS, RESET, BE(Diagram 1) 155
An. Brd for VAE8020: Power Supply (PS)(Diagram 4) 113 DB Chrysalis 2.1: 1394 (Diagram 2) 156
An. Brd for VAD8031: Power Supply (PS) (Diagram 5) 114 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Audio PLL (Diagram 3) 157
Analog Board: Multi Sound Processing (MSP) DB Chrysalis 2.1: Chrysalis (Diagram 4) 158
(Diagram 5) 115 DB Chrysalis 2.1: 1.8V Power (Diagram 5) 159
Analog Board: VPS (Diagram 6) 116 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Prog. scan DAC (Diagram 6) 160
Analog Board: Follow Me (FOME) (Diagram 7) 116 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Flash SDRAM EEPROM(Diagram 7) 161
Analog Board: Digital In/Out (DIGIO) (Diagram 8) 117 DB Chrysalis 2.1: Video IO (Diagram 8) 162
Analog Board: Audio Converter 603 3033 (DAC_ADC) DB Chrysalis 2.1: VIPs (Diagram 9) 163
(Diagram 9) 118 8 Alignments 167
Analog Board: Audio Converter 603 3028 (DAC_ADC) 9 Circuit-, IC Descriptions and List
(Diagram 10) 119 of Abbreviations 170
10 Spare Parts List 246
11 Revision List 260
©
Copyright 2002 Philips Consumer Electronics B.V. Eindhoven, The Netherlands.
For service manual of Basic Engine VAE8020 please refer to 3122 785 12473.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a
retrieval system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, For service manual of Basic Engine VAD8031 please refer to 3122 785 13680.
mechanical, photocopying, or otherwise without the prior permission of Philips.

Published by GH 0393 Service PaCE Printed in the Netherlands Subject to modification EN 3122 785 13322
 EN 2 1. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1. Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

1.1 Diversity Matrix for sets with drive VAE8020
(AV2)

Type DVDR 75/001 75/021 75/051 70/001 70/021 70/051

Version
A' Lead X X X
A Lead X X X
DVIO DVIO 1.8 <VN05 <VN05 <VN05
Digital Board E1 >VN04 >VN04 >VN04
(Chrysalis) 2.1 E2 >VN04 >VN04 >VN04
Digital Board
E1 <VN05 <VN05 <VN05 <VN05 <VN05 <VN05
(Empress) 1.5
Basic Engine VAE 8020 X X X X X X
UP Sub AL E1 X X X X X X
AL
<VN04 <VN04
E2/PS
3103 603 3033
AL
Analog-Board <VN03 <VN04 <VN03 <VN04
E1/PS
AL E2 >VN03 >VN03
3103 603 3028
AL E1 >VN02 >VN03 >VN02 >VN03
Display Board DC1 AL X X X X X X

Remarks:

<VN03 ... This module is used in sets with production codes VN01 and VN02. Please see the type plate of the set for the production code.

>VN02 ... This module is used in sets with production code VN03 and higher.

E1 ... Digital Board Chrysalis Version Euro 1 for sets with DV input
E2 ... Digital Board Chrysalis Version Euro 2 for sets without DV input

AL E1/PS ... Analog Board version A-Lead Euro 1, used from production start onwards.
AL E2/PS ... Analog Board version A-Lead Euro 2 for UK, used from Production Start onwards.

The Analog Board versions "AL Ex/PS" are based on the PWB layout code 3103 603 3033.
This layout code can also be seen on the underside of the Analog Board in the copper near the power supply part.

AL E1 ... Analog Board version A-Lead Euro 1 replaces "AL E1/PS" at a certain production date.
AL E2 ... Analog Board version A-Lead Euro 2 for UK replaces "AL E2/PS" at a certain production date.

The Analog Board versions "AL Ex" are based on the PWB layout code 3103 603 3028.
The main difference to the Analog Board used at production start is the used audio digital/analogue converter; see Analog Board circuit
diagram 9.

1.2 Diversity Matrix for sets with drive VAD8031

(AV3)

Sets with VAD8031 can be identified by the production code

starting with VN1A, (then VN1B, VN1C...) and by the presence
of a set fan.
Type DVDR 75/001 75/021 75/051 70/001 70/021 70/051
Version
A' Lead X X X
A Lead X X X
Digital Board E1 /AV3 X X X
(Chrysalis) 2.1 E2 /AV3 X X X
BasicEngine VAD 8031 X X X X X X
UP Sub AL E1/AV3 X X X X X X
use PWB drawing AL E2/AV3 X X
Analog-Board
603 3028 AL E1/AV3 X X X X
Display Board DC1 AL X X X X X X
 Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 1. EN 3

1.3 General: Maximum tuning error of a recalled

program : ± 62.5 kHz
Mains voltage : 198V-276V Maximum tuning error during
operation : ± 100 kHz
Mains frequency : 43 Hz - 63Hz
Power consumption mains : 28 W
Power consumption standby : <7W Tuning Principle
Power consumption low power automatic B,G, I, DK and L/L’detection
stand-by : <3W manual selection in "STORE" mode

1.4 RF Tuner 1.5 Analogue Inputs

Test equipment:Fluke 54200 TV Signal generator 1.5.1 SCART 1 (Connected to TV)

Test streams:PAL BG Philips Standard test pattern
Pin Signals:
1.4.1 System: 1 - Audio R 1.8V RMS 
2 - Audio R 
PAL B/G, PAL D/K, SECAM L/L’, PAL I 3 - Audio L 1.8V RMS 
4 - Audio GND 
5 - Blue/Chroma
1.4.2 RF - Loop Through:
GND 
6 - Audio L 
Frequency range : 45 MHz - 860 MHz 7 - Blue out/
Gain: (ANT IN - ANT OUT) : -6 dB to 0dB Chroma in 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*) 
8 - Function
1.4.3 Radio Interference: switch <2V = TV
>4.5V / <7V = asp. ratio 16:9 DVD
input voltage /3 tone method (+40 >9.5V / <12V = asp. ratio 4:3 DVD 
dB min) : no limit 9 - Green GND 
10 - P50 control 
11 - Green 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*)
1.4.4 Receiver:
12 - Nc
13 - Red/Chroma
PLL tuning with AFC for optimum reception GND 
Frequency range: : 45.25 MHz - 857 MHz
14 - fast switch
Sensitivity at 40 dB S/N : ≥ 60dBµV at 75Ω
GND 
(video unweighted )
15 - Red out/
Chroma out 0.7Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*)
1.4.5 Video Performance: ± 3dB 0.3Vpp Chroma (burst) 
16 - fast switch
Channel 25 / 503,25 MHz, RGB/ CVBS or Y <0.4V into 75 Ohm = CVBS
Test pattern: PAL BG PHILIPS standard test pattern, >1V / <3V into 75 Ohm = RGB 
RF Level 74 dBV 17 - Y/CVBS GND
Measured on SCART 1 OUT 
Frequency response: : 0 - 4.00 MHz +0-4dB 18 - Y/CVBS GND
Group delay ( 0.1 MHz - 4.4 MHz ) : 0 nsec ± 150nsec IN 
19 - CVBS/Y 1Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*) 
1.4.6 Audio Performance: 20 - CVBS/Y 
21 - Shield 
Audio Performance Analogue - HiFi:
Frequency response at SCART 1 1.5.2 SCART 2 (Connected to AUX)
(L+R) output: : 100 Hz - 12 kHz / 0±
3dB Pin Signals:
S/N according to DIN 45405, 7, 1967 : 1 -Audio R 1.8V RMS 
and PHILIPS standard test pattern 2 -Audio R 
video signal: : FM: ≥ 50dB; AM ≥ 3 -Audio L 1.8V RMS 
45dB, unweighted 4 -Audio GND 
Harmonic distortion ( 1 kHz, ± 25 5 -Blue/Chroma
kHz deviation ): : FM ≤ 1.5%; AM ≤ 2% GND 
6 -Audio L 
Audio Performance NICAM: 7 -Blue in/
Frequency response at SCART Chroma out ± 3dB 0.3Vpp Chroma (burst) 
1(L+R) output: : 40 Hz - 15 kHz 0 ± 8 -Function
3dB switch 
S/N according to DIN 45405, 7, 1967 : 9 -Green GND 
and PHILIPS standard test pattern 10 -P50 control 
video signal: : ≥ 60 dB unweighted 11 -Green 
Harmonic distortion (1 kHz): : ≤ 0.5 % 12 -Nc
13 -Red/Chroma
GND 
1.4.7 Tuning
14 -fast switch
GND 
Automatic Search Tuning 15 -Red in/
scanning time without antenna : typ. 3 min. PAL
Chroma in 
stop level (vision carrier) : ≥ 37dBµV
 EN 4 1. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities

16 -fast switch Intermodulation distortion : >70dB

RGB/ CVBS or Mute (spin-up, pause, access) : >85dB
Y  Outband attenuation: : >40dB above 25kHz
17 -CVBS GND
OUT 
18 -CVBS GND 1.8 Digital Output
IN 
19 -CVBS/Y/RGB 1.8.1 Coaxial
sync 1Vpp ± 0.1V into 75 Ohm (*) 
20 -CVBS/Y  CDDA/ LPCM (incl MPEG1) : according IEC958
21 -Shield  MPEG2, AC3 audio : according IEC1937
DTS : according IEC1937,
(*) for 100% white amendment 1

1.5.3 Audio/Video Front Input Connectors 1.9 Digital Video Input (IEEE 1394)
Audio 1.9.1 Applicable Standards
Input voltage : 2 Vrms
Input impedance : >10kΩ
Implementation according:
IEEE Std 1394-1995
Video - Cinch IEC 61883 - Part 1
Input voltage : 1 Vpp ± 3dB IEC 61883 - Part 2 SD-DVCR (02-01-1997)
Input impedance : 75 Ω
Specification of consumer use digital VCR’s using 6.3 mm
magnetic tape - dec.1994
Video - YC (Hosiden) Mechanical connection according:
Input voltage Y : 1Vpp ± 3dB Annex A of 61883-1
Input impedance Y : 75 Ω
Input voltage C : burst 300 mVpp ± 3
dB 1.10 P50 System Control
Input impedance C : 75 Ω
Via SCART pin nr 10
1.6 Video Performance
1.11 Dimensions and Weight
All outputs loaded with 75 Ohm
SNR measurements over full bandwidth without weighting. Height of feet : 10mm
Apparatus tray closed : WxDxH :435 x 324.5 x
1.6.1 SCART (RGB) 88cm
Apparatus tray open : WxDxH :435 x 366 x
SNR : > -65 dB on all output 88cm
Bandwidth : 4.8 MHz ± 2dB Weight without packaging : app. 4 kg ± 0.5 kg
Weight in packaging : app. 6.5 kg

1.7 Audio Performance CD

1.12 Laser Output Power & Wavelength
1.7.1 Cinch Output Rear
1.12.1 DVD
Output voltage 2 channel mode : 2Vrms ± 2dB
Channel unbalance (1kHz) : <1dB Output power during reading : 0.8mW
Crosstalk 1kHz : >95dB Output power during writing : 20mW
Crosstalk 20Hz-20kHz : >85dB Wavelength : 660nm
Frequency response 20Hz- 20kHz : ±0.2dB max
Signal to noise ratio : >95 dB 1.12.2 CD
Dynamic range 1kHz : >85dB
Dynamic range 20Hz-20kHz : >80dB Output power : 0.3mW
Distortion and noise 1kHz : >85dB Wavelength : 780nm
Distortion and noise 20Hz-20kHz : >75dB
Intermodulation distortion : >77dB
Mute : >95dB
Outband attenuation: : >40dB above 30kHz

1.7.2 Scart Audio

Output voltage 2 channel mode : 1.6Vrms ± 2dB

Channel unbalance (1kHz) : <1dB
Crosstalk 1kHz : >85dB
Crosstalk 20Hz-20kHz : >70dB
Frequency response 20Hz- 20kHz : ± 0.2dB max
Signal to noise ratio : >85 dB
Dynamic range 1kHz : >75dB
Dynamic range 20Hz-20kHz : >70dB
Distortion and noise 1kHz : >75dB
Distortion and noise 20Hz-20kHz : >65dB
 Technical Specifications and Connection Facilities DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 1. EN 5

1.13 PCB Locations

Display Board Basic Engine

EPG Board

DVIO Board

IOE Board

Up Sub Board

Analog Board

Digital Board

TR 06002_001
300103
Remarks:

The EPG Board and the In/Out Extension Board IOE are only
used in the DVDR80.

The DVIO Board is only present in the DVDR75 and only in

combination with the Digital Board 1.5 (Empress). It is not
present in DVDR75 with Digital Board 2.1 (Chrysalis).
 EN 6 2. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Safety Information, General Notes

2. Safety Information, General Notes

2.1 Safety Instructions 2.2 Warnings

2.1.1 General Safety 2.2.1 General

Safety regulations require that during a repair:
• Connect the unit to the mains via an isolation transformer.
• Replace safety components, indicated by the symbol ,
only by components identical to the original ones. Any
other component substitution (other than original type) may
increase risk of fire or electrical shock hazard.
Safety regulations require that after a repair, you must return
the unit in its original condition. Pay, in particular, attention to
the following points:
• Route the wires/cables correctly, and fix them with the
mounted cable clamps.
• Check the insulation of the mains lead for external
damage.
• Check the electrical DC resistance between the mains plug
and the secondary side:
1. Unplug the mains cord, and connect a wire between
the two pins of the mains plug.
2. Set the mains switch to the 'on' position (keep the
mains cord unplugged!).
3. Measure the resistance value between the mains plug
and the front panel, controls, and chassis bottom.
4. Repair or correct unit when the resistance
measurement is less than 1 MΩ.
5. Verify this, before you return the unit to the customer/
user (ref. UL-standard no. 1492).
6. Switch the unit ‘off’, and remove the wire between the
two pins of the mains plug.
2.1.2 Laser Safety
This unit employs a laser. Only qualified service personnel may
remove the cover, or attempt to service this device (due to
possible eye injury).
• All ICs and many other semiconductors are susceptible to
electrostatic discharges (ESD, ). Careless handling
during repair can reduce life drastically. Make sure that,
during repair, you are at the same potential as the mass of
the set by a wristband with resistance. Keep components
and tools at this same potential.
Available ESD protection equipment:
– Complete kit ESD3 (small tablemat, wristband,
connection box, extension cable and earth cable) 4822
310 10671.
– Wristband tester 4822 344 13999.
• Be careful during measurements in the live voltage section.
The primary side of the power supply (pos. 1005), including
the heatsink, carries live mains voltage when you connect
the player to the mains (even when the player is 'off'!). It is
possible to touch copper tracks and/or components in this
unshielded primary area, when you service the player.
Service personnel must take precautions to prevent
touching this area or components in this area. A 'lightning
stroke' and a stripe-marked printing on the printed wiring
board, indicate the primary side of the power supply.
• Never replace modules, or components, while the unit is
‘on’.
2.2.2 Laser
• The use of optical instruments with this product, will
increase eye hazard.
• Only qualified service personnel may remove the cover or
attempt to service this device, due to possible eye injury.
• Repair handling should take place as much as possible
with a disc loaded inside the player.
• Text below is placed inside the unit, on the laser cover
shield:

Laser Device Unit CAUTION VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATI ON WHEN OPEN AVO ID EXPOSURE TO BEAM
ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING VED ÅBNING UNDGÅ UDSÆTTELSE FOR STRÅLING
!
Type : Semiconductor laser ADVARSEL SYNLIG OG USYNLIG LASERSTRÅLING NÅR DEKSEL ÅPNES UNNGÅ EKSPONERING FOR STRÅLEN
VARNING SYNLIG OCH OSYNLIG LASERSTRÅLNING NÄR DENNA DEL ÄR ÖPPNAD BETRAKTA EJ STRÅLEN
VARO! AVATT AESSA OLET ALTTIINA NÄKYVÄLLE JA NÄKYMÄTT ÖMÄLLE LASER SÄTEILYLLE. ÄLÄ KAT SO SÄT EESEEN
GaAlAs VORSICHT SICHTBARE UND UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG WENN ABDECKUNG GEÖFFNET NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETSEN
DANGER VISIBLE AND INVISIBLE LASER RADIATI ON WHEN OPEN AVO ID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM
Wavelength : 650 nm (DVD) AT TENTION RAYO NNEMENT LASER VISIBLE ET INVISIBLE EN CAS D'OUVERTURE EXPOSITION DANGEREUSE AU FAISCEAU

: 780 nm (VCD/CD)
Output Power : 20 mW
Figure 2-2
(DVD+RW writing)
: 0.8 mW
(DVD reading) 2.2.3 Notes
: 0.3 mW
(VCD/CD reading) Dolby
Beam divergence : 60 degree Manufactered under licence from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”,
“Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories. Confidential Unpublished Works.
©1992-1997 Dolby Laboratories, Inc. All rights reserved.

Figure 2-3

Figure 2-1
Trusurround
TRUSURROUND, SRS and symbol (fig 2-4) are trademarks of
SRS Labs, Inc. TRUSURROUND technology is manufactured
Note: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of under licence frm SRS labs, Inc.
procedure other than those specified herein, may result in
hazardous radiation exposure. Avoid direct exposure to beam.

Figure 2-4
 Safety Information, General Notes DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 2. EN 7

Video Plus
“Video Plus+” and “PlusCode” are registered trademarks of the
Gemstar Development Corporation. The “Video Plus+” system
is manufactored under licence from the Gemstar Development
Corporation.

Figure 2-5

Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that
is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other
intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation
and other rights owners.
Use of this copyright protection technology must be autorized
by Macrovision Corporation, and is intended for home and
other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering or disassembly
is prohibited.
 3.
EN 8
3.

N Select previous title/search backwards :

Briefly press the button during playback: Previous chapter/film or
The remote control previous title
Hold down the button: Search backwards
Hold down button during still picture, slow motion backwards
MONITOR Monitor: This button lets you switch between the TV receiver (internal
O Select next title/search forwards :
tuner) in the DVD recorder (TV picture on the TV set) and playback on
Briefly press the button during playback: Next chapter/film or next title
the DVD recorder.
Hold down the button: Search forwards
STANDBY m Switch on or off: To switch set on or off, interrupt menu function, Hold down button during still picture, slow motion forwards
interrupt a programmed recording (TIMER)
STOP h Stop: Stop playback/recording, except with programmed recordings

ENGLISH
TV/DVD TV/DVD switch: Switches the scart socket EXT 2 AUX-I/O directly (TIMER)
Hold down button, opens and closes the disc tray.
Directions For Use

to the TV set. This lets you watch the picture from any unit connected
to this scart socket (set-top box', video recorder or satellite receiver)
AUDIO Audio: Select the audio language. For recording language 1 or 2
and at the same time record from another source.
If you have not connected a device to the EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket, use Record: Record the current TV channel
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

REC/OTR n
this button to switch between TV reception and the DVD recorder.
But this only works if you use a scart cable to connect the TV set to PAUSE 9 Pause (still picture): If this button is pressed during playback, the
your DVD recorder ( EXT 1 TO TV-I/O socket) and your TV set DVD recorder switches to pause. You will see a still picture.
responds to this switch-over. If this button is pressed during recording, the DVD recorder will also
switch to pause.
T/C Title/Chapter: Choose the 'B'(Title)/'C'(Chapter) directly from the
menu bar
If 'INFO' appears in the display, the index menu from a recorded disc or
an introductory film will be shown. In this case, this function is not Additional TV functions
available.
PLAY MODE Playback type: Choose between repeat, shuffle play and intro-scan This will only work with TV sets with the same remote control code *RC5) (e.g. Philips TV sets)
REC MODE Record type (quality): To select the maximum possible record time TV VOLUME q TV volume: Increase TV volume
0..9 Number buttons: 0 - 9 TV VOLUME r TV volume: Reduce TV volume
Directions For Use

DISC-MENU Disc menu: To show the DVD menu or the index screen
SYSTEM-MENU System menu: Call up/cancel the main menu (menu bar at the top of For the following functions you need to hold down the button at the side DVD/TV and then
the screen) select the function you need with the appropriate button.

SELECT Select: Select function/value STANDBY m Switching the TV off:

OK Store/confirm: To store or confirm entry 0..9 Number buttons: 0 - 9

D C Cursor keys : Cursor left, right CH+ A TV programme number: To select a higher programme number

CH+ A Cursor buttons/Plus : Cursor up/ Next programme number CH- B TV programme number: To select a lower programme number

CH- B Cursor buttons/Minus : Cursor down / Previous programme number

TIMER TIMER: To make a TIMER programming with ShowView® /without
ShowView ® or to alter or clear a programmed TIMER

FSS & EDIT: For displaying the edit menu for DVD+R(W) discs, for setting
chapter markers
RETURN Back: Return to previous menu on a video CD (VCD). This also works
with some DVDs.
CLEAR Delete: To delete last entry or clear programmed recording (TIMER)

PLAY G Playback: To play a recorded disc.

 Front of the device Back of the unit

ENGLISH
4MAINS Mains socket: Connection to the mains supply (230V/50Hz)
ANTENNA IN Aerial input: Connection of the aerial
STANDBY/ON m Switch on or off: To switch off or on, interrupt a function, interrupt a
programmed recording (TIMER) TV OUT Aerial output: Connection of the TV set
OPEN/CLOSE J Open/close disc tray: Open/close disc tray EXT 2 AUX-I/O Scart socket 2: Connection of an additional device (satellite receiver,
set-top box, video recorder, camcorder, etc.)
RECORD Record: Record the current TV channel
EXT 1 TO TV-I/O Scart socket 1: Connection of a TV set. RGB output
G Playback: To play a recorded disc
N Select previous title/search backwards
O Select next title/search forwards Output sockets (AUDIO/VIDEO OUT)
h Stop: Interrupt playback/recording OUT S-VIDEO (Y/C) S
Video output: Connection of an S-Video-compatible TV set
OUT VIDEO Video output (yellow socket): Connecting a TV set with a video
(CVBS) input (CVBS, Composite Video)
Behind the flap at the right
hand corner on
OUT L AUDIO R Analogue audio output (white/red socket): Connection of a TV
Directions For Use

the front set with audio input sockets or connection of an additional device

S-VIDEO S
Video socket: Connection of SVHS/Hi8 camcorders or SVHS/Hi8

video recorders (programme number 'CAM1')
Output socket (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT)
Yellow socket Video input socket: Connection of camcorders or video recorders
VIDEO (programme number 'CAM1') DIGITAL AUDIO Digital audio output: Connection of a digital audio device
OUT (amplifier/receiver)
White/red socket Audio input socket left/right : Connection of camcorders or video
left AUDIO right recorders (programme number 'CAM1')

Switching between the S-VIDEO and VIDEO sockets takes place automatically. If both sockets
are in use, the signal at the S-VIDEO socket has priority. The symbols on your DVD recorder
display
DV IN i
Link/DV socket (digital video input, IEEE 1394, FireWire):
Connecting a digital camcorder or other suitable device (programme
number 'CAM2'). These symbols can light up on your DVD recorder display:
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

Multi-function display/text line

•) Clock
•) Disc/title playing time
•) OTR switch-off time
3.

•) Title name
•) Display of the programme number of the TV channel/playing
time/channel name/function.
•) Display of information and alerts
EN 9
 EN 10
3.

IIIIIIIIIIIIIII Disc bar: Displays the current position on the disc (disc pointer). EMPTYDISC The disc inserted is either new or has been completely erased (no
Play/Record: Single flashing segment at the current position. recordings).
Pause: Flashing segment on both sides of the current position.
Stop: Illuminated segment at the current position. PROTECTED The disc is protected against recording.

SAT A satellite recording has been programmed. MAX TITLE The maximum number of titles per disc has been reached. The
maximum number of titles per disc is 48.
TIMER A recording (timer) has been programmed
MAX CHAP The maximum number of chapters per title/disc has been reached. The
o((( A remote control signal has been received maximum number of chapters per title is 124.

VPS/PDC Video programming system / programme delivery control: A VPS or DISC FULL The disc is full. There is no space for new recordings
PDC code will be transmitted for the selected TV program

ENGLISH
PAL DISC A disc with PAL recordings has been inserted. The machine is trying to
LANG II During playback a HiFi/2 channel tone was detected or a HiFi/2 channel record an NTSC signal. Insert a new disc or one that contains NTSC
tone was received. 'I' or 'II' lights up depending on which sound channel recordings.
has been selected
NTSC DISC A disc with NTSC recordings has been inserted. The machine is trying
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

to record a PAL signal. Insert a new disc or one that contains PAL
recordings.
RECORDING An illegal action (e.g. OPEN/CLOSE J button) was attempted during
recording.
Messages in the DVD recorder display
FREETITLE Playback was started for an empty title or the following title is empty.
DISC LOCK An attempt has been made to record during playback of a protected
The following messages may appear in your DVD recorder display disc. This message appears if an attempt is made to insert a chapter
READING marker ( FSS & button).
IS TV ON? The DVD recorder is in initial installation mode. Switch the TV on, then
DISC ERR An error occurred when writing the title. If this error keeps occurring,
read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD
please clean the disc or use a new one.
recorder'.
For instructions on how to clean a disc see the section on 'Cleaning the
NO SIGNAL No input signal available (signal inadequate or unstable) discs' in the next chapter.
Directions For Use

MENU The menu on the screen is active DISC WARN An error occurred when writing the title. Recording was continued; the
error was skipped
OPENING Disc tray opening
SETUP After the automatic search the menu for setting the date/time will
TRAY OPEN Disc tray open appear on the screen.
CLOSING Disc tray closing WAIT 01 During the automatic search the TV channels found are counted
READING Disc being read BLOCKED The disc tray cannot be closed/opened.
MENU UPDT Once recording has been successfully completed the table of contents is SAFE REC The new recording will be added at the end of all the other recordings
created. (SAFE RECORD).
INIT MENU The menu structure is created after the first recording has been made EASYLINK Data is being transferred from the 'EasyLink' TV.
on a new disc
POST-FORMAT Post format
COPY PROT You have tried to copy a copy-protected DVD/video cassette.

WAIT Please wait until this message disappears. The DVD recorder is busy
performing a task.
NO DISC A disc has not been inserted for recording. If a disc has been inserted, it
cannot be read.

INFO Information about the inserted DVD is displayed on the screen

BUSY The DVD recorder is processing the changes to make them DVD
compatible
ERASING The entire disc is erased
B Connecting the DVD recorder

When you install your DVD recorder for the first time, select one of the following options:
Preparing the remote control for
'Connecting with a scart cable and Easy Link'
operation If your TV set is equipped with 'Easy Link, Cinema Link, NexTView Link, Q-Link, Smart Link,
Megalogic, Datalogic, ...' and you wish to use a scart cable.

'Connecting with a scart cable without Easy Link'

The remote control and its batteries are packed separately in the original DVD recorder If your TV set is not equipped with 'Easy Link, Cinema Link, NexTView Link, Q-Link, Smart Link,
packaging. You must install the batteries in the remote control before use - described in the Megalogic, Datalogic, ...' and you wish to use a scart cable.
following section.
'Connecting with an S
Video(Y/C)cable'

ENGLISH
If your TV set is equipped with an S-Video(SVHS) socket.
1 Take the remote control and the enclosed batteries (2 batteries). 'Connecting with video(CVBS) cable'
If your TV set is equipped only with an video(CVBS) socket.
2 Open the battery compartment, insert the batteries as shown and
then close the battery compartment.

Connecting with a scart cable and

'Easy Link'
The remote control is now ready to use.
Its range is approximately 5 to 10 meters.

'Aim' correctly
In the following sections, you will need the remote control for the first time.
Aim the remote control at the DVD recorder and not at the TV set.
Your DVD recorder can exchange information with your TV set using 'Easy Link'. Your TV
channels can also be transferred in the same order from your TV set to your DVD recorder
using 'Easy Link'.
Please see your TV's operating instructions.
Tip

Connecting your DVD recorder to the TV

Directions For Use

Have the following cables ready:

set an aerial cable (1, supplied), a mains cable (2, supplied), a special scart cable (3, suitable for
Easylink).

The necessary cable connections must be made before you can record or playback TV
programmes using your DVD recorder.

Connect the DVD recorder directly to your TV set. If there is a video recorder in between
the picture quality may be poor. 1 Switch off your TV set.
We recommend that you use a scart cable to connect your TV set and DVD recorder.
2 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the
ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.

3 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV OUT socket at
the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the aerial input
socket at the back of the TV set.
What is a scart cable?
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

The scart or Euro AV cable serves as the universal connector for picture,
sound and control signals. With this type of connection, there is practically no
loss of quality in picture or sound transmission.
? 4 Plug in a special scart cable (for Easylink) into the scart socket EXT 1
TO TV-I/O at the back of the DVD recorder and the corresponding
scart socket at the back of the TV set (see TV set operating
3.

instructions).
EN 11

Connecting the DVD recorder 11 12 Connecting the DVD recorder

 EN 12
3.

5 Switch on the TV set.

Connecting with a scart cable without

6 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket
4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into 'Easy Link'
the wall socket.

Have the following cables ready:

an aerial cable (1, supplied), a mains cable (2, supplied), a scart cable (3).

ENGLISH
7 A message appears on the screen announcing that the transfer has
started. 'EASYLINK' appears on the display during transfer.
The TV set transfers all saved TV channels, in the same order, to the
EasyLink DVD recorder.
loading data from TV; This may take several minutes.
please wait
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

1 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the
ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.
a 'Time', 'Year', 'Month', 'Date' appears on the TV screen
Normally the date and time are taken from the data sent by the TV
channel stored on programme P01. If th aerial signal is too weak or there
is excessive interference, you should set the date and time manually:
1 Check if the time in 'Time' is correct.
2 If required, change the time with the number buttons 0..9 on your 2 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV OUT socket at
remote control. the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the aerial input
3 Select the next line with CH+ A or CH- B . socket at the back of the TV set.
4 Check if the displayed settings for 'Year', 'Month' and 'Date' are
correct.
5 When all information is correct, save by pressing OK . Problem
3 Plug a scart cable into the scart socket EXT 1 TO TV-I/O at the
back of the DVD recorder and the scart socket for the DVD
Directions For Use

Virgin mode a I can see more installation menus on my TV set recorder at the back of the TV set (see TV set operating instructions).
Not all the necessary data has been transferred. Please enter the settings
Audio Language by hand as follows. For more information on the various functions see
English 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'. My TV set has several scart sockets. Which one should I use?
Español Select the scart socket that is suitable for both video output and for video
Français 1 Select the desired audio language using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm input.
English with OK . My TV set shows me a selection menu for the scart socket
Italiano 2 Select the desired subtitle language with CH- B or CH+ A and
Press OK to continue Select 'VCR' as tje source for this scart socket. ?
confirm with OK .
3 Select the desired screen format position using CH- B or CH+ A .

'4:3 letterbox' For a 4:3 TV set; cinema format (black bars above and 4 Switch on the TV set.
below the picture)
'4:3 panscan' For a 4:3 TV set; full height format with the sides cut
off 5 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket
'16:9' For a 16:9 TV set
4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into
4 Confirm with OK .
the wall socket.
5 Select the country of your residence with CH- B or CH+ A .
The most important features of the DVD recorder will appear in
If your country does not appear, select 'Other'. scrolling text on the display. After the first installation is completed
6 Confirm with OK . Problem this function will be switched off. How you switch on this function
again, read in the chapter 'User preferences' in the section 'standby'.

Initial installation is now complete. 6 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m . 'IS TV ON?'
will appear on the display.

7 If the connection was properly made and your TV was automatically

switched to the programme number for the scart socket, e.g. 'EXT',
'0', 'AV', you will see the following picture:

Connecting the DVD recorder 13 14 Connecting the DVD recorder

 4 Insert one end of the supplied audio (Cinch) cable into the red/white
Virgin mode Cinch socket OUT L AUDIO R at the back of the DVD recorder
a My screen is empty. and the other end into the audio input socket (usually red/white) on
Menu Language b Many TV sets are switched by the DVD recorder to the programme the TV set (usually labelled 'Audio in' or 'AV in'. See TV operating
English number for the scart socket by way of a control signal sent through the
instructions).
Español scart cable.
Français b If the TV set does not automatically switch to the scart socket programme 5 Switch on the TV set. Switch the TV set over to the SVHS input
Italiano number, manually change to the corresponding programme number on your
socket or select the relevant programme number. Please see your
Deutsch TV set (see your TV's operating instructions).
Press OK to continue
TV's operating instructions for the programme number you need.
b Check that the scart cable is connected from the TV set to the EXT 1
TO TV-I/O socket on the DVD recorder. The EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket is
intended only for additional devices. Problem

ENGLISH
Then, read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.
Connecting with an S
Video(Y/C)cable
This connecting cable, also known as the SVHS cable, is used to transmit the brightness signal (Y
signal) and colour signal (C signal) separately. This mini DIN socket/plug is also called a Hosiden
socket/plug.
6 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket
4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into
the wall socket.
The most important features of the DVD recorder will appear in
scrolling text on the display. After the first installation is completed
this function will be switched off. How you switch on this function
again, read in the chapter 'User preferences' in the section 'standby'.
7 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m . IS TV ON?'
will appear on the display.
Then, read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.

Have the following cables ready: Connecting with video(CVBS) cable

an aerial cable (1, supplied), a mains cable (2, supplied), an S-Video(SVHS) cable (3), an audio
cable (4, supplied, red/white plug).
This cable, usually with yellow Cinch connectors, is used for transmitting the Composite Video
signal (FBAS, CVBS). In this method of transmission the colour signal and the brightness signal
Directions For Use

are transmitted on the same cable. In certain circumstances, this can lead to problems with the
picturem, such as 'Moiré' patterns.

1 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the
ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.
Have the following cables ready:
an aerial cable (1, supplied), a mains cable (2, supplied), a video (CVBS)cable (3, supplied, yellow
plug), an audio cable (4, supplied, red/white plug).

2 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV OUT socket at
the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the aerial input
socket at the back of the TV set.
1 Remove the aerial cable plug from your TV set. Insert it into the
ANTENNA IN socket at the back of the DVD recorder.

3 Insert one end of an S-Video(SVHS) cable into the OUT S-VIDEO

(Y/C) socket at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into
the S-Video (SVHS) input socket on the TV set (usually labelled
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

'S-Video in' or 'SVHS in'. See TV operating instructions).

2 Insert one end of the supplied aerial cable into the TV OUT socket at
the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into the aerial input
socket at the back of the TV set.
3.
EN 13

Connecting the DVD recorder 15 16 Connecting the DVD recorder


3 Insert one end of the supplied video (CVBS) cable into the yellow
Cinch socket OUT VIDEO (CVBS) at the back of the DVD
recorder and the other end into the video input socket (usually
yellow) on the TV set (usually labelled 'Video in' or 'AV in'. See TV
operating instructions).
4 Insert one end of the supplied audio (Cinch) cable into the red/white
Cinch socket OUT L AUDIO R at the back of the DVD recorder
and the other end into the audio input socket (usually red/white) on
the TV set (usually labelled 'Audio in' or 'AV in'. See TV operating
instructions).
5 Switch on the TV set. Switch the TV set over to the Video/Audio
input socket or select the relevant programme number. Please see
your TV's operating instructions for the programme number you need.
6 Insert one end of the supplied mains cable into the mains socket
4MAINS at the back of the DVD recorder and the other end into
the wall socket.
The most important features of the DVD recorder will appear in
scrolling text on the display. After the first installation is completed
this function will be switched off. How you switch on this function
again, read in the chapter 'User preferences' in the section 'standby'.
7 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m . 'IS TV ON?'
will appear on the display.
Then, read the paragraph on 'Initial installation' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.
Connecting the DVD recorder
EN 14
Connecting additional devices
3.
C
Connecting additional devices to the
second scart socket
You can connect additional devices such as decoders, satellite receivers, camcorders, etc. to the
EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket. When playback is started on this additional device the DVD recorder
automatically connects the EXT 2 AUX-I/O scart socket with the EXT 1 TO TV-I/O scart
ENGLISH
socket. You will then see the picture from the additional device on your TV set, even if the
DVD recorder is switched off.
The TV/DVD button on the remote control allows you to switch between playback through the
EXT 2 AUX-I/O scart socket and playback from the DVD recorder.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1
Connecting additional video recorders
You can connect a video recorder to the EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket.
If you have an SVHS video recorder you can also use the OUT S-VIDEO (Y/C) socket and the
OUT L AUDIO R sockets.
Please note:
Most prerecorded video cassettes and DVDs are copy-protected. If you try to copy them you
will see the message 'COPY PROT' on the DVD recorder's display.
a When copying video cassettes the display on the DVD recorder
shows 'NO SIGNAL'
Directions For Use
b Check that the cable is plugged in firmly.
b If a recording is made from a video recorder, change the tracking on the
video recorder.
b The DVD recorder may not be able to recognise the video input signal if
this signal is poor or does not comply with relevant standards.
a When I copy DVD video discs or prerecorded video cassettes the
picture is fuzzy and the brightness varies
b This happens if you try to copy DVDs or video cassettes that have been
copy-protected. Even though the picture on the TV is fine the recording on
a DVD+R(W) is faulty. This interference is unavoidable with copy-protected
DVDs or video cassettes. Problem
17 18 Connecting additional devices
 Connecting audio devices to the digital
Connect camcorder to the front sockets
audio socket
To copy camcorder recordings, you can use the front sockets. These sockets are located behind
the flap on the left hand side.
At the back of the DVD recorder there is a digital audio output socket DIGITAL AUDIO
Best picture quality OUT for an coaxial cable.

If you have a DV or Digital 8 camcorder, connect the DV IN input of the DVD recorder to the These can be used to connect the following:

ENGLISH
appropriate DV output on the camcorder. •) an A/V receiver or an A/V amplifier with a digital multi
channel sound decoder
When films are transferred the original recording date and time are stored as DVD subtitles. •) a receiver with two
channel digital stereo (PCM)
On playback, this data can be displayed on the TV screen by using the 'E' function (Subtitle).

Very good picture quality

If you have a Hi8 or S-VHS(C) camcorder, connect the S-VIDEO input of the DVD recorder to
the appropriate S-VHS output on the camcorder.
You must also connect the audio input left AUDIO right on the DVD recorder to the audio
output on the camcorder.
Good picture quality
If you have a camcorder that only has a single video output (Composite Video, CVBS), connect
the VIDEO input on the DVD recorder to the appropriate output on the camcorder.
You must also connect the audio input left AUDIO right on the DVD recorder to the audio
output on the camcorder.
Digital multi
channel sound
Digital multi-channel sound offers the best possible sound quality. You will
need a multi-channel A/V receiver or amplifier that supports at least one of
the audio formats of the DVD recorder (MPEG2, Dolby Digital and DTS).
Consult the operating instructions for your receiver to find out which audio
formats it supports. ?
a All I can hear from my loudspeakers is a loud distorted noise
b The receiver is not compatible with the digital audio format of the DVD
recorder. The audio format of the DVD disc is displayed in the status
window when you switch to anoter language. Playback in six-channel digital
Directions For Use

Connecting audio devices to the analogue surround sound is only possible if the receiver has a digital multi-channel Problem
sound decoder.
audio sockets

Two audio output sockets OUT L AUDIO R are located on the back of the DVD recorder
(audio signal output left/right)

These can be used to connect the following:

•) a receiver with Dolby Surround Pro Logic
•) a receiver with two
channel analogue stereo

Can I use the 'Phono' input on my amplifier?

This socket (input) on the amplifier is designed only for record players
without preamplifiers. Do not use this input for connecting the DVD
recorder.
The DVD recorder or the amplifier may be damaged as a result. ?
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1
3.
EN 15

Connecting additional devices 19 20 Connecting additional devices

 EN 16

Installing your DVD recorder

3.

D
7 Select the desired screen format position using CH- B or CH+ A .
Initial installation Virgin mode These settings will only be used if you insert a DVD that contains this
information.
TV Shape
After successfully connecting your DVD recorder to the TV set and other additional devices as 4:3 letterbox
described in the previous chapters, this chapter will show you how to start the initial installation. 4:3 panscan Which screen formats can I select?
The DVD recorder automatically seeks out and stores all available TV channels. 16:9
'4:3 letterbox' for a 'wide-screen' (cinema format) picture with black bars at
the top and bottom.
Connecting additional devices Press OK to continue '4:3 panscan' for a full-height picture with the sides trimmed.
If you have connected additional devices such as a satellite receiver to the '16:9' for a wide-screen TV set (screen edge ratio 16:9) ?
aerial cable, switch them on. The automatic channel search will recognise it

ENGLISH
and save it.
No aerial connected 8 Confirm with OK .
Even if you only want to use the DVD recorder to play back or have only
connected a satellite receiver, you must still complete the initial installation.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

This is necessary so that the basic settings are stored correctly. Once initial 9 Select the country of your residence with CH- B or CH+ A .
installation is complete you can use the DVD recorder as normal. Tip Virgin mode If your country does not appear, select 'Other'.

Country
Austria Why do I have to select a country?
Belgium To call up the specific settings for the respective country, you must first install
1 Select the desired language for the on-screen menu by pressing Denmark the country. ?
Virgin mode CH- B or CH+ A . Finland
France
Menu Language Press OK to continue
English
0 Confirm with OK .
What is an on
screen menu?
Español The multi-language on-screen menu takes the mystery out of using your new
Français DVD recorder. All settings and/or functions are displayed on your TV screen
Italiano
A After you connect the aerial (or cable TV, satellite receiver, etc.) to
in the relevant language. ?
Deutsch the DVD recorder, press OK .
Press OK to continue The automatic TV channel search starts. 'WAIT' will appear on the
display.
Directions For Use

2 Confirm with OK .
Installation
Autom. search a The DVD recorder cannot find any TV stations
3 Select the desired audio language using CH- B or CH+ A . b Select channel 1 on the TV set. Can you see the stored TV channel on the
Virgin mode Searching for TV channels TV set?
00 Channels found If not, check the cable connection from the aerial (aerial socket) to the
Audio Language What is an audio language?
DVD recorder and to the TV set.
English The DVD will play the sound in the language you select, provided this b Please have patience.
Español language is available on the disc. If it is not available on the disc the fist
Please wait The DVD recorder searches the entire frequency range in order to find
Français language on the DVD will be used instead. The DVD Video Disc menu, if and save the largest possible number of TV channels.
English available, will also be displayed in the language you select. ?
Italiano b If you have not connected an aerial, go through all the basic settings right
Press OK to continue to the end and then, if you wish, start the automatic search (see 'Automatic
TV station search'). Problem
4 Confirm with OK .

B When the automatic TV channel search is complete, 'Autom. search

5 Select the desired language for the subtitles by pressing CH- B or complete' will appear on the TV screen.
Virgin mode CH+ A . 'Time', 'Year', 'Month', 'Date' will then appear on the TV screen.
Subtitle Language
English What is the subtitle language?
Español Autom. search C Check if the time in 'Time' is correct.
The subtitles will be displayed in the language you select, provided this
Français language is available on the disc. If it is not available on the disc the fist
English
À If required, change the time with the number buttons 0..9 on your
language on the DVD will be used instead. ? Autom. search complete
Italiano 00 Channels found remote control.
Press OK to continue
Time 20:01 Á Select the next line with CH+ A or CH- B .
6 Confirm with OK . Year 2003
Month 01
Date 01

To continue
Press OK

Installing your DVD recorder 21 22 Installing your DVD recorder

 Â Check if the displayed settings for 'Year', 'Month' and 'Date' are
correct.
Allocating a decoder
à When all information is correct, save by pressing OK .

Some TV channels send coded TV signals that can only be viewed properly with a purchased or
rented decoder. You can connect such a decoder (descrambler) to your DVD recorder. The
The initial installation is now complete.
following function automatically activates the connected decoder for the TV channel you want to
watch.
Satellite receiver
If you are connecting a satellite receiver, please read the section on 'Using a

ENGLISH
satellite receiver'.
Decoder
If you are connecting a decoder, you must install it as described in the next How do I allocate the decoder for Easy Link?
section. Tip
If your TC=V set supports 'Easy Link' the decoder must be assigned to the
relevant TV channel on the TV set (see the operating instructions for your TV
set). Settings cannot then be made in this menu. ?

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

a Sound may be distorted on some TV channels.
b If the sound is distorted on any of the stored TV channels or if there is no
sound at all, the wrong TV system may have been stored for the TV
channel. Read 'Manual TV channel search' for information on how to
change the TV system.
the DVD recorder.
2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .
Problem 3 Use the CH+ A and CH- B buttons or the number buttons
0..9 on the remote control to select the TV channel for which you
want to use the decoder. If necessary, use the MONITOR button to
switch to the internal tuner.

Using a satellite receiver 4 Press the SYSTEM-MENU button on the remote control. The menu
bar appears.
Directions For Use

TV channels from a satellite receiver (connected to scart socket EXT 2 AUX-I/O ) are received 5 Select 'A' symbol with D or C .
on the DVD recorder on programme number 'EXT2'
6 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .
If necessary, use the MONITOR button to switch to the internal tuner.
7 Select 'Manual search' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with
Select programme number 'EXT1' with 0 on the remote control and then select programme
C.
number 'EXT2' with CH- B .
You should select the TV channels to be received by the satellite receiver directly on the
Installation 8 Select 'Decoder' using CH- B or CH+ A .
receiver itself.
Manual search
9 Select 'On' with D or C .
Channel/freq. CH
Entry/search 01
Programme number 01
TV channel name BBC1 How do I switch the decoder off again?
Decoder Off Use C to select 'Off' in the 'Decoder' line on the screen (Decoder off). ?
TV system PAL-BG
NICAM On
Fine tuning 0 0 Confirm with OK .
To store
Press OK
A To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

Your decoder has now been allocated to this TV channel.

3.
EN 17

Installing your DVD recorder 23 24 Installing your DVD recorder

 EN 18
3.

Manual TV channel search How can I change the symbol of a TV channel?

1
In 'TV channel name', press C .
In some cases, not all of the available TV channels may have been found and stored during initial 2 Select the desired symbol position using D or C .
installation. In this case, you will need to search for and store the missing or coded TV channels 3 Change the symbol at the symbol position with CH- B or CH+ A .
manually. 4 Select the next symbol position in the same way.
5 Keep pressing C until the cursor disappears. Tip

ENGLISH
How can I change the TV system of the TV channel?
In 'TV system', use D or C to select the TV system that produces the
Manual search with EasyLink least distortion of picture and sound.
With 'Easy Link', the DVD recorder will automatically download the TV
What is NICAM?
channels stored on the TV set. This is why some lines have no function. To
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

store new TV channels, they must first be stored on the TV set. The NICAM is a digital sound transmission system. Using NICAM, you can
information will then be transferred to the DVD recorder automatically. Tip transmit either 1 stereo channel or 2 separate mono channels. However, if
reception is poor and the sound distorted you can turn off NICAM.
In 'NICAM', select 'Off' using D or C .

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for How can I improve the automatic process for storing channels?
the DVD recorder. To change the automatic process for storing channels (fine tuning), select
'Fine tuning'.
2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m . Using D or C you can try to fine-tune the TV channelmanually. Tip
3 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar
0 Press OK to store the TV channel.
appears.
A To search for other TV channels, begin again at 8 .
4 Select 'A' symbol with D or C .
B To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .
5 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .
Directions For Use

6 Select 'Manual search' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with

C. Sorting TV channels automatically
Installation 7 In 'Channel/freq.', select the desired display using C .
(Follow TV)
Manual search 'Freq.'(Frequency), 'CH'(Channel), 'S-CH'(Special/hyperband channel)
Channel/freq. CH When the automatic channel search function is activated, the TV channels are stored in a specific
Entry/search 01 8 In 'Entry/search', enter the frequency or channel of the TV station
Programme number 01 using the number buttons 0..9 . order. This may differ from the order in which the TV channels appear on your TV set.
TV channel name BBC1 This function changes the order of the TV channels stored in your DVD recorder to match the
Decoder Off order on the TV set.
TV system PAL-BG
NICAM On a I don't know the channel for my TV station This only works if the DVD recorder ( EXT 1 TO TV-I/O socket) and the TV set are
Fine tuning 0 b In this case, press C to start the automatic search. A changing channel connected with a scart cable.
To store number/frequency number will appear on the TV screen.
Press OK Continue the automatic search until you have found the TV channel you
are looking for. Problem
What does EasyLink do?
9 Using D or C in 'Programme number', select the programme
number you want to use for the TV channel, e.g. '01'. If your TV set supports 'Easylink,..', TV channels will be stored during initial
installation in the same order as they appear on the TV set. To store the TV
channels in a different order, you'll need to change the order on the TV set.
When you start the Follow TV function the information is transferred again
from the TV set. ?

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

Installing your DVD recorder 25 26 Installing your DVD recorder

 2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press the SYSTEM-MENU button on the remote control. The menu Automatic TV channel search
bar appears.

4 Select 'A' symbol with D or C .

During installation, all available TV channels are searched for and stored. If the channel
5 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C . assignments of your cable or satellite TV provider change or if you are reinstalling the DVD
recorder, e.g. after moving house, you can start this procedure again. This will replace the stored
6 Select line 'Follow TV' with CH- B or CH+ A . and confirm with TV channels with the new ones.
the C button.

ENGLISH
7 Confirm the message on the screen with OK . 'TV 01' will appear in
the DVD recorder display.

8 Select programme number '1' on the TV set.
TV 01
a I cannot switch my TV set to programme number '1'
b If you have connected additional devices to the EXT 2 AUX-I/O socket,
please disconnect these devices. Other connected devices may have
switched the TV set to the programme number of the scart socket.
9 Confirm with OK on the DVD recorder remote control.
'WAIT' will appear in the display. The DVD recorder compares the TV
channels on the TV set and the DVD recorder.
If the DVD recorder finds the same TV channel as on the TV set it
stores it at 'P01'.
a 'NOTV' will appear in the display. The DVD recorder is not
receiving a video signal from the TV set.
What does Easy Link do?
With Easylink, you can search for and store TV channels only on the TV set.
These settings are accepted by the DVD recorder. Use this function to start
the transfer of TV channels from the TV set. ?
Problem
1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for
the DVD recorder.
2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .
3 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar
appears.
4 Select 'A' symbol with D or C .
5 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .
Directions For Use

b Chech the connectors at both ends of the scart cable.

6 Select 'Autom. search' using CH- B or CH+ A .
b Check your TV's operating instructions to see which scart socket is used
for video signals. 7 Press C .
b If the problem persists, you won't be able to use this feature.
Please read 'Adding and clearing TV channels manually'. Problem
Installation 8 The automatic TV channel search starts. This allows the DVD
0 Wait until for example 'TV 02' appears in the display. Autom. search recorder to save all available TV channels. This procedure may take
Searching for TV channels
several minutes.

A Select the next programme number on the TV set, e.g. '2'. 00 Channels found 9 When all the TV channels have been found, 'Autom. search
TV 02 complete' will appear on the TV screen.
B Confirm with OK on the DVD recorder remote control.
Please wait 0 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

Deleting sorting
You can delete incorrect TV channel sorting by pressing D . Tip

C Repeat steps 0 to B until you have assigned all the TV channels. You can read about how to search for a TV channel manually in 'Manual TV channel search'.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

À To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

3.
EN 19

Installing your DVD recorder 27 28 Installing your DVD recorder

 EN 20
3.

Setting the language/country

Adding and clearing TV channels manually
After you have performed the automatic channel search you may not agree with the sequence in
which the individual TV channels have been allocated to the programme positions (programme
numbers). You can use this function to rearrange the TV channels already stored or to delete
TV channels you don't want or those with poor reception.
You can select the country and, for DVD playback, the language for the subtitles and the audio
language. Please note that with some DVDs the audio language and/or subtitle language can be
changed only via the DVD menu.
For bilingual shows you can also select the sound channel of the TV station for recording.
You also have the option of setting one of the displayed languages for the on-screen menu
(OSD). However, the DVD recorder display will only display English text regardless of this
setting.

ENGLISH
EasyLink 1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for
With Easylink, you can search for and store TV channels only on the TV set. the DVD recorder.
These settings are then accepted by the DVD recorder.
That is why you cannot select this function manually. 2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

The teletext clock resets automatically

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar
If you store a TV channel which transmits TXT/PDC on programme number
'P01', the date and time will automatically be transmitted and constantly
appears.
updated. As a result, the changes from summer time to winter time and back
again will be made automatically. Tip 4 Select 'A' symbol with D or C .

5 Select line 'Language' with CH- B or CH+ A . and confirm with

the C button.
1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for
the DVD recorder.
6 Select the appropriate line and confirm with C .
2 Switch on the DVD recorder. Press the SYSTEM-MENU button on
the remote control. The menu bar appears.
Language Which settings can I choose?
3 Select 'A' symbol with D or C . Audio Language English 'Audio Language' : Playback language (audio language)
Recording audio Language 1 'Recording audio' : Type of audio recording 'Language 1' or 'Language
Subtitle English
Directions For Use

4 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C . 2'

Menu English
'Subtitle' : Subtitle language
Country Other
5 Select 'Sort TV channels' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm 'Menu': Language of the OSD menu
with C . 'Country' : Location (country) Tip

7 Select the appropriate setting using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm

Installation 6 Using CH- B or CH+ A select the TV channel that you want to with OK .
Sort TV channels delete or whose order you want to change.
...
• P01 BBC1
P02 BBC2 7 Confirm with C . 8 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .
P03 ITV
P04
P05 Deleting TV channels
P06
... Unwanted channels or those with poor reception can be deleted using Switching over audio recording
CLEAR . Proceed at step 6 . Tip
To sort To exit press
Press › SYSTEM MENU (2
channel sound)
8 Using CH- B or CH+ A , shift the TV channel to the desired
position and press the D button. The DVD recorder will insert the Some TV programmes transmit an extra audio signal in stereo in addition to the normal audio
TV channel. signal (2-channel sound). In most cases this means that an additional language is available. If a TV
programme is available in, say, English and German, German may be available as the second
9 Repeat steps 6 to 8 until you have resorted/deleted all the TV language.
channels you want. To record TV programmes in stereo or 2-channel sound you can select Stereo or the language
you want as the default setting. This setting does not become active until the sound of a TV
0 To store, press OK .
programme is transmitted in 2-channel sound.
A To end, press SYSTEM-MENU . When you play back the recording you can play back the sound only in the language you used
for the recording.

Installing your DVD recorder 29 30 Installing your DVD recorder

 E On
screen information
1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for You can check or change many of the functions and settings of your DVD recorder via the
the DVD recorder. system menu bar. The menu bar cannot be displayed during recording.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar Symbols in the menu bar
appears.

4 Select 'A' symbol with D or C . Press SYSTEM-MENU to open and close the menu bar (main menu). Use D and C to select
the relevant function. Use CH- B to confirm the function and go either to another menu or
execute the function directly.
5 Select line 'Language' with CH- B or CH+ A . and confirm with

ENGLISH
Some functions may not be available, depending on the disc inserted.
the C button.

Language 6 Select line 'Recording audio' and confirm with C .

Audio Language English Menu bar 1
Recording audio Language 1 7 Select 'Language 1' or 'Language 2' with CH- B or CH+ A and
Subtitle English confirm with OK .
Menu English
Country Other A User preferences
8 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .
B Title/track

C Chapter/index

Setting the time and date D Audio language

E Subtitle language

If the display shows an incorrect time or '--:--', the time and date must be reset manually. F Camera angle
If a TV channel which transmits TXT/PDC (teletext/PDC) is stored under programme number
'P01', the time and date will automatically be taken from the TXT/PDC information. G Zoom

1 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar Menu bar 2
Directions For Use

appears.

2 Select 'A' symbol with D or C .

While menu bar 1 is being displayed you can go to menu bar 2 by pressing C again.
3 Select 'Installation' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

4 Select 'Time/Date' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C . H Sound

I Frame advance

Installation 5 Check if the time in 'Time' is correct. If required, change the time J Slow motion
Time/Date with the number buttons 0..9 on your remote control.
K Fast forward
Time 20:00
Year 2003 6 Check 'Year', 'Month' and 'Date' in the same way. To move between
L Search by time
Month 01 the fields, use CH- B or CH+ A .
Date 01
7 Check the displayed settings and confirm with OK .
'Stored' will appear briefly on the screen.
To exit press 8 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .
SYSTEM MENU
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1
3.
EN 21

Installing your DVD recorder 31 32 On-screen information

 EN 22
3.

Field for temporary messages Operating mode symbols

The top left corner of the menu line contains a field for temporary messages relating to the R Recording
various operating modes. This information appears briefly on the screen when certain disc
functions have been activated: S Stop

T Playback

Shuffle U Playback
Pause

ENGLISH
 Scan V Record
Pause

 Repeat entire disc X Search forwards (8x speed)

 Repeat title Y Search backwards (8x speed)

DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

 Repeat track Z Slow motion

 Repeat chapter

 Repeat from A to the end

Tuner information box
 Repeat from A to B

Camera angle This field is located in the bottom left-hand corner of the screen. The aerial signal, the TV
channel and the TV channel name for the selected programme are displayed.
Child lock enabled

Resume playback a Current channel/selected input socket

Illegal action b No signal

The TV channel is not available/the additional device is not connected or
it is switched off
Directions For Use

Status field c Copy
protected signal

The status field shows the current operating mode (status) of the DVD recorder and the type of
disc inserted. This display can be disabled. Timer information box
Disc type symbols This box appears above the tuner information box. When a timer recording is set, it shows the
timer icon and the start time or date of the first programme to be recorded.
If no timer recording is scheduled, the current time is displayed.
DVD+RW This box disappears during playback of a disc or after a recording starts.
M
W DVD+R f Timer starts on the day shown

N DVD
Video g OTR recording runs until the stop time displayed

O Video
CD h Current time

No timer event programmed
P No disc

Q Error

On-screen information 33 34 On-screen information

F playback

General notes on playback

With this DVD recorder you can play back the following systems: Opening/closing the tray using the remote control
•) DVD Video You can open and close the disc tray using the remote control.
•) (Super)Video CD Disc Press and hold the STOP h button on the remote control until the dialog
•) DVD+RW Disc box shows 'OPENING' or 'CLOSING'. Tip
•) DVD+R Disc
•) DVD-RW (video mode, finalised) 3 Playback starts automatically.
•) DVD-R

ENGLISH
•) CD-R
•) CD-RW A menu may appear when a DVD is played back. If the titles and chapters are numbered, press a
•) Audio CD number button on the remote control. You can also use the D , C , CH+ A ,
•) MP3 CD CH- B buttons or number buttons 0..9 to select a menu item and confirm with OK .
You can operate the video recorder using the remote control or the buttons on the front of the You can also access the menu using DISC-MENU on the remote control.
DVD recorder. For further information see 'Playing a DVD video disc'.

a The display will read 'PIN'

b The child lock has been activated for the inserted disc. Read the sections
on 'Child lock' and 'Releasing a disc' in the chapter on 'Access control When a DVD+RW is played back the index overview appears. Using CH- B , CH+ A , N ,
(child lock). O select the title you want to play back.
Confirm with OK .
a The menu on the screen is showing an 'X'
For further information see 'Playing back a DVD+RW/+R Disc'.
b Some DVD discs can be manufactured so that certain steps are required
before the disc can be played, or so that only limited operation is possible
during playback. When an 'X' appears on the screen the selected feature is
not possible. If playback does not start automatically, press PLAY G .
a The screen is showing regional code information For further information see ' Playing an audio CD'.
b Since DVD films are not normally released in all parts of the world at the
same time, all DVD players have a specific regional code. Discs can be given
a regional code. If the regional codes differ between the player and the
If the 'h' symbol appears in the display, start playback by pressing PLAY G .
disc, playback is not possible.
Directions For Use

b The regional code is shown on the label on the back of the machine.
Problem
b The regional code does not apply to recordable DVD discs.
If a menu appears on the screen, use the remote control buttons indicated on the screen to select
the menu option you want (PREV= N , NEXT= O ) or with the number buttons 0..9 .
For further information see ' Playing a (Super) Video CD'.

Inserting a disc
Playing a DVD video disc
1 Press the OPEN/CLOSE J button on the front. The disc tray will
OPENING P01 open. While the disc tray is opening, 'OPENING' and then 'TRAY OPEN'
when the tray is fully open. 1 If playback does not start automatically, press PLAY G .
C01 2:04 This will appear on the display:
2 Carefully place the disc in the tray with the label facing up and press title, chapter, elapsed time.
PLAY G or OPEN/CLOSE J . 'CLOSING' and then 'READING' will
appear in the display. The information on the disc will be read. 2 To stop playback, press STOP h on the remote control or h on
the DVD recorder.

How do I insert a double
sided DVD?

3 To eject the disc, press OPEN/CLOSE J on the front of the DVD
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

Double-sided discs do not have labelling over the whole surface. The labelling
for each side is in the centre of the disc. To play a side its label must be recorder.
facing up. ?
3.
EN 23

playback 35 36 playback
 EN 24
3.

Playing a DVD+RW/ +R disc Playing an MP3 CD

1 If the disc is write-protected or a finalised DVD+R disc, playback MP3 (MPEG1 Audio Layer-3) files are highly compressed music files. Using this technology the
starts automatically. data volume can be compressed by a factor of 10. This means it is possible to record 10 hours
of music in CD quality on a single CD-ROM.

2 If playback does not start automatically, use the CH- B or When creating MP3 CDs please note the following:
C01 ANNA P01 CH+ A button to select the title you want to play on the index File system: ISO9660

ENGLISH
screen. Directory structure: maximum of 8 levels
You can also use the N or O button on the front. Formats: *.mp3
Filenames: maximum of 12 characters (8+3)
3 Press the PLAY G button. Maximum of 32 albums, 999 titles
This will appear on the display: Supported sampling frequencies: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz). Music with sampling frequencies other than
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

title number, recording quality. these will be skipped.

Supported bit rates: 32, 64, 96, 128, 192, 256 (kbit/s)
a I can see the message 'EMPTYDISC' ID3 Tag: Version 1, 1.1. In later versions the directory name is displayed as the album and the
b The disc does not contain any recordings. Problem filename as the title.

Important notes for playback:

4 To stop playback, press STOP h on the remote control or h on
Only the first session of a multi-session CD will play back.
the DVD recorder.

5 To eject the disc, press OPEN/CLOSE J on the front of the DVD 1 Insert an MP3 CD. Playback starts automatically.
recorder.
MP3 CD display
If the TV is on, the MP3 CD screen appears automatically.
What should I note when playing back different recording types
During playback, the current track number and its elapsed playing time will
(qualities)?
Directions For Use

show on the TV screen and on the recorder display.

The correct recording quality 'M1, M2, M2x, M3, M4, M6' will automatically
be selected during playback.
For more information see the section on 'Selecting the recording type
(quality)' in the chapter on 'Manual recording'.
During stopped playback ( STOP h button) the numbers of the albums will
show on the TV screen and on the display.
? Further information on the album, track and artist will also be displayed if
included in the ID tag. Tip

Playing an audio CD 2 Stop playback using STOP h . The number of albums is displayed in
the display.

You can also use the DVD recorder to play audio CDs
1 Insert an audio CD. Playback starts automatically.
Audio CD display'
If the TV is on, the audio CD screen appears automatically.
During playback, the current track number and its elapsed playing time will
show on the TV screen and on the recorder display.
Additional playback features
Using N or O select the next or previous title.
You can also use the T/C button to select titles and albums.
1 Press the T/C button and use the C or D button to select the 'T'
symbol for title or 'C' for chapter.
2 Use the CH- B or CH+ A buttons or the number buttons 0..9 on
the remote control to select the number of the title/chapter.
You can also use the repeat functions ( PLAY MODE button). Tip
Tip

2 Stop playback using STOP h . The number of tracks and the total
time are displayed.

playback 37 38 playback
 G Additonal playback features

Playing a (Super) Video CD Changing to another title/chapter

(Super) Video CDs may be equipped with PBC (Play Back Control). This means that special If there is more than one title or chapter on a disc you can change to another title or chapter
playback functions (menus) can be directly selected. The video CD must be PBC compatible (see as follows. However if there are several chapters within a title, these will be selected. The title
CD case). can then still be selected via the menu bar.
'PBC' is active in the default settings.

1 During playback, press O to go to the next title/chapter. Press

ENGLISH
N to return to the start of the current title/chapter. Press
1 Insert a (Super) Video CD. N twice to return to the start of the previous title/chapter.
If the 'h' symbol appears in the display, start playback by pressing
PLAY G .

2 If a menu appears on the screen, use the remote control buttons Use the T/C (title/chapter) button
indicated on the screen to select the menu option you want 1 Press T/C (title/chapter) and then use CH+ A or CH- B to select the
(PREV= N , NEXT= O ) or with the number buttons 0..9 . appropriate title.
If a PBC menu consists of a list of titles, you can select a title directly. Make sure the symbol 'T' (title) is selected in the menu bar.
2 Use T/C to select chapters within a title. Press T/C and use C to
3 Use RETURN to go back to the previous menu select the 'C' symbol (chapter).
Now select the appropriate chapter with CH+ A or CH- B . Tip
4 Stop playback using STOP h .

Searching a disc
You can search the disc for a recording at 4x, 8x or 32x playback speed. Other speeds can only
be selected via the menu bar ('K').
Directions For Use

1 During playback, press and hold N (reverse) or O (forwards) to

switch to the search feature. You can switch between the playback
speeds using N / O .

2 To continue playback, press PLAY G twice at your chosen location.

a No sound
b The sound is switched off in search mode. This is not a fault in your
machine. Problem

Search feature via menu bar

1 During playback press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The
menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.
2 Select the ' K ' symbol using C or D and confirm with CH- B .
3 You can now use the D or C button to select different forward and
backward search speeds.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

4 If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM-MENU button.
5 To continue playback, press PLAY G twice.
Tip
3.
EN 25

playback 39 40 Additonal playback features

 EN 26
3.

3 Enter the start time with the digit keys 0..9 from where playback
should start.
Still picture
4 Confirm with OK .

1 During playback, press PAUSE 9 to stop playback and display a still a The time entered will flash on the screen
C01 2:04 picture. b The selected title is shorter than the time entered. Enter a new time or
cancel the function by pressing SYSTEM-MENU . Problem

Frame advance via menu bar 5 Playback starts at the time you entered.

ENGLISH
1 During a still picture press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control.
The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.
2 Select the ' I' symbol using C or D and confirm with CH- B .
3 You can now use the D or C button to go forwards or backwards one
Repeat/Shuffle play
frame at a time.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

4 If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM-MENU button. Tip You can mark entire sections or the whole disc for endless playback. Depending on the type of
disc (DVD video, DVD+RW, video CD) you can select a chapter, title or the entire disc.
2 To continue playback, press PLAY G .

1 Select the desired chapter, title or the entire disc and start playback.

Slow motion 2 During playback, press PLAY MODE . By pressing PLAY

MODE again you can chose from the following options:
•) '': repeat chapter (DVD only)
1 During playback press PAUSE 9 on the remote control. Now hold •) '': repeat track/title
down N or O to switch to slow motion. •) '': repeat entire disc (Video CD, Audio CD only)
•) '
': Shuffle
2 You can switch between different speeds using N or O . •) Display disappears: no repeat
Directions For Use

3 To end the repeat, press the STOP h button.

You can also keep pressing the PLAY MODE button until the
Slow motion via menu bar displays disappear.
1 During playback press PAUSE 9 and then SYSTEM-MENU on the
remote control. The menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.
2 Select the ' ' symbol using C or D and confirm with CH- B .
J
3 You can now use the D or C button to select different forward and Repeating a passage (A
B)
backward slow motion speeds.
4 If necessary, switch the menu bar off with the SYSTEM-MENU button. Tip
You can repeat a particular passage within a title/chapter. You need to indicate the start and end
of the passage.
3 To continue playback, press PLAY G twice.

1 During playback press PAUSE 9 at the start point.

You will see a still picture.
Search by time
2 Keep pressing PLAY MODE until '' appears on the screen.
The start point is now saved.
Using this feature you can select where playback should start (select elapsed time). Press PLAY G to start playback.

3 When the end point is reached press OK . '' appears on the

1 During playback press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The TV screen. Playback now takes place within these points.
menu bar will appear at the top of the screen.
4 To end the repeat, press the STOP h button.
2 Select the 'L' symbol using C or D and confirm with CH- B . You can also keep pressing the PLAY MODE button until the
Playback is stopped and a box appears on the screen showing the displays disappear.
elapsed time.

Additonal playback features 41 42 Additonal playback features


Scan feature
This feature plays back the first 10 seconds of each chapter (DVD) or track (CD).
1 During playback, press PLAY MODE . Select '' using PLAY
MODE .
2 After 10 seconds the DVD recorder switches to the next
ENGLISH
chapter/index. To start playback at the relevant chapter/index press
STOP h and then PLAY G .
Camera angle
If a DVD contains scenes that have been shot from different camera angles you can select these
camera angles for playback.
1 During playback, press PAUSE 9 . You will see a still picture.
2 Press SYSTEM-MENU and select the 'F' icon using C .
a The ' ' symbol will be hidden
F
b The selected scene has been shot from only one camera angle. This feature
is therefore not available. For more information please read the cover of
Problem
your DVD disc.
3 Select the required camera angle with CH- B or CH+ A . You can
also directly enter the number with the number buttons 0..9 .
4 After a short time, playback will resume from the new camera angle.
The 'F' symbol will remain visible until a scene starts for which
there is only one camera angle.
Zoom feature
The Zoom feature allows you to enlarge the video image and pan through the enlarged image.
1 During playback, press PAUSE 9 . The DVD recorder switches to
'PAUSE'. You will see a still picture.
2 Press SYSTEM-MENU and select the 'G' icon using C .
3 Select the required zoom factor using CH- B or CH+ A .
4 When 'press OK to pan' appears on the screen, the zoom process
is complete.
5 Press OK . Using CH+ A , CH- B , C , D select the part of the
image you wish to view.
Additonal playback features 43
6 Confirm with OK .
7 To stop the feature, press PLAY G and then SYSTEM-MENU .
Select the audio language
Many pre-recorded DVD discs have more than one audio language. The language initially selected
for playback will be the one you selected when you first set up the DVD recorder. However
you can change the audio language of the inserted disc at any time.
You can change the audio language either using the menu of the inserted disc
( DISC-MENU button) or the AUDIO button. The audio languages for DVD playback in the
two menus may be different. Please note that with some DVDs the audio language and/or
subtitle language can be changed only via the DVD menu.
1 During playback press AUDIO .
2 Select the required audio language using CH- B or CH+ A . You
can also enter the number directly using the number buttons 0..9 .
3 Play continues in the new audio language.
Subtitles
Many pre-recorded DVD discs have more than one subtitle language. The language initially
selected for playback will be the one you selected when you first set up the DVD recorder.
However you can change the subtitle language of the inserted disc at any time.
Directions For Use
You can change the subtitle language either using the menu of the inserted disc
( DISC-MENU button) or the menu bar ( SYSTEM-MENU button). The subtitle languages in
the menus may differ.
1 During playback press SYSTEM-MENU and select the 'E' icon
using C .
2 Select the required subtitle language using CH- B or CH+ A . You
can also enter the number directly using the number buttons 0..9 .
You can switch off subtitles again with 0 or by pressing 'off'.
3 Playback continues in the new subtitle language.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1
3.
EN 27
44 Additonal playback features

Manual recording
H
General
Which discs can I use for recording?
With this DVD recorder, you can record on two types of DVD:
DVD+RW
This disc can be written to and then the contents deleted.
DVD+R
This type of disc can only be recorded once.
If you want to play this DVD in a DVD player it must be finalized using the
'Finalise disc' function. It is not possible to make further recordings using
this disc.
If this disc is to be played in a DVD recorder it must not be finalised. ? the CH+ A or CH- B button to select the point where the recording is
Recordings can be added and deleted. The disc space (playback time) from the
deleted recording cannot be recovered for further recordings
Use the 'Manual recording' function to spontaneously start recording (e.g. to record a TV show
already in progress).
In the 'index display' select the title to be overwritten or 'Empty title' with CH- B , CH+ A .
If you insert recordings between existing recordings, check the lengths of the old and new
recordings. If the new recording is too long the subsequent recording (title/chapter) will be
overwritten.
Insert new recordings at the end of all existing recordings (Safe
Record)
To add a new recording at the end of the last recording on the disc, hold
down the REC/OTR n button until the message 'SAFE REC' appears on the
display.
For DVD+R discs each new recording is always added at the end of all
previous recordings as existing recordings cannot be overwritten.
End of disc is reached
If the end of a disc is reached during recording, recording will stop and the
Recorder will turn itself off automatically. Tip
Please refer to section 'Recording without automatic switch
off', if you want to manually
start and stop your own recording.
If you want to start a recording manually but have it stopped automatically, read the section
'Recording with automatic switch
off'. (e.g. not to record to the end of the disc)
Read the section 'Automatic recording from a satellite receiver', if you want a recording
to be controlled automatically by a satellite receiver.
Read the section 'Direct record' if you want to record a programme currently being shown.
Manual recording
EN 28
3.
Recording without automatic switch
off
1 Switch on the TV set and select the programme number for the DVD
recorder.
2 Insert a disc on which the recording is to be made. This disc is then
checked for content and system. READING' will appear on the display.
a Index display
ENGLISH
b A DVD+RW disc has been inserted that already contains recordings. Use
to start.
a The message 'EMPTYDISC' appears in the display
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1
b The disc inserted is a blank DVD disc.
a A dialog box appears asking you whether you want to delete the
contents or eject the disc
b The disc inserted is a DVD+RW but its contents are not DVD
video-compatible (e.g. a data disc). Recordings on this disc can only be
made if the entire disc is first deleted with the REC/OTR n button.
a The message 'Title limit' appears on the screen if a recording is to
be made
b A disc may contain a maximum of 48 titles (including blank titles). Delete
titles or change the disc. Problem
3 If necessary, use the MONITOR button on the remote control to
switch to the internal tuner in the DVD recorder.
Directions For Use
4 Use CH+ A or CH- B to select the programme number (station
name) you want to record. This will appear on the display:
1 FREETITLE P01 Programme numbers of the external inputs:
'EXT1' Scart socket at the back EXT 1 TO TV-I/O
'EXT2' Scart socket at the back EXT 2 AUX-I/O
'CAM1' Front SVHS/audio sockets S-VIDEO / left AUDIO right
'CAM1' Front video/audio sockets A/V S-VIDEO / left AUDIO right
Switching between the S-VIDEO and VIDEO sockets takes place
automatically. If both sockets are in use, the signal at the
S-VIDEO socket has priority.
'CAM2' Digital Video (i Link) front socket DV IN Tip
5 To start recording, press REC/OTR n on the remote control or
RECORD on the DVD recorder.
If you want to start the recording at the end of the existing
recordings, hold down the REC/OTR n button until the message
'SAFE REC' appears on the display.
For DVD+R discs each new recording is always added at the end of
all previous recordings as existing recordings cannot be overwritten.
This will, for example, appear in the display:
45 46 Manual recording
 C01 1:16:51 P01 Insert chapter markers Recording with automatic switch
off
During recording you can mark scenes so you can find them or hide them
later. (OTR one
touch
recording)
During recording, press FSS & at the start point. 'Inserting marker'
appears on the TV screen. In the display, the number of the 'CHAPTER'
increases by one. 1 Insert a disc.
For further information on titles and chapters, see the section on 'Changing to Tip
another title/chapter' in 'Playback'. 2 If necessary, use the MONITOR button on the remote control to
switch to the internal tuner in the DVD recorder.

ENGLISH
6 Use the STOP h button on the remote control or h on the
machine to stop the recording. 'MENU UPDT' will appear on the display. 3 Use CH+ A or CH- B to select the programme number (channel
The DVD recorder is writing the list of contents. Wait until the name) you want to record.
message disappears from the display. The recording is then complete.
4 Press REC/OTR n on the remote control.

5 Each time you press REC/OTR n you will add 30 minutes to the
recording time.
a The display will read 'DISC ERR'
b Recording could not be completed correctly because of a disc error. Check
the disc and clean it if necessary. Problem How can I cancel the recording time I have just entered?
To delete an entry, press CLEAR while the display shows the recording
time. ?

Preventing accidental erasing of discs

Making recordings on DVD+R discs compatible
If you want to play back the recording on a DVD player, you need to finalise
the disc in the DVD recorder. You can prepare your DVD for use in a DVD
player using the 'Finalising' feature. See 'Finalising DVD+R discs' in 'Managing
To ensure you don't accidentally delete a recording you can protect the entire disc. You can
only ever protect the entire disc. You cannot protect individual recordings.
Directions For Use

Tip
the disc contents'.

Interrupt recording (Pause)

What happens with DVD+R discs?
1 During recording press PAUSE 9 , for example to avoid recording
As long as these discs are not finalised, they can be protected against
the commercials. ?
accidental erasure in the same way as DVD+RW discs.

1 Insert the disc to be protected.

2 To continue recording, press REC/OTR n .
2 While the index screen is displayed press STOP h on the remote
control. The first title is highlighted.
End recording
3 Press CH+ A . This takes you to the disc info screen.
To end the recording, press the STOP h button. Wait until 'MENU UPDT'
disappears from the display. Tip 4 Press the C button.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

Select the 'Protection' line.

Confirm with C .

5 Select 'Protected' with the CH- B button and confirm with OK .

3.

6 Press D and then DISC-MENU to terminate.

EN 29

Manual recording 47 48 Manual recording

 EN 30
3.

The entire disc is now protected.

If an attempt is made to record on a protected disc, 'DISC LOCK' will appear on the display and Selecting the recording type (Quality)
'Disc locked' will appear on the screen.

You can select the picture quality of the recording using the recording quality feature and hence
the maximum recording time per disc.
Lining up recordings within a title You can check the quality by changing the recording mode and then watching the picture from
the built-in tuner ( MONITOR button).
(assemble cut) During playback, the correct picture quality will automatically be selected.

ENGLISH
On a recorded DVD+RW disc you can add another recording to an existing title. This recording 1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for
is added to the title as a 'chapter'. The existing information will be overwritten starting from this the DVD recorder.
point. Titles will also be overwritten that follow the current title depending on the length of the
new recording. The recording type (Quality) will be taken from the current title. Select the record mode with the button REC MODE on the remote
control.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

To play back this recording, press SYSTEM-MENU and use the C button to select the 'C'
(Chapter) symbol. You can also use the T/C key.
For further information, see 'Changing to another title/chapter' in 'Playback'.
What happens with DVD+R discs?
New recordings on 'DVD+R' discs can only be added after existing recordings.
It is not possible to overwrite existing recordings on 'DVD+R' discs.
Which recording types can I choose?
'M1': High Quality offers the best picture quality and a recording time of 1
hour.
'M2': Standard Play (pre-recorded DVD quality) offers standard picture quality
and a recording time of 2 hours.
'M2x': Standard Play plus (better than S-VHS quality) offers standard picture
quality and a recording time of 2.5 hours.
'M3': Long Play (S-VHS picture quality). Recording time of 3 hours.
? 'M4': Extended Play (better than VHS picture quality). Recording time of 4
hours.
'M6': Super Long Play (VHS picture quality). Recording time of 6 hours.
Directions For Use

1 In the index display, find the title to which the new recording is to be Can I select the recording type via a menu as well?
added. 1 Press the SYSTEM-MENU button.
2 Select ' A' symbol with D or C .
2 Look at the last minute of the old recording (playback)
3 Select 'Record settings' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with
3 Press PAUSE 9 on the remote control at the position where the C.
4 In the line 'Record mode' select the recording type with D or C .
new recording is to go. '9' will appear on the screen.
5 Confirm using OK and SYSTEM-MENU .
4 To monitor the recording you can press MONITOR to switch to the 6 If you have selected the recording mode 'M3', 'M4' or 'M6', you can
internal tuner. select the settings 'Stndrd' (Standard) or 'Sport' (for rapid movements)
in the 'Filter mode' line. Tip
5 Now start recording as usual by pressing REC/OTR n on the
remote control.
The new recording will be inserted.

6 Stop recording with STOP h .

Manual recording 49 50 Manual recording

 Automatic recording from a satellite Direct Record
receiver (Sat recording)
Can you record the right TV channel in seconds when the DVD recorder is switched off? No
problem. If recording is started manually, the switched
off DVD recorder takes the current TV
You can use this function if you own a satellite receiver that can control other devices via a channel from the TV set via the scart cable.
scart cable and a programming function (timer). For more information, please see the operating You will find more information on how to switch 'Direct record' on or off in the next section
instructions for the satellite receiver. 'Direct record'.

ENGLISH
1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for
the DVD recorder. How does Direct Record work?
The DVD recorder compares the TV channel selected on the TV set with its
2 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar stored TV channels via the scart cable. If the same TV channel is found, it
appears. switches the DVD recorder to the corresponding programme number and
starts recording.
3 Select 'A' symbol with D or C . Please do not change channel on the TV during the search. This could affect
the tuning of the DVD recorder. ?
4 Select 'Record settings' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with 1 On the TV set, select the programme number you want make the
C. recording from.

5 Select 'Sat record' using CH- B or CH+ A . 2 Press REC/OTR n with the DVD recorder switched off.

6 Select 'EXT2' with D or C .

a The display will read 'WAIT'
b The DVD recorder is comparing its saved TV channels with those of the
TV set. Please do not change the TV channel on the TV set while 'WAIT' is
Switching off 'Sat Recording' shown in the display.
To switch off the function, select 'Off' using C or D . Tip
a 'NOTV' appears in the display
Directions For Use

7 Confirm with OK . b This TV channel could not be found in the DVD recorder's memory.
Check that all TV channels saved on the TV set are available on the DVD
8 Use a scart cable to connect scart socket EXT 2 AUX-I/O on the recorder. If required, save any missing channels. Please read 'Manual TV
DVD recorder to the corresponding scart socket on the satellite channel search' in 'Installing your DVD recorder'.
receiver. b Check the connectors at both ends of the scart cable.
b Check your TV's operating instructions to see which scart socket is used
9 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU . for video signals.
b If the problem persists, you won't be able to use this feature. Problem
0 Insert a disc you want to use for recording.
3 Stop recording with STOP h .
A Programme the satellite receiver with the required information
(programme number of the TV channel, start time, end time).
If necessary, please see the operating instructions for your satellite
receiver.

B Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m . 'SAT' also

appears in the display to indicate that the function is active.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

The DVD recorder is now ready to record. The start and end of the recording is controlled via
scart cable EXT 2 AUX-I/O .
3.
EN 31

Manual recording 51 52 Manual recording

 EN 32

Managing the disc contents

3.

I
Charly 1
General
Switching 'Direct Record' on or off 00:29:59 • M1
Fri15/02/2003
When a recording is made to disc, the following additional information is also stored at the
1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for Empty title beginning of the recording:
the DVD recorder. 01:30:01 •) Name of the recording
If the TV station does not transmit a name, only the
2 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar channel number and time will be stored as the name
appears. •) Length of the recording
•) Record type (Quality)
3 Select 'A' symbol with D or C .

ENGLISH
•) Date of the recording
•) Index picture of the recording
4 Select 'Record settings' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with
C.
A marker will be set every 5-6 minutes if the 'Auto chapters' function is activated in the
5 Select 'Direct Record' using CH- B or CH+ A . 'Record settings' menu. This marker is known as a 'chapter'.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

These markers can be changed when the recording has finished.

6 Select 'On' (Direct Record on) or 'Off' (Direct Record off) using
D or C .

7 Confirm with OK .

8 To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .

9 Switch off with STANDBY m .

Can markers be set on a DVD+R disc?

Markers can be set on these discs if they have not been finalised. ?

It is also possible to add 'chapters' later. This means that scenes you do not want to see during
playback, such as commercials, can be hidden or skipped. During playback you can watch your
Directions For Use

recording as a continuous sequence without the hidden chapters.

Select from the following chapters:

'Favorite Scene Selection',

to divide the title into chapters or to manage the chapters.
'Editing recording titles (name)',
to change the recording names.

'Play complete title',

to play the entire title including the hidden chapters.
'Delete recording/title'to delete the relevant title and therefore also the recording.
'Disc settings'to change the general settings of the disc.

Manual recording 53 54 Managing the disc contents

 3 Using C select 'hidden'. The picture is shown darker.

Favorite Scene Selection

In this menu you can adapt a title to suit your particular needs. Switching quickly
You can insert/delete chapter markers, hide chapters, select a new index, or split up a title. You can switch between show chapters ('visible') and hide chapters
Press FSS & on the remote control during recording to open this menu. ('hidden') quickly and easily using SELECT . Tip
4 To end, press FSS & .

ENGLISH
Insert chapter markers
During playback this chapter will be skipped.
If the chapter is not visible, select 'visible' in step 3 with C .
During recording, you can set or delete chapter markers within a title.
The maximum number of chapters per disc is 124 and 99 per title. If one of these limits is
reached the following message will appear on the screen: 'Chapter limit'. You need to delete
some markers before you can insert new ones or make recordings. Deleting chapter markers
1 During playback, press FSS & on the remote control at the Within a title you can delete either all markers or individual markers.
appropriate point. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on
the TV screen.

1 While the relevant chapter is playing, press FSS & on the remote
2 Confirm 'Insert marker' by pressing OK . 'Inserting marker' control. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV
Favorite Scene Selection screen.
appears on the TV screen.
Favorite Scene Selection
Insert marker Press OK
Current chapter visible
Insert marker Press OK
Delete marker
Current chapter visible
'X' will appear on the screen: Delete all markers How can I select different chapters?
Delete marker
Delete all markers This DVD is write-protected or the disc is a finalised DVD-R. Subsequent New index picture 1 Press the T/C button on the remote control. Titles and chapters are
Divide title
New index picture changes cannot be made. Tip displayed at the top of the screen.
Directions For Use

Press FSS to exit

Divide title 2 Select title (T) or chapter (C) with C or D .
Press FSS to exit 3 To stop this function, press FSS & . 3 Use CH+ A or CH- B to select the title/chapter channel you want to
edit. Tip

Hiding chapters 2 Use CH- B to select either 'Delete marker' for this chapter or
'Delete all markers' for all chapters within the selected title.

Initially, all the chapters are visible. You can hide chapters for playback (e.g. advertisements) or 3 Confirm with OK .
make them visible again. In editing mode, hidden chapters are shown as dimmed.
4 To end, press FSS & .

1 While the relevant chapter is playing, press FSS & on the remote
control. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV
Favorite Scene Selection screen.
Insert marker Press OK
Current chapter visible
Delete marker
Delete all markers How can I select different chapters?
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

New index picture 1 Press the T/C button on the remote control. Titles and chapters are
Divide title displayed at the top of the screen.
Press FSS to exit
2 Select title (T) or chapter (C) with C or D .
3 Use CH+ A or CH- B to select the title/chapter channel you want to
3.

edit. Tip

2 Select 'Current chapter' using CH- B .

EN 33

Managing the disc contents 55 56 Managing the disc contents

 EN 34
3.

Changing the index picture Editing recording titles (name)

Normally the first picture of a recording is used as the index picture. You can however choose Some TV stations transmit the title (name) of a programme. In this case, the name will be
any picture from the recording as the index picture. included automatically (e.g. 'ROCKY'). Otherwise, the only the programme number (programme
name) and the time are stored as the name of the recording. The name of the recording can
only be changed after the recording has been completed.
1 During playback, search for location of the new index picture. Press
the PAUSE 9 button.

ENGLISH
1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC-MENU .

2 Press the FSS & button. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu 2 Using CH+ A or CH- B select the title whose name you want to
appears on the TV screen. Settings for title Charly 1 edit and confirm with C . The menu for editing names appears.
Favorite Scene Selection
Name Charly 1
3 Select line 'New index picture' and confirm with OK .
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

Insert marker Press OK Play full title 3 Select 'Name' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with C .
Current chapter visible Erase this title
Delete marker
4 Start the change with OK . 'Updating menu' appears on the TV 4 Using C or D select the position where the letter/number/icon is to
Delete all markers screen. be changed/re-entered.
New index picture
Divide title 5 Change the icon using CH+ A or CH- B . You can switch between
Press FSS to exit Once the revision has been completed successfully the DVD recorder reverts to the index upper and lowercase using SELECT . You can delete the character
overview. using CLEAR .

6 Repeat 4 and 5 until you have made the changes you want.

Splitting titles 7 Save the new name with OK . 'Storing name' appears on the TV
screen for confirmation.

You can split a title into several sections (titles) of any size. Each of these sections (titles) is 8 To end, press D .
identified by its own index.
Directions For Use

Note: This split cannot be undone.

Playing the entire title

If you have hidden certain sections (chapters) of a title, this setting lets you watch the entire title
including the hidden sections. To do this, proceed as follows:
Can I split titles on DVD+R discs?
As recordings on DVD+R discs cannot be overwritten, it is not possible to
split titles. ? 1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC-MENU .

2 Using CH+ A or CH- B select the title you want to play all of and
1 While the relevant title is playing, press FSS & on the remote Settings for title Charly 1 confirm with C . The title editing menu will appear.
control. The 'Favorite Scene Selection' menu appears on the TV Name Charly 1
Favorite Scene Selection screen. Play full title Press OK 3 Select 'Play full title' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with
Erase this title OK .
Insert marker Press OK
Current chapter visible
2 Select 'Divide title' and confirm with the OK button.
Delete marker 4 Playback starts automatically. The title is played in its entirety -
Delete all markers 3 If you are sure, press OK to start the process. 'Dividing title' including the hidden chapters.
New index picture appears on the TV screen.
Divide title
Press FSS to exit 4 Wait until the new title is displayed with an index picture in the index
picture overview.

The process of splitting the title is now complete.

Managing the disc contents 57 58 Managing the disc contents

 Deleting recordings/titles Changing the disc name
You can delete specific recordings from a disc. To do this, proceed as follows: 1 In the 'Disc info display' press C . The 'Settings for' menu appears
on the TV screen.

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC-MENU .

2 Select 'Disc name' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with C .
2 Using CH+ A or CH- B select the title you want to delete and Settings for Philips1
Settings for title Charly 1 3 Using C or D select the position where the letter/number/icon is to

ENGLISH
confirm with C . The title editing menu will appear. Disc name Philips1
Name Charly 1 Protection Unprotected be changed/re-entered.
Play full title 3 Select 'Erase this title' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with Erase disc
Erase this title Press OK OK . 'This will completely erase this title' appears on the TV 4 Change the icon using CH+ A or CH- B . You can switch between
screen.. 'Press OK to confirm'. upper and lowercase using SELECT . You can delete the character
using CLEAR .
4 If you want to delete this title, press OK to confirm. Otherwise press
D. 5 Repeat 3 and 4 until you have made the changes you want.

5 'Erasing title' appears on the TV screen. 6 Save the new title with OK . 'Storing name' appears on the TV
screen for confirmation.
6 At this point 'Empty title' appears in the 'index picture display'. A
new recording can now be made here. 7 To end, press D .
If the deleted title was very short (less than 1 minute) 'Empty title'
will not appear at this point.
Finishing editing
Can titles be deleted from a DVD+R disc?
Titles on DVD+R discs are only marked as deleted. 'Deleted title' will appear If one or more titles have been edited a DVD player may still display the original titles. You can
in the display instead of 'Empty title'. During playback the 'deleted' title is prepare your disc in such a way that a DVD player will be able to play the edited version.
skipped. The space used for this title cannot be used again as the title has not
Directions For Use

been physically deleted. Once the disc has been finalised no further changes
can be made. ? 1 In the 'Disc info display' press C . The 'Settings for' menu appears
on the TV screen.

Disc settings 2 Select 'Make edits compatible' using CH+ A or CH- B and
confirm with OK .

Philips1 This screen appears beforethe first title and contains general information about the current disc. a 'Make edits compatible' does not appear
00:35:59 used
Fri15/02/2003 b Your disc is already compatible. There is no need for conversion.
You can: To end, press SYSTEM-MENU . Problem
PAL •) change the name of the disc
•) activate or deactivate write protection on the disc 3 The screen displays 'This will take' to show how long the process
DVD playback •) Finish editing (make the disc DVD compatible) will last.
•) finalise a DVD+R
4 To confirm press OK . 'Working' appears on the TV screen. A bar
•) delete a DVD+RW
will move from left to right indicating progress.

To get to this display, proceed as follows:

DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

1 Press the STOP h button or during playback press DISC-MENU .

2 Select the first title with CH+ A or press STOP h .

3.

3 Press the CH+ A button. The disc info display will appear.
EN 35

Managing the disc contents 59 60 Managing the disc contents

 EN 36

Programming a recording (TIMER)

3.

J
General
Finalising DVD+R discs
Use 'Programming a recording (TIMER)', to automatically start and stop a recording at a later
This feature is required to play back a DVD+R disc in a DVD player. Once the disc has been date.
finalised no further recordings or changes can be made.
The DVD recorder will switch to the right programme number and begin recording at the
correct time.
1 In the 'Disc info display' press C . The 'Settings for' menu appears With this DVD recorder, you can pre-programme up to six recordings within a period of one
on the TV screen. month.

ENGLISH
2 Select 'Finalise disc' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with To make a programmed recording, your DVD recorder needs to know:
OK . * the date you want to make the recording
* the programme number of the TV channel
* the start and stop time of the recording
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

a 'Finalise disc' does not appear * VPS or PDC on or off

b Either there is no DVD+R disc inserted or the disc is already finalised.
To end, press SYSTEM-MENU .
a The 'Settings for' menu does not appear
b The menu may not appear if the disc has been recorded on another DVD
recorder. In this case, use the 'Finalise disc' feature in the ' ' menu,
A
under 'Features'.
3 The screen displays 'This will take...' to show how long the process
will take.
4 To confirm press OK . 'Working' appears on the TV screen. A bar
will move from left to right indicating progress.
* the recording mode ('M1/M2/M2x/M3/M4/M6')
This information is saved in a 'TIMER block'.
Problem What is 'VPS/PDC'?
'VPS' (Video Programming System)/'PDC' (Programme Delivery Control) are
used to control the start and duration of TV channel recordings. If a TV
programme starts earlier or ends later than was scheduled, the DVD recorder
will then turn on and off at the correct time.
What do I need to know about 'VPS/PDC'?
• Usually the start time is the same as the VPS or PDC time. If a different
'VPS/PDC time' is indicated, e.g.: '20.15 (VPS/PDC 20.14)', the VPS/PDC time
'20.14' must be entered exactly to the minute during programming.
Directions For Use

Delete DVD+RW disks If you want to programme a time that is different from the VPS or PDC time,
you must switch off VPS or PDC.
• Only one TV program of a TV channel can be controlled using 'VPS/PDC' at a
1 In the 'Disc info display' press C . The 'Settings for' menu appears time. If you want to record two or more TV programmes on a TV channel
on the TV screen. using 'VPS/PDC', you will need to programme these as two separate
recordings.

2 Select 'Erase disc' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with OK . • Since the DVD recorder requires a certain lead time (for getting the disc up to
Settings for Philips1 speed and positioning the laser) before recording can start, it is possible that
'This will erase all titles' appears on the TV screen. Press OK to
the recorder will miss the first few seconds of a TV show recorded with
Disc name Philips1 confirm'. VPS/PDC.
Protection Unprotected ?
In this case, disable VPS/PDC and enter a start time one minute earlier.
Erase disc Press OK 3 If you want to delete all the titles, press OK to confirm. Otherwise
press D .

4 'Erasing disc' appears on the TV screen.

5 After deletion, the index picture display shows the free space on the
disc.

Managing the disc contents 61 62 Programming a recording (TIMER)

 Timer 6 The decoded data appears after confirmation. You can go back and
Programming recordings with the ShowView system change the data. Select the appropriate input field with C or D . If
VPS Rec required, make changes using CH+ A , CH- B or the number
ShowView® System Date Prog. Start PDC End Mode
01 BBC1 20:15 21:30 M2 buttons 0..9 .

Thanks to this programming system, you no longer need to tediously enter the date, programme 'Switching on 'VPS/PDC' in the 'Start' input field
number, start and end times. All the information needed by the DVD recorder for programming Select the 'Start' input field using C . Using SELECT switch on 'VPS/PDC'
is contained in the ShowView® programming number. This 9-digit ShowView® number is found in ('*' lights up). If you press SELECT again, you will switch 'VPS/PDC' off ('*'
most TV listings magazine. Mo-Fr/Weekly To store
Press SELECT Press OK goes out).

ENGLISH
Changing the recording mode in input field 'End'
1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for Select the 'End' input field using C .
the DVD recorder. Use SELECT to select the recording mode 'M1, M2, M2x, M3, M4, M6'. Tip

2 Press TIMER on the remote control. 7 If all information is correct, press the OK button. The programming
The programming method selected last is marked. information is stored in a TIMER block.
3 Select 'ShowView system' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm 8 To end, press TIMER .
with C .
9 Insert a recordable disc (one without write protection).
4 Enter the entire ShowView number. This number is up to 9 digits long The disk you have inserted will be checked.
and can be found next to the start time of the TV programme in your
TV listings magazine. 0 Switch the DVD recorder off with STANDBY m .
e.g.: 5-312-4 or 5,312 4 The programmed recording will only function properly if the DVD
Enter 53124 for the ShowView-number. recorder has been switched off using the STANDBY m button.
If you make a mistake, you can clear your instructions with CLEAR .

If any of the TIMER blocks are in use, 'TIMER' will light up on the recorder display.
Timer
ShowView system
Selecting daily/weekly recordings
Directions For Use

ShowView number Using SELECT , select from the following options:

--------- 'Mo-Fr': Repeated daily recordings (Monday to Friday).
'Weekly': Repeated weekly recordings (every week on the same day). Tip

Mo-Fr/Weekly To store
Press SELECT Press OK

5 Confirm with OK .

a The following message appears on the screen: 'Please enter

programme number'
b The programme number of the TV channel has not yet been assigned to
the ShowView number. Use C , D or the number buttons 0..9 on the
remote control to select the appropriate programme number (name) of the
TV channel and confirm with OK .
a The following message appears on the screen: 'ShowView number
wrong'
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

b The entered ShowView number is incorrect. Correct your entry or cancel

using the SYSTEM-MENU button.
b Check the time/date (see 'Setting the time & date' in 'Installing your DVD
recorder').
3.

a The following message appears on the screen: 'Weekend

programming not possible'
b A daily recording was entered for the wrong day. Daily programming can
only be used for recordings to be made from Monday to Friday. Problem
EN 37

Programming a recording (TIMER) 63 64 Programming a recording (TIMER)

 EN 38
3.

Programming recordings without the How to change or delete a programmed

ShowView® System recording (TIMER)
1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for 1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for
the DVD recorder. the DVD recorder.

2 Press TIMER on the remote control. 2 Press TIMER on the remote control.

ENGLISH
The programming method selected last is marked. The programming mode selected last is marked.

3 Select 'Timer List' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with C .

Timer 3 Select line 'Timer programming' with CH- B or CH+ A . and
Timer programming confirm with the C button.
VPS Rec Timer 4 Select the programmed recording (TIMER) you want to check, change
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

Date Prog. Start PDC End Mode

The information will appear on the screen.
Timer List or delete with CH- B or CH+ A .
01 BBC1 20:15 21:30 M1 VPS Rec
4 Select the input field with D or C . Date Prog. Start PDC End Mode
01 BBC1 20:15 * 21:30 M2
5 Enter information with CH- B or CH+ A or with the number -- ----- --:-- --:-- -- Delete programmed recording
buttons 0..9 . 1 Press the CLEAR button.
2 Confirm with OK . 'Timer Cleared' will briefly appear on the TV
Mo-Fr/Weekly To store Selecting daily/weekly recordings Total record time: 01:15
Press SELECT Press OK screen.
In 'Date' use SELECT to select from the following options: '-- ---' appears rather than the displayed values
To change To exit
'Mo-Fr': Repeated daily recordings from Monday to Friday Press › Press TIMER 3 To end, press TIMER . Tip
'Mon': Repeated weekly recordings (every week on the same day, e.g.
Monday).
Programme numbers of the 'EXT1' and 'EXT2'scart socket 5 Press C .
You can also programme recordings from external sources via scart socket Select the input field with D or C .
EXT 1 TO TV-I/O ('EXT1') or EXT 2 AUX-I/O ('EXT2'). If required, change the information with CH+ A , CH- B or the
number buttons 0..9 .
Directions For Use

'Switching on 'VPS/PDC' in the 'Start' input field

Select the 'Start' input field using TIMER . Using SELECT switch on
6 Confirm with OK .
'VPS/PDC' ('*' lights up). If you press SELECT again, you will switch
'VPS/PDC' off ('*' goes out).
7 To end, press TIMER .
Changing the recording quality in input field 'End'
Select the 'End' input field using C . 8 Switch off with STANDBY m .
Use SELECT to select the recording mode. Tip

6 If all information is correct, press the OK button. The programming

information is stored in a TIMER block.
'NexTView Link'
7 To end, press TIMER .
This DVD recorder is equipped with the 'NexTView Link' feature. If your television is also
8 Insert a DVD (one without write protection). equipped with this function, you can mark TV programmes on the television for programming.
The disk you have inserted will be checked. These TV programmes will automatically be transmitted to a TIMER block on the DVD
recorder. If you clear the marking of the TV programme on the television, the corresponding
9 Switch off with STANDBY m . TIMER block on the DVD recorder will also be cleared.
The programmed recording will only function properly if the DVD For more information, read the instruction manual of your TV set.
recorder has been switched off using the STANDBY m button.

If any of the TIMER blocks are in use, 'TIMER' will light up on the recorder display.

Programming a recording (TIMER) 65 66 Programming a recording (TIMER)

 K User preferences
In this section you will learn how to set your user preferences on the DVD recorder. The
symbols have the following meanings:
Problem solving for programmed
recordings Picture setting

 Sound setting

 Language setting
PROBLEM SOLUTION
 Additional settings
The DVD recorder is bWhile a programmed recording is being made, you cannot operate your DVD recorder manually.
 Remote control settings

ENGLISH
not responding If you want to cancel the programmed recording, press STANDBY m .

 Disc settings
'Switch off, timer bThe DVD recorder was switched on several minutes before the start of a programmed recording.
recording' flashes on Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m . A programmed recording (timer) will only  Recording settings
the TV screen. function if the DVD recorder is switched off ( STANDBY m button). Installation

Error message: 'Insert bEither a disc has not been inserted or the disc cannot be used for recording. Insert a disc on
recordable disc' which recordings can be made. Switch off the DVD recorder using STANDBY m .
1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for
The error message the DVD recorder.
bA write-protected disc has been inserted. Undo the write protection (see 'Preventing accidental
'Disc locked' appears erasing of discs' in 'Manual recording') or insert a different disc. 2 Press SYSTEM-MENU on the remote control. The menu bar
briefly on the screen. appears.

bIf this error message appears after pressing TIMER , then all TIMER blocks are already 3 Select 'A' using D or C and confirm with CH- B .
Error message: programmed. No more recordings can be programmed. Press the C button. If you want to clear
'Memory full' or check a programmed recording (TIMER block), select it with CH+ A or CH- B . 4 Select the appropriate function with CH- B or CH+ A and confirm
with C .
The 'Data error' 5 Select the appropriate line using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm
bThe data for the recording could not be transferred. Please check date, start time and end time
message appears on of the programmed recording. with C .
Directions For Use

the screen.
6 Select the appropriate function using CH- B or CH+ A or the
bTwo programmed recordings overlap. setting with D or C .
The 'Collision' bIf you ignore this error message the show with the earlier start time will be recorded first. The
start of the second show will not be recorded. 7 Confirm the new setting by pressing OK .
message appears on
bChange the setting for either of the two recordings.
the screen. 8 To close the menu item, press D .
bClear either of the two recordings

Picture settings
You can choose the following features in this menu:

'TV shape'
The picture signal from your DVD Recorder can be set to match your TV screen.
Picture
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

TV shape 16:9
Black level shift Off
'4:3 letterbox': for a 'wide-screen' picture with black bars at the top and bottom
Vertical video shift ï '4:3 panscan': for a full-height picture with the sides trimmed.
SCART video RGB '16:9' : for a wide-screen TV set (screen edge ratio 16:9)
3.

'Black level shift'

Adapts the colour dynamics for NTSC playback
EN 39

Programming a recording (TIMER) 67 68 User preferences

 EN 40
3.

'Vertical video shift'

Use this feature to adjust the position of the picture on your TV left or right using D , C to
Language settings
suit your TV set.
You can choose the following settings in this menu:
'SCART video'
By default the recorder is set to 'RGB'. Select 'S-Video' if you want to connect an S-VHS
recorder. 'Audio Language'
Playback audio language
Language

ENGLISH
Audio Language English
Sound settings Recording audio Language 1
Subtitle English
'Recording audio'
Menu English
Country Other
Audio recording
Depending on which audio outputs are used, you can select the settings in this menu.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

If you only use the analogue audio output ( OUT L AUDIO R ), select the settings 'Off' in the
'Digital output' menu.
'Subtitle'
Subtitle language

'Digital output' 'Menu'

For devices connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT socket, you can select from the following Screen menu language
Sound
Digital output All
settings.
Analogue output Stereo
Night mode Off 'All': Dolby Digital and DTS signals are fed unaltered to the digital output. MPEG-2 multi-channel 'Country'
signals are converted to PCM (Pulse Code Modulation).
For receivers/amplifiers with digital multi
channel sound decoders. 'Country'
'PCM only: Dolby Digital and MPEG-2 multi-channel signals are converted to PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation).
Directions For Use

For receivers/amplifiers without digital multi
channel sound decoders. Additional settings

'Off: Digital output switched off.
For devices with analogue audio input.
You can select the following functions in this menu:
'Analogue output'
For devices connected to the analogue audio output ( OUT L AUDIO R ), you can select from
the following settings.
'Status box'
Along with the on screen menu, the OSD (On Screen Display) also displays information on the
'Stereo': For devices without DolbySurround or TruSurround. Use this setting if the DVD Features
Status box On
current operating status (counter, playback, recording, TV channel, etc.) on the TV screen.
recorder is only connected to a stereo TV set. You can switch off the information about the operating status so that the on screen display
Standby Off
Display Bright (OSD) is not recorded during copying.
'Surround: Dolby Digital and MPEG-2 multi-channel are mixed down to a DOLBY
surround-compatible two-channel output signal. For devices with Dolby Surround
'On': The OSD information appears in every selected mode for a few seconds and disappears
Pro Logic decoder .
again.

'Off': The OSD information is switched off. It is no longer displayed on the screen.
'Night mode'
Night mode optimises the sound for playback at low volume. You are therefore less likely to
disturb your neighbours. This only works for Dolby Digital audio on DVD video discs.

User preferences 69 70 User preferences

 'Standby'
To save power, you can switch off the clock display on the DVD recorder. Programmed
Disk feature menu
(TIMER) recordings will still take place.
In addition, you can present the most important features of the DVD recorder in scrolling text In this menu you can make the changes that relate to the disc:
in the display (demo).

'Low power': If the DVD-Recorder is switched off (button STANDBY m ), the clock display is
also switched off. 'Access control'
'Off': If the DVD-Recorder is switched off (button STANDBY m ), the clock display is visible. Please read the next chapter on 'Access control (child lock)'.
Features

ENGLISH
Status box On
'Demo mode': If the DVD recorder is switched off with the STANDBY m button, a list of the Standby Off
Display Bright
'Auto resume'
most important features is shown in the display.
If playback of a pre-recorded DVD video disc or video CD is interrupted (button STOP h or
OPEN/CLOSE J ) when the disc is reloaded (disc is started) playback starts at the precise
'Display' location where it stopped. This applies not only to the current disc but to the last 20 discs
You can change the brightness of the display on the DVD recorder. This setting only affects the played.
DVD recorder when it is switched on.
This feature can be switched off if not required.
'Bright': The display appear with normal brightness. The disc tray light is switched on.
'PBC'
'Dimmed': The display appears less bright. The disc tray light is switched off.
This line appears only if a VCD is loaded.
'Off': The display and the disc tray light are switched off. This function lets you activate or deactivate the PBC menu (Playback Control) for video CDs.
See 'Playing a (Super) Video CD'.

'Finalise disc'
Remote Control settings This feature allows you to finalise DVD+R discs. If the disc has already been finalised this line will
appear darker.
Directions For Use

In this menu you can set the remote control type to which your DVD recorder should respond.
'Adapt disc format'
'DVD player': The DVD recorder responds to a DVD player remote control.
The DVD recorder also responds to the remote control of a DVD player (remote If a DVD+RW has been recorded in a computer drive or in another DVD recorder the index
control code RC-6). Choose this setting if your Philips TV remote supports DVD screen may not be displayed correctly.
functions. This feature allows you to change the format of the disc.
'DVD recorder': The DVD recorder only responds to the supplied remote control. It is therefore only visible if the disc format is different.
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1
3.
EN 41

User preferences 71 72 User preferences

 EN 42

Access control (Child Lock)

3.

L
Child lock (DVD and VCD)
Authorising a disc
This feature enables discs to be locked for children.
When Child Lock is on, a 4-digit code (PIN) needs to be entered before a disc can be played. 1 Insert a disc. The access control box will appear after a short delay.
You can also decide whether the inserted disc should always be played or should be played only
once, despite the child lock 2 Using CH+ A or CH- B select 'Play once' or 'Play always'.

•)'Play always': 3 Enter your PIN code using the number buttons 0..9 .
This disc is stored in a memory with space for 50 child-safe discs. If more than 50 discs are

ENGLISH
stored, the last disc in the list is removed and the new disc is added. The screen shows 'Child
Double-sided DVDs may have a different ID for each side. For these discs, each side must be
safe' at the start of playback.
authorised. Multi-volume video CDs may have a different ID for each volume. For these CDs,
each volume must be authorised.
•)'Play once':
This disc is only authorised for single playback. If the recorder is switched off, the PIN code
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

must be re-entered.
Locking unlocked discs
Activating/deactivating child lock To lock a disc that was formerly authorised follow the instructions below

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for 1 Insert a disc. Playback starts automatically. If the playback does not
the DVD recorder. start automatically, press PLAY G .
2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m . 2 Press the STOP h button while the '' icon is visible. The icon
changes to ' '. The disc is now locked.
3 Press SYSTEM-MENU . The menu bar appears

4 Select the 'A' icon using D or C .

Parental level control (DVD video only)
Directions For Use

5 Select '(Disc features)' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm

with C .
Films on pre-recorded DVD discs may contain scenes not suitable for children. Therefore, some
6 Confirm 'Access control' using C . discs may contain 'Parental Control' rating information that applies to the entire disc or to
certain scenes on the disc.
7 Enter a 4-digit code of your choice. If the code is new, you may have The appropriate scenes have filter values that reach from 1-8. If such a scene is detected during
to enter the code a second time as confirmation. playback, the filter value set on the DVD recorder is compared to the scene. If the filter value is
higher than the setting, an alternative scene will be played (if available).
8 Select 'Child lock' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with C . Most DVDs apply the rating to an entire DVD. Therefore, if certain scenes exceed the rating
you select, the entire disc will be blocked from viewing.
9 Select the '' icon using CH- B or CH+ A .

0 Confirm with OK .

A Quit the feature using D and SYSTEM-MENU .

Unauthorised discs can only be played by entering the four-digit PIN code.
To deactivate the child lock, select the '' icon in 9 .

Access control (Child Lock) 73 74 Access control (Child Lock)

 Activating/deactivating parental level Changing the country
control
The set filter values depend on the respective country. It is therefore necessary to enter the
country to which these filter values apply.

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder. 1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for
the DVD recorder.

ENGLISH
2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .
2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .
3 Press SYSTEM-MENU . The menu bar appears
3 Press SYSTEM-MENU . The menu bar appears
4 Select the 'A' icon using D or C .
4 Select the 'A' icon using D or C .
5 Select '(Disc features)' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm
with C . 5 Select line '(Disc features)' using CH- B or CH+ A and
confirm with C .

6 Confirm 'Access control' using C .

6 Confirm the line 'Access control' using C .
7 Enter a 4-digit code of your choice. If the code is new, you may have
Disc features to enter the code a second time as confirmation. 7 Enter your four-digit code. If the code is new, you may have to enter
Access control Enter code… Disc features the code a second time as confirmation.
Auto resume On 8 Select the 'Parental level' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm Access control Enter code…
with C . A bar appears to select the parental level. Auto resume On 8 Select 'Change country' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm with
C.
9 Select the appropriate rating using CH- B , CH+ A or the number
buttons 0..9 . 9 Select the corresponding country using CH+ A or CH- B and
confirm with OK .

What do the ratings mean?

Directions For Use

0 To end, press D and then SYSTEM-MENU .

Rating 0 (displayed as '--') parental control not active.
Rating 1 (suitable for children)
Rating 8 (only suitable for adults)
What happens if a DVD scene contains a higher level than the rating
set?
If the recorder does not find a suitable alternative, playback will stop and you
must enter the four-digit code. Tip

0 Confirm with OK . Quit using D and SYSTEM-MENU .

DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1
3.
EN 43

Access control (Child Lock) 75 76 Access control (Child Lock)

 EN 44
3.

Changing the PIN code

1 Switch on the TV set. If required, select the programme number for

the DVD recorder.

2 Switch on the DVD recorder using STANDBY/ON m .

3 Press SYSTEM-MENU . The menu bar appears

ENGLISH

4 Select the 'A' icon using D or C .

5 Select '(Disc features)' using CH- B or CH+ A and confirm

with C .
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

6 Confirm 'Access control' using C .

7 Enter your four-digit PIN code. If the code is new, you may have to
Disc features enter the code a second time as confirmation.
Access control Enter code…
Auto resume On 8 Select 'Change code' using CH+ A or CH- B and confirm with
C.

9 Enter the new code using the number buttons 0..9 . Enter the same
code again as confirmation.

0 Quit using D and SYSTEM-MENU .

Directions For Use

I have forgotten my code

Press STOP h four times (step 7 ), then press OK . Access control is
now switched off. You can now enter a new code as described above. Tip

Access control (Child Lock) 77

 Mechanical Instructions DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 4. EN 45

4. Mechanical Instructions
4.1 Dismantling and Assembly of the Set

For item numbers please see the exploded views in chapter 10.

4.1.1 Manually opening the tray

5
– In case the loader is defective or cannot be opened
electrically you can open the tray manually.
– Through a slot at the underside of the cabinet a slider that
unlocks the tray can be accessed.
However in sets with drive VAD8031 (AV3) the slot is
6
covered by an adhesive tape on the cabinet of the drive to
prevent dust coming into the drive. Push through this
adhesive tape by means of a thin screwdriver and move
the slider to the left, see picture 4-1.
– Make sure that an adhesive tape has been reapplied to
the AV3 drive when repair is finished!

Figure 4-3

Figure 4-1

4.1.2 Front

– After removing the top cover, remove tray front (1), see
picture 4-2
– Remove the three screws (2) that fix the front panel
– Release the two snap hooks on the sides (3)and remove
the front (4)
– Remove the 9 screws (5) to remove the front plate (6), see
picture 4-3

2 2 3
3 2

4
Figure 4-2
 EN 46 4. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Mechanical Instructions

4.1.3 DVIO Board, only for sets with DV input and Digital Board 4.1.4 Digital Board
1.5
– After removal of EPG board (if present) and DVIO board (if
To put the DVIO board in a service position, an extender board present) the digital board can be reached
must be used. This extender board can be ordered with – Remove screws (1)
codenumber 3104 128 07770. – Turn the PCB in the service position
– After removal of the EPG board (if present) the DVIO board
can be reached
– Remove the two screws (1), see picture 4-4
– Release the snaps of the two board spacers 125
– Put the DVIO board in the service position with the
extender board 3104 128 07770.
1 1

1 1 1 1

1 1

2 2
Figure 4-5

Figure 4-4
 Mechanical Instructions DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 4. EN 47

4.1.5 Basic Engine 4.1.6 Analog Board

– Remove the tray (1) – Remove the 3 screws (1) that fix the back plate to the
– Remove the four screws that fix the drive, see figure 4-6 or bottom plate, see picture 4-8
4-7 – Remove the 4 screws (2) that fix the Analog Board to the
bottom plate
– In sets with fan remove the Fan assy by releasing the fixing
screw (3)
– Remove screw safety holder (4)

1 – Unlock the two snaps hooks at the left and right (5), see
picture 4-9, and pull the board and backplate out gently (6)
– Turn the PCB in the service position (7), see picture 4-10

2 2 2 2
4
2 2
1 1 1 3
Figure 4-8

2 2
5 5
Figure 4-6

6
Figure 4-9

Figure 4-7

Figure 4-10

DISMANTLING INSTRUCTIONS
See exploded view for item numbers
Front assy
⇒ open the tray and remove the
tray front 70
⇒ remove 3 screws 205
(front assy → frame 100)
⇒ unlock the front from the
frame by releasing 2 snaps
on left and right
⇒ remove 9 screws 200 to
remove the plate front 102
Figure 4-11
Display board 1004
⇒ Remove screws 200
(board → front)
⇒ Remove screws 209
of DV input cable
⇒ demount the board
300103
TR 06003_001
4.2
EN 48
mounting
4.
Cover 300
⇒ Remove 9 screws 298
⇒ Lift the cover demounting
to remove
Dismantling Instructions
IOE board 1005 EPG board 1006 DVDR BASIC ENGINE 1007
⇒ Remove 2 screws 218
⇒ Remove 2 screws 234, 235 ⇒ Remove the connections
(IOE board → frame 100) (Digital board → bracket 161) ⇒ Open the tray and remove
⇒ Release the snaps of 2 spacers 130 the tray front 70
⇒ demount the board
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1
(DVIO board → EPG board) ⇒ Remove 4 screws 255
⇒ demount the board. (Basic Engine 1007 → support bracket 160)
⇒ Demount the DVDR Basic Engine
DVIO board 1003
⇒ Remove 2 screws 216
(DVIO board → bracket 161)
⇒ Release the snaps of 2 spacers 125
Analog board 1001
(DVIO board → Digital board)
⇒ Remove the connections ⇒ demount the board carefully.
(board to board connection to
⇒ remove 11 screws 230, 231
Mechanical Instructions
the Digital board)
(board → backplate)
Manual opening of tray and removal of
⇒ remove 3 screws 250
tray front 70
(frame → backplate)
Digital board 1002
⇒ remove 4 screws 210 In case the loader is defective and cannot be
opened electrically, you can open the tray
(board → frame)
⇒ Remove the connections as follows:
⇒ remove screw safety
holder 145 ⇒ Remove 4 screws 214 ⇒ It is possible to unlock the tray by means
⇒ demount the board (Digital board → frame 100) of a screwdriver via a slot in the
⇒ demount the board. front and frame at the underside.
.
Push the white pin of the slider at the
underside of the basic engine to the right
(seen from the front)
⇒ Open the unlocked tray.
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 49

5. Diagnostic Software
Due to the complexity of the DVD recorder, the time to find a 5.1.2 Structure
defect in the recorder can become long. To reduce this time,
the recorder has been equipped with Diagnostic and Service
software (DS). The DS offers functionality to diagnose the Unplug the power cord
DVDR hardware and tests the following: Hold key <PLAY> pressed
• Interconnections between components while you plug the recorder
• Accessibility of components
• Functionality of the audio and video paths
This functionality can be accessed via several interfaces: During the test, the following display
is shown: the counter counts down
1. End user/Dealer script interface from the number of nuclei to be run
2. Command Interface before the test finishes. Example:
3. Player script interface for sets with Digital Board 1.5,
Empress
4. Menu interface for sets with Digital Board 1.5, Empress
NO
SET O.K.?

5.1 End User/Dealer Script Interface YES

5.1.1 Description

The End user/Dealer script interface gives a diagnosis on a

stand alone DVD recorder. During this mode, a number of
To exit DEALER SCRIPT, unplug the power cord
hardware tests (nuclei) are automatically executed to check if
the recorder is faulty. The diagnosis is simply a "fail" or "pass" CL 16532095_068.eps
150801
message. If the message "FAIL" appears on the display, there
is apparently a failure in the recorder. If the message "PASS"
appears, the nuclei in this mode have been executed
successfully. There can be still a failure in the recorder Figure 5-1
because the nuclei in this mode don't cover the complete
functionality of the recorder. The End use/Dealer script executes all diagnostic nuclei that
do not need any user interaction and are meaningful on a
standalone DVD recorder.

5.1.3 Contents for sets with Digital Board 1.5, Empress

The nuclei called in the End user/Dealer script are the

following:
Counter Nucleus Name Description
22 104 HostdSdramWrR checks all memory locations of the 4MB SDRAM
21 106 HostdDramWrR checks all the DRAM connected to the microprocessor of the digital board
20 123 HostdI2cNvram checks the data line (SDA) and the clock line (SCL) of the I2C bus between the host decoder
and NVRAM
19 202 SAA7118I2c checks the interface between the Host I2C controller and the AVENC SAA7118 Video Input
Processor
18 200 VideoEncI2c checks the interface between the host I2C controller and Empress SAA6752
17 207 AudioEncI2c checks the I2C connection between the host decoder and Empress SAA6752
16 204 AudioEncAccess tests the HIO8 interface lines between the host decoder and the audio encoder
15 203 AudioEncSramAccess checks the access of the SRAM by the audio encoder (address and data lines).
14 205 AudioEncSramWrR tests the SRAM connected to the audio encoder
13 206 AudioEncInterrupt tests the interrupt line between the host decoder and the audio encoder
12 300 VsmAccess checks whether the VSM interrupt controllers and DRAM are accessible
11 303 VsmInterrupt checks both interrupt lines between the VSM and the host decoder
10 302 VsmSdramWrR tests the entire SDRAM of the VSM
9 1400 Clock11_289MHz switches the A_CLK of the micro clock to 11.2896 MHz
8 1401 Clock12_288MHz switches the A_CLK of the micro clock to 12.288 MHz
7 601 BeS2Bengine checks the S2B interface with the Basic Engine by sending an echo command
6 500 DisplayEcho checks the interface between the host processor and the slave processor on the display
board
5 700 AnalogueEcho checks the interface between the host processor and the microprocessor on the analogue
board
4 711 AnalogueNvram checks the NVRAM on the analogue board
3 706 AnalogueTuner checks whether the tuner on the analogue board is accessible
 EN 50 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Counter Nucleus Name Description

2 901 LoopAudioUserDealer This nucleus tests the components on the audio signal path The host decoder
- The analogue board
- The audio encoder
- The VSM
Attention: the rear cinch audio out has to be connected to the front cinch audio in.
1 906 LoopVideoUserDealer Nucleus for testing the components on the video signal system path:
- The VIP
- The video encoder
- The VSM
- The host decoder
- The analogue board
Attention: the rear cinch video out has to be connected to the front cinch video in.

5.1.4 Contents for sets with Digital Board Chrysalis

Included tests: 1.DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC

2.DS_DCB_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC
3. DS_BROM_COMMUNICATION_NUC
4. DS_SYS_SETTINGSDISPLAY_NUC
5. DS_CHR_DEVTYPEGET_NUC
6. DS_CHR_INT_PIC_NUC
7. DS_CHR_DMA_NUC
8. DS_BROM_WRITEREAD_NUC
9. DS_NVRAM_COMMUNICATION_NUC
10. DS_NVRAM_WRITEREAD_NUC
11. DS_SDRAM_WRITEREADFAST_NUC
12. DS_FLASH_WRITEREAD_NUC
13.DS_FLASH_CHECKSUMPROGRAM_NUC
14.DS_SYS_HARDWAREVERSIONGET_NUC
15. DS_VIP_DEVTYPEGET_NUC
16. DS_VIP_COMMUNICATION_NUC
17. DS_DVIO_LINKDEVTYPEGET_NUC
18. DS_DVIO_PHYDEVTYPEGET_NUC
19. DS_DVIO_LINKCOMMUNICATION_NUC
20. DS_DVIO_PHYCOMMUNICATION_NUC
21.DS_PSCAN_COMMUNICATIONDENC_NUC
22.DS_PSCAN_COMMUNICATIONDEINTERLACER_NUC
23. DS_BE_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC
24.DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICNVRAM_NUC
25.DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICTUNER_NUC
26.DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICSOUNDPROCESSOR_NUC
27.DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICAVSELECTOR_NUC
28. DS_ANAB_CHECKSUMPROGRAM_NUC

5.2 Player Script Interface only for sets with Digital 5.2.2 Structure of the Player Script
Board 1.5 Empress
The player script consists of a set of nuclei testing the hardware
modules in the DVD recorder: the Display PWB, the Digital
5.2.1 Description
PWB, the Analogue In/Out PWB and the DVDR module.
Nuclei run by the player test need some user interaction; in the
The Player script will give the opportunity to perform a test that next table this interaction is described. The player test is done
will determine which of the DVD recorder's modules are faulty,
in two phases:
to read the error log and to perform an endurance loop test. To
• Interactive tests: this part of the player test depends
successfully perform the tests, the DVD recorder must be strongly on user interaction and input to determine nucleus
connected to a TV set.
results and to progress through the full test. Reading the
To be able to check results of certain nuclei, the player script
error log information can be useful to determine any errors
expects some interaction of the user (i.e. to approve a test that occurred recently during normal operation of the DVD
picture or a test sound). Some nuclei (e.g. nuclei that test
player.
functionality of the DVDR module) require that a DVD+RW disc
• The loop test will perform the same nuclei as the dealer
is inserted. test, but it will loop through the list of nuclei indefinitely.
Only tests within the scope of the diagnostic software will be
executed hence only faults within this scope can be detected.
STEP DESCRIPTION NUCLEUS
1 Press OPEN/CLOSE and PLAY at the same time and POWER ON the recorder to start the playerscript 2
2 The local display shows FPSEGMENTS. Press PLAY to start the test. 502
First the starburst pattern is lit, then the horizontal segments are lit, followed by the vertical segments and the
last test is light all segments test. After each of the 4 tests the user has to confirm that the correct pattern was
lit.
Press PLAY to confirm that the correct pattern was lit (four times if the FPSEGMENTS test was successful).
Press RECORD to indicate that the correct pattern was not successfully lit.
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 51

STEP DESCRIPTION NUCLEUS

3 The local display shows FPLABELS. Press PLAY to start the test. 503
Press PLAY to confirm that all labels are lit.
Press RECORD to indicate that not all labels are lit.
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
4 The local display shows FPLIGHT ALL. Press PLAY to start the test. 520
Press PLAY to confirm that everything was lit.
Press RECORD to indicate that not all patterns are lit.
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
5 The local display shows FPLED. Press PLAY to start the test. 504
Press PLAY to confirm that the led is lit.
Press RECORD to indicate that the led is not lit.
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
6 The local display shows FPKEYBOARD. Press PLAY to start the test. 505
Attention all keys have to be pressed to get a positive result!
Press PLAY for more than one second to confirm that all the keys were pressed and shown on the local dis-
play. If not all the keys were pressed, a FAIL message will appear on the local display.
Press RECORD for more than one second to indicate that not all keys were pressed and shown on the local
display.
Press STOP for more than one second to skip this nucleus.
7 The local display shows FPREMOTE CONTROL. Press PLAY to start the test. 506
Press PLAY to confirm that a key on the remote control was pressed and shown on the local display. Only
one key has to be pressed to get a successful result.
Press RECORD to indicate that the key on the remote control was pressed but not shown on the local display.
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
8 The local display shows FPDIMMER. Press PLAY to start the test. 518
Press PLAY to confirm that the text on the local display was dimmed.
Press RECORD to indicate that the text on the local display was not dimmed.
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
9 The local display shows ROUTE VIDEO. Press PLAY to start the test. 712
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
10 The local display shows ROUTE AUDIO. Press PLAY to start the test. 713
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
11 The local display shows COLOUR-BAR ON. Press PLAY to start the test. 120
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
12 The local display shows PINK NOISE ON. Press PLAY to start the test. 115
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
13 The local display shows PINK NOISE OFF. Press PLAY to start the test. 116
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
14 The local display shows SINE ON. Press PLAY to start the test. 117
Press STOP to stop the sine.
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
15 The local display shows COLOUR-BAR OFF. Press PLAY to start the test. 121
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
16 The local display shows BERESET. Press PLAY to start the test. 603
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
17 The local display shows BETRAY OPEN. Press PLAY to start the test. 616
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
18 The local display shows BETRAY CLOSE. Press PLAY to start the test. 615
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
19 The local display shows BEWRITE READ. Press PLAY to start the test. 617
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
20 The local display shows BETRAY OPEN. Press PLAY to start the test. 616
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
21 The local display shows BETRAY CLOSE. Press PLAY to start the test. 615
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
22 The local display shows READ ERRORLOG. Press PLAY to start the test. 633
Press STOP to skip this nucleus.
If the player test succeeded, the user/dealer script will start in an endless loop.
If the player test failed, the local display will display FAIL and the error code

Remark
In case of failure, the display shows " FAIL XXXXXX ". The
description of the shown error code can be retrieved in the
survey of Nuclei Error Codes (paragraph 5.4). Once an error
occurs, it is not possible to continue the player script. Unplug
the set and restart the player script. By pressing the STOP key,
it is possible to jump over the failure and to continue the player
script.
 Unplug the power cord
Hold 2 keys
<OPEN/CLOSE> + <PLAY>
EN 52
simultaneously pressed while
you plug the recorder
5.

FRONT PANEL TEST

PRESS <PLAY> PRESS <STOP> PRESS <PLAY> PRESS <STOP>

PRESS <PLAY> PRESS <STOP> PRESS <PLAY> PRESS <STOP> TO START TEST TO SKIP TEST PRESS <PLAY> PRESS <STOP>
TO START TEST TO SKIP TEST
TO START TEST TO SKIP TEST TO START TEST TO SKIP TEST TO START TEST TO SKIP TEST
HEXADECIMAL XX TIMES HEXADECIMAL XX TIMES
KEY CODE PRESSED RC KEY CODE PRESSED

PRESS <PLAY> IF OK
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

PRESS <STOP> TO ABORT PRESS <PLAY> IF OK PRESS AT LEAST ONE KEY

PRESS ALL KEYS AT LEAST ONCE
PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK SEE TABLE FOR KEY CODES ON THE REMOTE CONTROL
SEE TABLE FOR RC KEY CODES

TO EXIT TEST: PRESS ONE OF FOLLOWING KEYS

PRESS <PLAY> MORE THAN 1S IF TEST IS OK ON THE LOCAL KEYBOARD
PRESS <RECORD> MORE THAN 1S IF TEST IS NOT OK PRESS <PLAY> IF TEST IS OK
PRESS <RECORD> IF TEST IS NOT OK
PRESS <PLAY> IF OK PRESS <PLAY> IF OK
PRESS <PLAY> PRESS <STOP> PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK
PRESS <STOP> TO ABORT
TO START TEST TO SKIP TEST RC KEY NAME RC KEY CODE
TV/DVD 43
FRONT KEY NAME FRONT KEY CODE
STANDBY 0C

Figure 5-2
STANDBY/ON 00E STOP 31 DIGITAL BOARD TEST
OPEN/CLOSE 001 REC/OTR 37
STOP 002 PLAY 2C
PLAY 003
Diagnostic Software

PREVIOUS 21
PRESS <PLAY> IF OK
PRESS <PLAY> IF OK RECORD 004 GUIDE CC
PRESS <STOP> TO ABORT
PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK SEARCH << 006 NEXT 20
SEARCH >> 005 DISC 54 RC KEY NAME RC KEY CODE
CHANNEL UP 009 SYSTEM 0F PLAY MODE 1D
CHANNEL DOWN 00A UP 58 REC MODE 94
REC MODE 00D LEFT 5A DISC MANAGER C7
RIGHT 5B FSS CF
DOWN 59 i CB
PRESS <PLAY> PRESS <STOP> RETURN 83 SUBTITLE 4B
TO START TEST TO SKIP TEST OK 5C AUDIO 4E
CLEAR 41 ANGLE 85
TIMER FE ZOOM F7
PRESS <PLAY> IF OK SELECT FA SLOW 22
PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK VOL + ONLY FOR TV PAUSE 30
VOL - ONLY FOR TV
REC MODE 94
LED BECOMES RED DIM 13
1 01
2 02
3 03
4 04
5 05
6 06
7 07
8 08
PRESS <PLAY> IF OK
PRESS <RECORD> IF NOT OK 9 09
0 00
T/C C8

270103
TR 01006_003
MONITOR EE
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 53

DIGITAL BOARD &

FRONTPANEL ANALOG BOARD BASIC ENGINE
TEST TEST TEST

press <PLAY> to execute

press < STOP > to skip press <PLAY> to execute
press <NEXT > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute

press < STOP > to skip press <PLAY> to execute
press <STOP> to skip
INSERT DVD +RW DISC TO EXECUTE
WRITE / READ TEST

press <PLAY> to execute

press < STOP > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute

press <PLAY> to execute press <STOP> to skip
press < STOP > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute

press <PLAY> to execute press <STOP > to skip
press <NEXT > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute

press <PLAY> to execute press <STOP> to skip
press < STOP > to skip

press <PLAY> to execute

press <STOP> to continue press <STOP> to skip

<PLAY>

PRESS <STOP>
press <STOP> to skip
press <PLAY> to execute TO STEP DOWN

NO ERRORS LOGGED

PRESS <STOP> PRESS <RECORD>

TO STEP DOWN TO STEP UP

PRESS <RECORD>
TO STEP UP

PRESS <PLAY> TO CONTINUE

IF ERROR

To exit PLAYER SCRIPT, unplug the power cord

TR 01007_003
270103

Figure 5-3
 EN 54 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

5.2.3 Error Log Group number Group name

6 Basic Engine
Explanation: 7 Analogue board (DVDR only)
The application errors will be logged in the NVRAM. The
maximum number of error bytes that will be visible is 19. The 8 DVIO (DVDR only)
last reported error is shown as DN D0000000, the oldest visible 9 Loop nuclei (DVDR only)
error as D0000000 UP and the errors in between as DN 10 Library sub nuclei (I2C nuclei)
D0000000 UP. DN stands for DOWN, UP stands for 11 User interface
UPWARDS. The shown error codes are identical to the Nuclei
12 Furore (SACD only)
Error Codes (paragraph 5.4).
13 DAC (SACD only)
5.2.4 Trade Mode
The following groups are defined for Digital Board Chrysalis:

TRADE MODE Group number Group name

When the recorder is in Trade Mode, the recorder cannot be
controlled by means of the front key buttons, but only by means 0 Basic / Scripts
of the remote control.
1 Chrysalis
IF TRADE MODE OFF
2 Boot EEPROM
IF TRADE MODE ON
3 NVRAM
UNPLUG THE RECORDER UNPLUG THE RECORDER
4 SDRAM
5 Flash
6 Video Input Processor
PRESS 2 KEYS PRESS 2 KEYS
SIMULTANEOUSLY SIMULTANEOUSLY 7 DVIO
<STOP> + <OPEN/CLOSE> <STOP> + <OPEN/CLOSE>
PLUG THE RECORDER PLUG THE RECORDER 8 Progressive Scan
9 Basic Engine
RECORDER IS IN TRADE MODE RECORDER IS IN NORMAL MODE 10 Display and Control Board
WHEN PRESSING FRONT WHEN PRESSING FRONT
KEYS, THE RECORDER KEYS, THE RECORDER 11 Analogue Board
DOESN'T RESPOND WILL RESPOND
12 System
CL 16532095_071.eps
150801
5.3.2 Error Handling
Figure 5-4
Each nucleus returns an error code. This code contains six
5.2.5 Virgin mode numerals, which means:

If you want that the recorder starts up in Virgin mode, follow this [ XX YY ZZ ]
procedure:
• Unplug the recorder Error code
• plug the recorder again while you keep the STAND BY/ON Nucleus number
key pressed
• the set starts up in Virgin mode. Nucleus group number
CL 06532152_013.eps
051200

5.3 Menu and Command Mode Interface Figure 5-6

5.3.1 Nuclei Numeration The nucleus group numbers and nucleus numbers are the
same as above.
Each nucleus has a unique number of four digits. This number
is the input of the command mode. 5.3.3 Command Mode Interface

[ XX YY ] Set-Up Physical Interface Components

Hardware required:
• Service PC
• one free COM port on the Service PC
Nucleus number • special cable to connect DVD recorder to Service PC
Nucleus group number The service PC must have a terminal emulation program (e.g.
CL 06532152_012.eps
051200
Hyperterminal) installed and must have a free COM port (e.g.
COM1). Activate the terminal emulation program and check
Figure 5-5 that the port settings for the free COM port are: 19200 bps, 8
data bits, no parity, 1 stop bit and no flow control. The free COM
port must be connected via a special cable to the RS232 port
The following groups are defined for Digital Board 1.5,
of the DVD recorder. This special cable will also connect the
Empress:
test pin, which is available on the connector, to ground (i.e.
Group number Group name activate test pin).
0 Basic / Scripts Code number of PC interface cable: 3122 785 90017
1 Host decoder (Sti5505 and memory)
2 Audio / video encoder (DVDR only) Activation Digital Board 1.5 Empress
Plug the recorder to the mains and the following text will appear
3 VSM (DVDR only)
on the screen of the terminal (program):
4 NVRAM
5 Front Panel
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 55

Error messages D&S program

DVD Video Recorder Diagnostic Software version 48
Basic SDRAM Data bus test passed
Basic SDRAM Address bus test passed
Basic SDRAM Device test passed

(M) enu, (C) ommand or (S) 2B-interface? [M] : @ C

DD:>
CL 16532095_073.eps
150801

Figure 5-7

The first line indicates that the Diagnostic software has been
activated and contains the version number. The next lines are
the successful result of the SDRAM interconnection test and
Figure 5-9b
the basic SDRAM test. The last line allows the user to choose
between the three possible interface forms. If pressing C has
made a choice for Command Interface, the prompt ("DD>") will In these cases, the boot EEPROM of the Chrysalis Digital
appear. The diagnostic software is now ready to receive Board does not contain the required string with the hardware
commands. The commands that can be given are the numbers information. To update the Digital Board with the correct string,
of the nuclei. nucleus 1226 must be executed.

Activation Digital Board Chrysalis See next section 'Diversity String Input'.
1. Pull the mains cord from the recorder and reconnect it There can also be the next error message.
again (reboot).
2. The next welcome message will appear on the PC:

Welcome screen D&S program

Figure 5-8

Now, the prompt 'DS:>' will appear. The diagnostic software is

now ready to receive commands. The commands that can be
given are the numbers of the nuclei. If you see above shown
screen, continue with paragraph 'Nuclei Codes'.
3. It is possible that the next messages will appear when
starting the DVD+RW for the first time

Error messages D&S program

Figure 5-9c

Enter "Y" to program a safe string. With this automatically

generated string the board will work in principle but it has to be
checked if all board settings were detected correctly.

Figure 5-9a
EN 56 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Diversity String Input

4. Execute nucleus 1226 to enter the string. Please see

chapter 8.5 for details

Nucleus 1226 execution with string

Figure 5-10

5. To check if the hardware info is filled correctly, you can

execute nucleus 1228.

Nucleus 1228 info example

Figure 5-11

6. Exit the 'Terminal' program.

7. Reboot the DVD recorder to allow the software to start.

 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 57

Command Overview Digital Board 1.5 Empress [xx yy] Nuclei

We provide an overview of the nuclei and their numbers. This Number
overview is preliminary and subject to modifications. 207 Audio Encoder I2C
208 SAA7118 select input
Host Decoder [01]
209 Empress Version
[xx yy] Nuclei
Number
VSM [03]
100 Checksum Flash
[xx yy] Nuclei
101 Flash Write Access 1
Number
102 Flash Write Access 2
300 Register Access
103 Flash Write Read
301 SDRAM Access
104 SdRam Write Read
302 SDRAM Write Read
105 SdRam Write Read Fast
303 Interrupt lines
106 Dram Write Read
304 VSM Interconnection
107 Dram Write Read Fast
305 UART
108 Hardware Version
109 Mute On NVRAM [04]
110 Mute Off
[xx yy] Nuclei
115 Pink Noise On Number
116 Pink Noise Off 400 Reset
117 Sine On 401 Read
118 Sine Burst 1kHz 402 Modify
119 Sine Burst 12kHz 403 UniqueNr Read
120 Colour-bar On 404 Read Error Log
Note: Use nuclus 712 with parameter 07 to route the 407 Reset Error Log
signals to the analogue board output
409 Line2 Region-Code Reset
121 Colour-bar Off
410 UniqueNr Store
122 NvramWrR
123 NvramI2c Front Panel [05]
130 Boot Version
[xx yy] Nuclei
131 Application Version Number
132 Diagnostics Version 500 Echo
133 Download Version 501 Version
134 Write / read I2C message to / from digital board 502 Segment
135 Video Test Signal 503 Label
OnNote: Use nuclus 712 with parameter 07 to route
504 Led
the signals to the analogue board output.
505 Keyboard
Input: 135 [a] [b]
a: Number of test image, 506 Remote-Control
0. Horizontal colour-bar 507 Segment Starburst
1. White 508 Segment Vertical
2. Yellow
509 Segment Horizontal
3. Light blue
514 Beeper
4. Green
5. Magenta 515 Discbar
6. Red 516 Discbar Dots
7. Blue 517 Vu / Grid
8. Black
518 Dimmer
9. Colour triangle (execution time is 12 seconds)
519 Blinking
10. Test image for progressive scan (execution time
is 6 seconds) 520 Light All Segments
522 Flap Open
b: Video standard, 523 Flap Close
0. PAL BDGHI
1. NTSC Basic Engine [06]
136 Video Test Signal Off
[xx yy] Nuclei
137 Macrovision Off Number
600 S2B Pass
Audio Video Decoder [02]
601 S2B Echo
[xx yy] Nuclei 602 Version
Number
603 Reset
200 Video Encoder I2C
604 Focus On
202 SAA7118 I2C
605 Focus Off
203 Audio Encoder SRAM Access
606 Disc Motor On
204 Audio Encoder Access
607 Disc Motor Off
205 Audio Encoder SRAM Write Read
608 Radial On
206 Audio Encoder Interrupts
EN 58 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

[xx yy] Nuclei [xx yy] Nuclei

Number Number
609 Radial Off 730 Store external presets
615 Tray In 731 Get slash version
616 Tray Out 732 AFC Reference Voltage Tuner
617 Write Read 736 Get EPG Version
618 Write Read Endless Loop 737 Get operating hours in Tuner Mode
619 Selftest
620 BE Test DVIO [08]
621 Laser Test [xx yy] Nuclei
622 Spindle (Disc) Motor Test Number
623 Focus Test 800 Check DVIO board presence
624 Sledge Motor Test 801 Reset DVIO
625 Sledge Motor Slow 802 DVIO Access
626 Tilt 803 Get DVIO error codes
627 EEPROM Read 804 Get DVIO module Ids
628 EEPROM Write 805 Execute DVIO module SelfTestInput: 805 [a]
629 Optimise Jitter [b]Parameters: a=1/0…full Ram test, b=1/0…cable
connected
630 Radial ATLS Calibration
806 Set DVIO led on.
631 Get Statistics Information
807 Set DVIO led off.
632 Reset Statistics Information
633 BE Read Error Log Loop Nuclei [09]
634 BE Reset Error Log
[xx yy] Nuclei
638 Get Self Test Result Number
639 Radial Initialisation 900 Digital Audio Loop(no function in Gen. 1.5 and Lead)
640 Get OPU info 901 User / Dealer Audio Loop
902 Digital Video Loop
Analog Board [07]
903 Digital Video VBI Loop
[xx yy] Nuclei 904 System Video Loop
Number
905 System Video VBI Loop
700 Echo
906 User / Dealer Video Loop
703 Boot Version
907 User / Dealer Video VBI Loop
704 Hardware Version
908 System Audio Loop SCART
705 Clock Adjust
909 System Audio Loop CINCH
706 Tuner
910 Digital DVIO Video Loop
707 Frequency Download
911 System Video Vip
708 Data Slicer
709 Sound Processor Miscellanious [14]
710 AV Selector [xx yy] Nuclei
711 Nvram Number
712 Route Video 1400 Clock 11.289 MHz
713 Route Audio 1401 Clock 12.288 MHz
715 Set Slash Version 1412 Progressive Scan I2C
716 Application Version 1413 Progressive Scan test image on
717 Diagnostics Version 1414 Progressive Scan test image off
718 Download Version 1415 Progressive Scan Route Enable
720 Bargraph Level Adjustment 1416 Progressive Scan Route Disable
721 Clock correction
722 Clock reference Scripts [00]

723 Re-virginise Recorder [xx yy] Nuclei

724 Flash Checksum Number

725 Tuner frequency selection 1 UserDealer Script

Europe: To make video and audio signals from the 2 Player Script
tuner available on Scart2, send command "712 08".
For Nafta/Apac: To make the black/white Video Routing Audio and Video
available on Y/C Rear Out connector, send
command “712 08” Route Video
Input: 725 [frequency in MHz*16] [system] Nucleus Number: 712
System: NTSC=16, PAL BG=16, PAL I=32, PAL Description
DK=48, SEC L=64, SEC LS=80, SEC BG=96, SEC This nucleus routes the video signals on the analogue board to
DK=112 the destination determined by the input parameters
727 Set virgin bit
728 Clear Virgin Bit
729 Write / read I2C message to / from analogue board
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 59

The paths that are available for video routing and their description (Euro region):

Path ID Description
00 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from digital board and will be re-routed back to the digital
board.
01 Input signal is from FRONT VIDEO(CVBS) IN and will be routed to the digital board.
02 No Routing.
03 Input signal is from FRONT S-VIDEO(Y/C) and will be routed to the digital board.
04 No Routing.
05 Input signal is CVBS from SCART1 and will be routed to the digital board.
06 Input signal is CVBS from SCART2 and will be routed to the digital board.
07 Input Signal is CVBS from Digital Board and it will be routed to Scart1 and Scart2.
08 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from ANTENNA IN and will be routed to SCART2.
09 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from SCART1 and will be routed to SCART2.
10 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from SCART2 and will be routed to SCART1.
11 Signal path is routed Fast Blank from Scart2 pin16 and will be routed Scart1 pin16
12 Input Signal is YC from Digital Board and it will be routed to Scart1.
13
14 No Routing.
15 Input Signal is CVBS from TUNER and it will be routed to Digital .
16 No Routing.
17 Input Signal is routed from digital board YC to REAR S-VIDEO(YC) OUT
18 Signal path is routed from digital board RGB to RGB SCART1 and from digital board CVBS
to digital board CVBS.
19 No Routing.
20 Input RGB Signal is routed from Digital Board to SCART1(RGB),Input CVBS Signal from
Digital Board to Digital Board and Fast Blanking Signal from Scart 2 to Scart1.
21 Input Y/C Signal from Digital Board is routed to Rear Y/C Connector and Input Y/c Signal
from Front Y/C connector is routed to Digital Board.

Example Route Audio

Nucleus Number: 713
DD:> 712 01 Description
71200: Video routing on the Analogue Board OK. This nucleus routes the audio on the analogue board to the
Test OK @ destination determined by the input parameters
The paths that are available for audio routing and their
description (Europe version)

Path ID Description
00 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board.(This is done so
that nucleus 901 works)
01 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board.
02 No Routing.
03 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART1 and will be routed to the digital board.
04 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART2 and will be routed to the digital board.
05 No routing.
06 No routing.
07 Input Audio signal is from the digital Board and it will be routed to the Scart 1 and Scart2
08 Input AUDIO signal from TUNER and will be routed to SCART2.
09 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART1 and will be routed to SCART2.
10 Input audio signal from Scart2 is routed to Scart1.
11 Input Audio signal is routed from DVIO to Scart2.
12
13 No Routing.
14 Input is Audio Signal from DVIO and it will be routed to Digital Board.
15 Input is Audio Signal from TUNER and it will be routed to Digital Board..
16 No routing.
17 No Routing.
18 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to SCART2.
21 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board.(This is done so
that nucleus 909.1 works)

EXAMPLE DD:> 713 00

71300: Audio routing on the Analogue Board OK.
EN 60 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Test OK @ Below you will find an overview of the nuclei, their numbers,
and their error codes. This overview is preliminary and subject
Command overview Digital Board Chrysalis to modifications.

Chrysalis (CHR)
Nucleus Name DS_CHR_DevTypeGet
Nucleus Number 100
Description Sends the device ID and the module ids and revisions of the PNX7100 (Chrysalis) to the
stdout port.
User Input None
Example DS:> 100
Device ID 7100
Codec ID PNX7100_MF2
F-BCU (0x0102) 1.0 INTC (0x011d) 1.0 PCI-XIO(0x0113) 1.0
SIF(0x013b) 1.0 EJTAG (0x0104) 0.0 S-BCU (0x0102) 1.0
BOOT (0x010a) 1.0 CONFIG (0x013f) 1.0 RESET (0x0123) 1.0
DEBUG (0x0116) 0.0 UART0 (0x0107) 0.1 UART1 (0x0107) 0.1
UART2 (0x0107) 0.1 UART3 (0x0107) 0.1 I2C0 (0x0105) 0.1
I2C1 (0x0105) 0.1 GPIO (0x013c) 1.0 SYNC (0x013a) 1.0
DISP0 (0xa015) 0.1 DISP1 (0xa00f) 0.0 OSD (0x0136) 0.1
SPU (0xa00e) 0.0 MIXER (0x0137) 1.0 DENC (0x0138) 0.1
CCIR (0x0139) 1.0 VDEC (0x0133) 0.1 PARSER (0xa00d) 0.0
DV (0xa00c) 0.0 BEI (0xa00a) 0.0 IDE (0xa009) 0.0
SGDX (0xa008)0.0 BYTE (0xa00b) 0.0 OUTPUT (0xa003) 0.0
ACOMP (0xa000) 0.0 VFE (0xa001) 0.0 VCOMP (0xa002) 0.0
SCR (0x0000) 0.0 SIFF (0xa011) 0.0 WMD (0xa010) 0.0
AUDIO0 (0xa015) 0.1 AUDIO1 (0xa00f) 0.0 PSCAN (0xa018) 0.0

010000:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_TestImageOn

Nucleus Number 101
Description Generates a test-image of a selected video standard on selected video output on the digital
board. When no input is given, the default values will be used. Use nucleus
DS_ANAB_VideoRouting to route the video signal on the analogue board output
User Input The user has to decide which test image, video standard and video output must be used:
Test image id:
0 VERTICAL_COLOURBAR (default)
1 HORIZONTAL_COLOURBAR
2 WHITE
3 YELLOW
4 CYAN
5 GREEN
6 MAGENTA
7 RED
8 BLUE
9 BLACK
10 GRAY
Video standard:
PAL (default)
NTSC
Video output:
ALL CVBS and YC and RGB (default)
CVBS
YC
RGB
YUV
PSCAN progressive scan
Example DS:> 101
010100:
Test OK @
DS:> 101 0 pal cvbs
010100:
Test OK @
DS:> 101 4 ntsc yc
010100:
Test OK @
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 61

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_TestImageOff

Nucleus Number 102
Description Switches the test-image off.
User Input None
Example DS:> 102
010200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_SineOn

Nucleus Number 103
Description Generate an audio sine signal on the audio output of the digital board.
Note: Left channel 6kHz, right channel 12 kHz sine. Make sure to route the signal first.
User Input None
Example DS:> 103
010300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_SineOff

Nucleus Number 104
Description Stop generating the audio sine signal
User Input None
Example DS:> 104
010400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_SineBurst

Nucleus Number 105
Description Generate an audio sine signal on the audio output of the digital board for 4 seconds.
Note: Left channel 6kHz, right channel 12 kHz sine with some known hick-ups
User Input None
Example DS:> 105
010500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_MuteOn

Nucleus Number 106
Description Mute the audio outputs of the digital board
User Input None
Example DS:> 106
010600:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_MuteOff

Nucleus Number 107
Description De-mute the audio outputs of the digital board
User Input None
Example DS:> 107
010700:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_DvLedOn

Nucleus Number 108
Description Check the connection to the DV-LED on the digital board by switching it on
User Input None
Example DS:> 108
010800:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_DvLedOff

Nucleus Number 109
Description Switch off the DV-LED on the digital board
User Input None
EN 62 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 109

010900:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_MacroVisionOn

Nucleus Number 110
Description Turn on MacroVision.
User Input None
Example DS:> 110
011000:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_MacroVisionOff

Nucleus Number 111
Description Turn off MacroVision.
User Input None
Example DS:> 111
011100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_Peek

Nucleus Number 112
Description Peek a value on a specified address
User Input The address to peek on
Example DS:> 112 0xa0700000
011200: Value read = 0x000001BD
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_Poke

Nucleus Number 113
Description Poke a value on a specified address
User Input The address to poke and the value: <address><value>
Example DS:> 113 0xa0700000 0xaabbccdd
011300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_INT_PICInterrupts

Nucleus Number 114
Description Test all interrupts of the priority interrupt controller
User Input -
Example DS:> 114
011400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_CHR_DMA_TestDMA

Nucleus Number 115
Description Test the memory to memory DMA transfer
User Input -
Example DS:> 115
011500:
Test OK @

Boot EEPROM (BROM)

Nucleus Name DS_BROM_Communication
Nucleus Number 200
Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the Chrysalis and the boot EE-
PROM
User Input None
Example DS:> 200
020000:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BROM_WriteRead

Nucleus Number 201
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 63

Description Check whether the Boot EEPROM can be written to and read from
User Input None
Example DS:> 201
020100:
Test OK @

NVRAM
Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_Communication
Nucleus Number 300
Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the Chrysalis and the EEPROM
User Input None
Example DS:> 300
030000:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_WriteRead

Nucleus Number 301
Description Check whether the EEPROM can be written to and read from
User Input None
Example DS:> 301
030100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_Clear

Nucleus Number 302
Description Make the EEPROM empty, containing all zeroes.
User Input None
Example DS:> 302
030200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_Modify

Nucleus Number 303
Description Modifies one or more locations in NVRAM and updates the checksum of the section
modified
User Input 1. The location that must be modified
i.e. "ALL" "BOOT" "DIAGNOSTICS" "DOWNLOAD" "CONFIG" "RECORDER" or no
string if an offset from the base address of the NVRAM is required
2. The offset and data which to put on the selected location
<offset> <length> <data>
Example DS:> 303 DIAGNOSTICS 5 1 0x5a
030300: Section is modified successfully
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_NVRAM_Read

Nucleus Number 304
Description Read out one or more locations in the NVRAM
User Input 1. The location which must be read i.e. "ALL" "BOOT" "DIAGNOSTICS" "DOWN LOAD"
"CONFIG" "RECORDER" or no string if an offset from the base address of the NVRAM
is required
2. The offset and number of bytes to read
<offset> <length>
Example 304 DIAGNOSTICS 0 6
030400: Value read = 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x5A
Test OK @

SDRAM
Nucleus Name DS_SDRAM_WriteRead
Nucleus Number 400
Description Check all data lines, address lines and memory locations of the SDRAM
User Input None
Example DS:> 400
040000:
Test OK @
EN 64 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_SDRAM_WriteReadFast

Nucleus Number 401
Description Check all data lines and address lines of the SDRAM
User Input None
Example DS:> 401
040100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SDRAM_Write

Nucleus Number 402
Description Write to a specific memory address
User Input 1. The location that must be modified
( SDRAM starts at address 0xA0000000 )
2. The value to put on the selected location
Example DS:> 402 0xa1000010 0xad112222
040200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SDRAM_Read

Nucleus Number 403
Description Read from a specific memory address
User Input The location from which the data must be read
( SDRAM starts at address 0xA0000000 )
Example DS:> 403 0xa1000010
040300: Value read = 0xAD112222
Test OK @

FLASH
Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_DevTypeGet
Nucleus Number 500
Description Get the device (revision) type information of the FLASH IC. (manufacturer and device ID)
User Input None
Example DS:> 500
050000: Found FLASH memory:
Manufacturer ID: 0x01
Device ID : 0x01
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_WriteRead

Nucleus Number 501
Description Check whether the FLASH can be written to and read from
User Input None
Example DS:> 501
050100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_Read

Nucleus Number 502
Description Read from a specific memory address in FLASH
User Input The location from which data must be read
( FLASH starts at address 0xB8000000 )
Example DS:> 502 0xb8000000
050200: Value read = 0x3C08A000
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_ChecksumProgram

Nucleus Number 503
Description Check the checksum of the application partitions by recalculating and comparing partition
checksums
User Input None
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 65

Example DS:> 503

050300:
BootCode checksum is: 0xBABE5B6F, which is correct
Diagnostics checksum is : 0xBABEBAFF, which is correct
Download checksum is: 0xBABEEDBF, which is correct
Application checksum is : 0xBABE8EEC, which is correct
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_CalculateChecksum

Nucleus Number 504
Description Calculate the checksum over all memory addresses. Used to check entire FLASH contents
User Input None
Example DS:> 504
050400: The Checksum = 0xBABE30A4
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_FLASH_CalculateChecksumFast

Nucleus Number 505
Description Calculate a checksum over a selected number of address locations
User Input None
Example DS:> 505
050500: The Checksum = 0xBABEB064
Test OK @

Video Input Processor (VIP)

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_DevTypeGet
Nucleus Number 600
Description Get the device (revision) type information of the VIP IC
User Input None
Example DS:> 600
060000: Found SAA7118
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_Communication

Nucleus Number 601
Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the chrysalis and the VIP IC
User Input None
Example DS:> 601
060100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_ClockOutputOn

Nucleus Number 602
Description Switch the clock output on
User Input None
Example DS:> 602
060200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_ClockOutputOff

Nucleus Number 603
Description Switch the clock output off
User Input None
Example DS:> 603
060300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_VIP_SelectInput

Nucleus Number 604
Description Select an input video path to be switched to the analogue output pin (AOUT) of the VIP
EN 66 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

User Input The input to select, see table below.

1 CVBS_Y_IN_A
2 CVBS_OUT_B
3 CVBS_Y_IN_B
4 CVBS_Y_IN_C
6 C_IN
8 G_IN
9 Y_IN
13 B_IN
14 U_IN
18 R_IN
19 V_IN
Example DS:> 604 1
060400:
Test OK @

Digital Video Input Output (DVIO)

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_LinkDevTypeGet
Nucleus Number 700
Description Get the device (revision) type information of the 1394 Link layer IC
User Input None
Example DS:> 700
070000: Device type of the link layer IC: ffc00301
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_PhyDevTypeGet

Nucleus Number 701
Description Get the device (revision) type information of the 1394 Physical layer IC
User Input None
Example DS:> 701
070100:
Device type of the phy layer IC: 0
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_LinkCommunication

Nucleus Number 702
Description Check the accessibility of the 1394 Link layer IC by writing to and reading from a specific
address
User Input None
Example DS:> 702
070200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_PhyCommunication

Nucleus Number 703
Description Check the accessibility of the 1394 Physical layer IC by writing to and reading from a spe-
cific address
User Input None
Example DS:> 703
070300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_Routing

Nucleus Number 704
Description Route a DV stream containing an audio and video signal through the physical and link layer
ICs to the Chrysalis
User Input None, test works for both NTSC and PAL
Example DS:> 704
070400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_DetectNode

Nucleus Number 705
Description Check whether a DV node can be detected by the hardware
User Input None, test works for both NTSC and PAL
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 67

Example DS:> 705

070500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DVIO_DetectStream

Nucleus Number 706
Description Check whether a DV stream can be detected by the hardware
User Input None, test works for both NTSC and PAL
Example DS:> 706
070600:
Test OK @

Progressive Scan (PSCAN)

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_CommunicationDenc
Nucleus Number 801
Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the chrysalis and the progressive
scan DENC-IC
User Input None
Example DS:> 801
080100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_TestImageOn

Nucleus Number 802
Description Generate the test images that are present on the progressive scan IC.
User Input In case of ADV7196:
When no input is given “HATCH” is the default
-“HATCH”
-“FRAME”
Remark:
“HATCH” is a crosshatch test pattern (horizontal and vertical white lines are displayed
against a black background)
“FRAME” is a uniform coloured frame/field test pattern (default white).
In case of FLI2300: Nothing.
Example DS:> 802 HATCH
080200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_TestImageOff

Nucleus Number 803
Description Switch off the generated test image
User Input None
Example DS:> 803
080300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_TestImageColourSettingsSet

Nucleus Number 804
Description Set the colour of the hatch- or the frame- field to a different value than the default white
User Input A colour string of one of the next non-case sensitive strings ( WHITE, BLACK, RED,
GREEN, BLUE, YELLOW, CYAN, MAGENTA ) or Y Cr Cb (hexa-) decimal values.
Example DS:> 804 yellow
080400:
Test OK @
DS:> 804 0x6a 0xde 0xca
080400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_TestImageColourSettingsGet

Nucleus Number 805
Description Get the colour settings of the hatch- or the frame- field.
User Input None
Example DS:> 805
080500: Colour Y Cr Cb values: 0xD2 0x92 0x10
Test OK @
EN 68 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_Routing

Nucleus Number 806
Description Route a video signal from the host processor through the progressive scan ICs to the pro-
gressive scan output of the set.
Note: to route the progressive scan to the output of the set, first call nucleus 1112 with pa-
rameter 0 (video routing on analogue board).
User Input None
Example DS:> 806
080600:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_DevTypeGetDeinterlacer

Nucleus Number 807
Description Get the device (revision) type information of the progressive scan deinterlacer.
User Input None
Example DS:> 807
080700:
Chip name : 2300
Chip version : 1
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PSCAN_CommunicationDeinterlacer

Nucleus Number 808
Description Check the communication between the IIC controller of the chrysalis and the progressive
scan Deinterlacer-IC
User Input None
Example DS:> 808
080800:
Test OK @

Basic Engine (BE)

Nucleus Name DS_BE_CommunicationEcho
Nucleus Number 900
Description Check the communication between the digital board and the basic engine by issuing an
echo command over the S2B interface
User Input None
Example DS:> 900
090000:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_Reset

Nucleus Number 901
Description Reset the basic engine
User Input None
Example DS:> 901
090100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_VersionGet

Nucleus Number 903
Description Get the version of the basic engine and that of the optical unit
User Input None
Example DS:> 903
090300: BE version = 20.09.18 Optical unit version = 3C.00.09.41.08
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_GetSelftestResult

Nucleus Number 902
Description Return the self-test results through the service port
User Input None
Example DS:> 902
090200:
Test OK @
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 69

Nucleus Name DS_BE_TrayOut

Nucleus Number 904
Description Open the tray of the basic engine
User Input None
Example DS:> 904
090400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_TrayIn

Nucleus Number 905
Description Close the tray of the basic engine
User Input None
Example DS:> 905
090500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_WriteReadDvdRw

Nucleus Number 906
Description Write data to and read data from a DVD+RW disc through the basic engine for verification
of the writing
User Input None
Example DS:> 906
090600: Testing on sector 0x5dbe0: OK
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_WriteReadDvdR

Nucleus Number 907
Description Write data to and read data from a DVD+R disc through the basic engine for verification of
the writing
User Input None
Example DS:> 907
090700: Testing on sector 0x36210: OK
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_StatisticalInformationGet

Nucleus Number 908
Description Retrieve the statistical information from the basic engine
User Input None
Example DS:> 908
Number of times Tray went Open/Closed : 4
Total minutes the CD laser was on :0
Total minutes the DVD laser was on :0
Total minutes the write laser was on :0
090800:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_StatisticalInformationReSet

Nucleus Number 909
Description Reset the statistical information in the basic engine
User Input None
Example DS:> 909
090900:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_ErrorLogGet

Nucleus Number 910
Description Get the error log from the basic engine
User Input None
Example DS:> 910
Momentary errors (0-9): 0x21 0x00 0x00 0x20 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Cumulative errors (1-9): 0x00 0x80 0x20 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00
Software fatal assert : 256 cpowermanager.cpp
091000:
Test OK @
EN 70 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_BE_ErrorLogReset

Nucleus Number 911
Description Reset the error log in the basic engine
User Input None
Example DS:> 911
091100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_JitterOptimise

Nucleus Number 912
Description Perform jitter optimisation:
A formatted DVD must be loaded into the engine before executing this nucleus
User Input none
Example DS:> 912
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_FocusOn

Nucleus Number 913
Description Put the laser of the BE into focus
User Input None
Example DS:> 913
091300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_FocusOff

Nucleus Number 914
Description Turn off putting the laser of the BE into focus
User Input None
Example DS:> 914
091400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_MotorOn

Nucleus Number 915
Description Turn on the turntable motor
User Input None
Example DS:> 915
091500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_MotorOff

Nucleus Number 916
Description Turn off the turntable motor
User Input None
Example DS:> 916
091600:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RadialOn

Nucleus Number 917
Description Close the radial loop
User Input A formatted DVD must be loaded into the engine before executing this nucleus
Example DS:> 917
091700:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RadialOff

Nucleus Number 918
Description Open the radial loop
User Input None
Example DS:> 918
091800:
Test OK @
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 71

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RadialCalibration

Nucleus Number 919
Description Calibrate the radial loop
User Input A formatted DVD must be loaded into the engine before executing this nucleus
Example DS:> 919
091900:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_Tilt

Nucleus Number 920
Description Test the tilt mechanism control loop, or allow its proper functioning to be measured.
Before executing this nucleus a disc must be loaded into the recorder
User Input None
Example DS:> 920
092000:
Tilt sensor bathtub: (71,-12,145)(68,-12,135)(62,-10,120)(56,-92,97)(50,-75,86)
(44,-59,80)(41,-52,80)(35,-37,86)(29,-22,86)
(23,-7,92)(17,8,111)(11,23,135)(8,31,138)(5,39,158)
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_CheckDisc

Nucleus Number 921
Description Check whether there is a disc inside the BE
User Input None
Example DS:> 921
092100: A DVD+Rewritable is loaded (disc is empty or partially recorded)
Test OK @
DS:> 921
092100: No Disc is loaded
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_SledgeMotor

Nucleus Number 922
Description Send the sledge to its home position, then to the middle of the disc, and then to the
end.
User Input None
Example DS:> 922
092200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_ReadTocInfo

Nucleus Number 924
Description Read the TOC from the disc. This gives a good indication if the BE works properly..
User Input None
Example DS:> 924
092400:
TOC info [hex] = 91 3A 0C
Test OK@

DS:> 924
092403:
The BE returned: 0x10 #{no_disc_error} No disc is detected
Error@

DS:> 924
092403: The BE returned: 0x1e #{illegal_medium_error} Engine unable to handle
current disc. Probably illegal medium.
Error @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_DiscErase

Nucleus Number 925
Description Perform a DC-erase on a DVD+RW disc.
User Input None
EN 72 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 925

The entirely disc will be erased.
Are you sure you want this?[y/n]

092500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RegionCodeSet

Nucleus Number 928
Description Set the region code in the AV3.
User Input Region code
Example DS:> 928 1
092800:
Test OK @

DS:> 928 This nucleus is not supported by the engine

092800:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RegionCodeGet

Nucleus Number 929
Description Read the region code from the AV3.
User Input None
Example DS:> 929
092900: DVD region 1
Test OK @

DS:> 929This nucleus is not supported by the engine

092900:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_BE_RegionCounterReset

Nucleus Number 930
Description Reset the region counter in the AV3.
User Input None
Example DS:> 930
093000:
Test OK @

DS:> 930 This nucleus is not supported by the engine

093000:
Test OK @

Display and Control Board (DCB)

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_CommunicationEcho
Nucleus Number 1000
Description Check the communication between the digital board and the DCB by issuing an echo
command
User Input None
Example DS:> 1000
100000:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_VersionGet

Nucleus Number 1001
Description Get the version of the DCB
User Input None
Example DS:> 1001
100100: DCB version: 13
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_LightDisplay

Nucleus Number 1002
Description Light the entire display of the DCB, and clear the display after confirmation.
User confirmation is necessary.
User Input None
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 73

Example DS:> 1002

100200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_Keyboard

Nucleus Number 1004
Description Check all keys of the keyboard by confirming the key-code displayed of each key.
User Input None
Example DS:> 1004
100400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_RemoteControl

Nucleus Number 1005
Description Check the interface between the remote control and the DCB by checking the key-
code displayed
User Input None
Example DS:> 1005
100500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_DCB_Led

Nucleus Number 1006
Description Switch the record LED on, and after confirmation off.
The user confirms by pressing the REC key, STOP key, or the PLAY key on the local
keyboard. The PLAY key confirms that the LED is on and the REC key
User Input None
Example DS:> 1006
100600:
Test OK @

Analogue Board (ANAB)

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationEcho
Nucleus Number 1100
Description Check the communication between the digital board and the analogue board by issu-
ing some echo string.
User Input None
Example DS:> 1100
110000: Hello Analogue Board
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicNvram

Nucleus Number 1101
Description Check the communication between the digital board and the NVRAM on the analogue
board.
User Input None
Example DS:> 1101
110100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicTuner

Nucleus Number 1102
Description Check the communication between the digital board and the tuner on the analogue
board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1102
110200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicDataSlicer

Nucleus Number 1103
Description Check the communication between the digital board and the data slicer on the ana-
logue board
User Input None
EN 74 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Example DS:> 1103

110300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicSoundProcessor

Nucleus Number 1104
Description Check the communication between the digital board and the sound processor on the
analogue board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1104
110400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_CommunicationIicAVSelector

Nucleus Number 1105
Description Check the communication between the digital board and the A/V-selector on the ana-
logue board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1105
110500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_HardwareVersionGet

Nucleus Number 1106
Description Get the hardware version of the analogue board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1106
110600: Analogue hardware version : 11
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SoftwareVersionBootGet

Nucleus Number 1107
Description Get the software version of the boot software of the analogue board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1107
110700: Bootcode application version : 11.00.11
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SoftwareVersionDownloadGet

Nucleus Number 1108
Description Get the software version of the download software of the analogue board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1108
110800: Download application version : 11.00.06
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SoftwareVersionApplGet

Nucleus Number 1109
Description Get the software version of the application software of the analogue board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1109
110900: Recorder application version : 11.00.23
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SoftwareVersionDiagnosticsGet

Nucleus Number 1110
Description Get the software version of the diagnostic software of the analogue board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1110
111000: Diagnostics application version : 11.00.13
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_ChecksumProgram

Nucleus Number 1111
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 75

Description Check the checksum of the several partitions by recalculating and comparing partition
checksums
User Input None
Example DS:> 1111
BootCode checksum is: 0xBABE6240, which is correct
Diagnostics checksum is : 0xBABEBEAD, which is correct
Download checksum is: 0xBABEA6B7, which is correct
Application checksum is : 0xBABEB277, which is correct
111100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_VideoRouting

Nucleus Number 1112
Description Perform the routing of the video paths on the analogue board
User Input The user has to input the correct parameter for the routing (see table 'video routing'
below).
Example DS:> 1112 00
111200:
Test OK @

Video routing paths (Europe)

Path ID Description
0 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from digital board and will be re-routed back to the digital
board.
1 Input signal is from FRONT VIDEO(CVBS) IN and will be routed to the digital board.
2 No Routing.
3 Input signal is from FRONT S-VIDEO(Y/C) and will be routed to the digital board.
4 No Routing.
5 Input signal is CVBS from SCART1 and will be routed to the digital board.
6 Input signal is CVBS from SCART2 and will be routed to the digital board.
7 Input Signal is CVBS from Digital Board and it will be routed to Scart1 and Scart2.
8 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from ANTENNA IN and will be routed to SCART2.
9 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from SCART1 and will be routed to SCART2.
10 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from SCART2 and will be routed to SCART1.
11 Signal path is routed Fast Blank from Scart2 pin16 and will be routed SCART1 pin16
12 Input Signal is YC from Digital Board and it will be routed to SCART1.
13
14 No Routing.
15 Input Signal is CVBS from TUNER and it will be routed to Digital .
16 No Routing.
17 Input Signal is routed from digital board YC to REAR S-VIDEO(YC) OUT
18 Signal path is routed from digital board RGB to RGB SCART1 and from digital board
CVBS to digital board CVBS.
19 No Routing.
20 Input RGB Signal is routed from Digital Board to SCART1(RGB),Input CVBS Signal
from Digital Board to Digital Board and Fast Blanking Signal from SCART2 to
SCART1.
21 Input Y/C Signal from Digital Board is routed to Rear Y/C Connector and Input Y/C Sig-
nal from Front Y/C connector is routed to Digital Board.

Video routing paths (NAFTA)

Path ID Description
0 No Routing.
1 Input signal is from FRONT VIDEO(CVBS) IN and will be routed to the digital board.This rout-
ing is same as the above path id.
2 Input signal is from REAR VIDEO(CVBS) IN and will be routed to the digital board.
3 Input signal is from FRONT S-VIDEO(Y/C) IN and the signal received will be routed to the
digital board.
4 Input signal is from REAR S-VIDEO(Y/C) IN and will be routed to the digital board.
5 No Routing.
6 No routing.
7 No routing.
8 Input signal is VIDEO(CVBS) from TUNER and will be routed to Y Pin of Rear Y/C Connec-
tor.This will give only black/White Picture .
9 Input signal is from YUV IN and will be routed to YUV OUT.This is possible only if Digital
Board routes back YUV signal received back to the Analogue board(DENC)
EN 76 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

10 No routing.
11 No routing.
12 No Routing.
13 No Routing.
14 No Routing.
15 Input CVBS Signal from Tuner is routed to Digital Board..
16 No Routing.
17 No Routing.
18 Input Signal from CVBS Rear In is routed to Digital Board. This is the same as path ID 02.
19 Input Y/C signal from Digital Board is routed to Y/C Rear Out Connector and Input signal from
Y/C Front In Connector is routed to Y/C Digital Board.
20 Y/C signal from Digital Board is routed to Y/C Rear Out Connector and Input signal from Y/
C Rear In Connector is routed to Y/C Digital Board.
23 The Video signal received from the Digital board will be output on Modulator channel 3.
24 The Video signal received from the Digital board will be output on Modulator channel 4.

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_AudioRouting

Nucleus Number 1113
Description Perform the routing of the audio paths on the analogue board
User Input The user has to input the correct parameter for the routing (see table 'audio routing'
below)
Example DS:> 1113 00
111300:
Test OK @

Audio routing paths (Europe)

Path ID Description
0 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board.
1 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board.
2 No Routing.
3 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART1 and will be routed to the digital board.
4 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART2 and will be routed to the digital board.
5 No routing.
6 No routing.
7 Input Audio signal is from the digital Board and it will be routed to the SCART1 and SCART2
8 Input AUDIO signal from TUNER and will be routed to SCART2.
9 Input signal is AUDIO from SCART1 and will be routed to SCART2.
10 Input audio signal from SCART2 is routed to SCART1.
11 Input Audio signal is routed from DVIO to SCART2.
12
13 No Routing.
14 Input is Audio Signal from DVIO and it will be routed to Digital Board.
15 Input is Audio Signal from TUNER and it will be routed to Digital Board..
16 No routing.
17 No Routing.
18 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to SCART2.
21 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board.

Audio routing paths (NAFTA)

Path ID Description
0 No Routing.
1 Input signal is from FRONT AUDIO IN and will be routed to the digital board.
2 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 2 and will be routed to the digital board.
3 Input Audio Signal is routed from FRONT Cinch In to Digital Board.(This is same as path ID
01)
4 Input Signal is from Rear Cinch In1 and it will be routed to Digital Board..
5 No routing.
6 No routing.
7 No routing.
8 No Routing.
9 No routing.
10 No Routing.
11 No Routing.
12 No Routing.
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 77

13 Input Signal is from Digital Board and it will be routed to the digital board.
14 No routing.
15 Input is Audio Signal from TUNER and it will be routed to Digital Board.
16 Input signal is AUDIO from dvio board and will be routed to Digital Board.
17 No routing.
18 No routing.
19 No routing.
20 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 2 and will be routed to the digital board.
21 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 1 and will be routed to the digital board.
22 Input signal is from REAR AUDIO IN 1 and will be routed to the digital board.
23 The Audio signal received from the Digital board will be outputted on Modulator channel 3.
24 The Audio signal received from the Digital board will be outputted on Modulator channel 4.

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_SelectTunerChannel

Nucleus Number 1114
Description Set the tuner to receive a valid audio and video signal
User Input <Frequency*16> <video standard id>
Tuner frequency: to tune the tuner to e.g. 216 MHz, this parameter must be 3456.
(Since 216*16 = 3456. This is to avoid the decimal points to the parameter list.)
Video standard id: The table below shows which video standards are possible
Video standard id Europe NAFTA
16 PAL_BG NTSC
32 PAL_I Invalid
48
PAL_DK Invalid
64
SEC_L Invalid
80
96 SEC_LS Invalid
112 SEC_BG Invalid
SEC_DK Invalid
Example DS:> 1114 3456 16
111400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_IICWriteRead

Nucleus Number 1115
Description Perform an IIC write and read action on the analogue board
User Input Writing:
[<W>|<w>] [I2C address] [number of data bytes to write]
with
<data[0]...data[n]> Max 16 data bytes (n < 16).
Reading:
[<R>|<r>] [I2C address] [number of data bytes to read]
Max 16 data bytes (n < 16).
Example DS:> 1115 w 0x94 2 0x06 0x02
111500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_ClockAdjust

Nucleus Number 1116
Description Set the clock to the value passed through in the YYYY MM DD HH MM SS format
User Input <YYYY> <MM> <DD> <HH> <MM> <SS>
Example DS:> 1116 2002 11 11 11 11 11
111600:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_ClockReference

Nucleus Number 1117
Description Generate a 1 kHz signal on pin 7 (INT) of the clock IC
User Input None
Example DS:> 1117
111700:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_ClockCorrection

Nucleus Number 1118
EN 78 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Description Store the clock IC correction value in NVRAM

User Input The correction value for the clock
Example DS:> 1118 1000023
111800:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_TunerAFCReferenceVoltage

Nucleus Number 1119
Description Store the reference voltage for the tuner in NVRAM
User Input The reference voltage, between 0 and 255
Example DS:> 1119 5
111900:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_TunerFrequencyDownload

Nucleus Number 1120
Description Store the frequency table in NVRAM. The frequency table is passed through the error-
string provided to the nucleus.
User Input See frequency table
Example DS:> 1120 2233 00 02 4E45442031
112000:
Test OK @

Frequency download string format

Format description remarks
X(XXX) Preset number
VVWW VV: Channel number
WW : Channel offset
ZZ Byte containing 8 bit fields for
TRUE/FALSE :
BIT 0: Decoder
BIT 1: Modulation
BIT 2: NICAM NICAM/stereo bit for Europe
SAP SAP/stereo bit for NAFTA
BIT 3: Satpreset
BIT 4: Presetdefined Preset defined bit is only used for Europe. For NAFTA, it is
Channelpreferred renamed as channelpreferred to indicate if a channel is pre-
BIT 5: ExtPreset ferred or not.
BIT 6: NameManuallyChanged TRUE if preset is defined from P50 as extern [TGA]
BIT 7: ChannelPreset
HH HfSystemFineTuning HfS: 4 bit, FT: -4,...,4
IIJJKKLLMM Netname Range: A,..,Z,0,..,9,_,.. Netname length exists for Europe
only.
‘II’ is the HEX-value for the first character, ‘JJ’ for the sec-
ond, Ö
The message string of (DS_MessageDef *msgString) should be in the format:
“X(XXX)_VVWW_ZZ_HH_IIJJKKLLMM”.
Here will be ‘X(XXX)’ a decimal value in the range of 0 to 255.
V, W, Z, H, I, J, K, L, M are hex values with out the prefix ‘0x’ (in the range 0... 9,A ... F)
“ _” Denotes a space character.

Remarks:
CHANNEL_SYSTEM is for NAFTA.
PRESET_SYSTEM is for Europe.

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_StoreExternalPresets

Nucleus Number 1121
Description Store the external presets in NVRAM
User Input None
Example DS:> 1121
112100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_ANAB_BargraphLevelAdjust

Nucleus Number 1122
Description Measure the audio signal corresponding to 0dB per channel and store it as correction
value in NVRAM
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 79

User Input none

Example DS:> 1122
112200:
Test OK @

System (SYS)

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_HardwareVersionGet

Nucleus Number 1200
Description Get the hardware version and type of the digital board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1200
120000: Hardware ID = 00
The (PIO-pins) Digital Board ID = 2
Test OK @
DS:>

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SoftwareVersionBootGet

Nucleus Number 1201
Description Get the version of the boot software on the digital board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1201
120100: Software Boot Version = 0001
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SoftwareVersionDownloadGet

Nucleus Number 1202
Description Get the version of the download software on the digital board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1202
120200: Software Download Version = 0001
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SoftwareVersionApplGet

Nucleus Number 1203
Description Get the version of the application software on the digital board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1203
120300: Software Application Version = 0001
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SoftwareVersionDiagnosticsGet

Nucleus Number 1204
Description Get the version of the diagnostics software on the digital board
User Input None
Example DS:> 1204
120400: Software Diagnostics Version = 0001
Test OK @
120503 Something went wrong while transferring the data.
120504 User cancelled the upload.
Example DS:> 1205 1
120500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_EepromUpload

Nucleus Number 1205
Description Upload the contents of the NVRAM on the analogue board or the digital board to the
service PC, by using the X-modem protocol
User Input Choose one of the following parameters for the nucleus:
1. Upload the contents of the NVRAM of the digital board
2. Upload the contents of the NVRAM of the analogue board
Choose in the terminal on the control PC -> transfer -> receive file.
Select X-modem protocol. Then click receive in the dialogue and fill in the file name
in which you want to store the data.
EN 80 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_EepromDownload

Nucleus Number 1206
Description Download a file with the contents of the NVRAM for the analogue board or the digital
board from the service PC to the recorder, by using the X-modem protocol
User Input Choose one of the following parameters for the nucleus:
1. Download the contents of the NVRAM of the digital board
2. Download the contents of the NVRAM of the analogue board
Choose in the terminal of the control PC -> transfer -> send file.
Select X-modem protocol. Then choose a file with the Browse button in the dialogue
and click on send.
Example DS:> 1206 1
120600:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DvIdNumberGet

Nucleus Number 1208
Description Get the IEEE1394 ID
User Input None
Example DS:> 1208
120800: The DvIdNumber is: 0x0C22384E5A
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_IicWrite

Nucleus Number 1209
Description Perform an IIC write action on the digital board
User Input The user input the number of bytes to write followed by these bytes:
<BusID><Slave address to write to><number of bytes to write><d1><d2><..><dx>
Where the bus ID is either 0 (normally used) or 1
Example DS:> 1209 0 0xa0 1 0x6
120900: 1 Bytes written
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_IicRead

Nucleus Number 1210
Description Perform an IIC read action on the digital board
User Input The user inputs the number of bytes to read and the address to read them from:
<BusID><Slave address to read from><Number of bytes to read>
Where the bus ID is either 0 (normally used) or 1
Example DS:> 1210 0 0xa0 1
121000: Value read =0x06
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_UartWrite

Nucleus Number 1211
Description Perform an UART write action on the digital board on a specified UART
User Input The user inputs the UART to write to, the number of bytes and the bytes to be written
to the UART.
1=UART port 1 : not used
2=UART port 2 : Bit Engine
3=UART port 3 : Analogue board
<UartNr><Number of bytes to write><d1><d2><..><dx>
Example DS:> 1211 2 2 0xd1 0x01
121100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_UartRead

Nucleus Number 1212
Description Perform an UART read action on the digital board on a specified UART
User Input The user inputs the UART to read from.
1=UART port 1 : not used
2=UART port 2 : Bit Engine
3=UART port 3 : Analogue board
<UartNr >
Example DS:> 1212 2
121200: The value that was read is: 0x50 0xD1 0x00
Test OK @
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 81

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VideoLoopThroughStart

Nucleus Number 1213
Description The video signal, which is confirm the user input, is routed from the input to the out-
put. Input is set with the routing nucleus 1112. All outputs are enabled.
User Input <vipInput> <VideoOutput> <VideoStandard>
1. vipInput (CVBS, YC, YUV, RGB).
2. VideoOutput (YUV, RGB).
3. VideoStandard (PAL, NTSC).
Example DS:> 1213 CVBS RGB PAL
121300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VideoLoopThroughStop

Nucleus Number 1214
Description Stop routing the video input to all the outputs.
User Input -
Example DS:> 1214
121400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VideoLoop

Nucleus Number 1215
Description Note: Before executing this nucleus the user must route the video signal on the an-
alog board with nucleus DS_ANAB_VideoRouting(1112 ).
User Input Video input of the digital board:
- CVBS
- YC
- YUV
- RGB
- TEST (The video output will be routed to the video input on the digital board.)
Video standard:
- PAL
- NTSC
When no input is given, the nucleus will take TEST for video input and PAL for video
standard.
Example DS:> 1215 cvbs ntsc
121500:
Test OK @
DS:> 1215 cvbs pal
121508: The VideoInputProcessor cannot detect a sync-signal.
Error @
DS:> 1215 yuv ntsc
121511:
Error in luminance signal(Y)
Error in chrominance signal(U)
Error in chrominance signal(V)
Error @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SlashVersionSet

Nucleus Number 1217
Description Set the slash version of the system
User Input The slash version
Example DS:> 1217 82
121700:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SlashVersionGet

Nucleus Number 1218
Description Get the slash version of the system
User Input None
Example DS:> 1218
121800: The slash version is: 82
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_Virginize

Nucleus Number 1219
EN 82 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Description (Re-) Virginize the recorder. User data in the NVRAM of the analogue board is
cleared
Example DS:> 1219
121900:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VirginModeOn

Nucleus Number 1220
Description Turn on the virgin mode functionality (e.g. the auto channel search upon start-up)
User Input None
Example DS:> 1220
122000:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_VirginModeOff

Nucleus Number 1221
Description Turn off the virgin mode functionality (e.g. the auto channel search upon start-up)
User Input None
Example DS:> 1221
122100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DisplayFatalOn

Nucleus Number 1223
Description Turn on the display-fatal functionality which displays debug-information on the dis-
play when encountering a fatal error condition from which could not be recovered au-
tomatically
User Input None
Example DS:> 1223
122300:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DisplayFatalOff

Nucleus Number 1224
Description Turn off the display-fatal functionality which displays debug-information on the dis-
play when encountering a fatal error condition from which could not be recovered au-
tomatically
User Input None
Example DS:> 1224
122400:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_DisplayFatalGet

Nucleus Number 1225
Description Get the display-fatal flag of the recorder
User Input None
Example DS:> 1225
122500:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SettingsSet

Nucleus Number 1226
Description Programs the digital board settings into the boot EEPROM on the digital board.
User Input A large hexadecimal value that represents the digital board settings obtained from
the DbString.exe program or from a reference set.
Example DS:> 1226 646961677473746201010200010101010101000020080000
122600:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SettingsDisplay

Nucleus Number 1228
Description Show the settings that are programmed in the BROM on the digital board.
User Input None.
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 83

Example DS:> 1228

Settings ID: 6D7920626F61726400020300010101020101000020080000
Board name: my board
Hardware ID: 0
Codec IC: PNX7100_MF2
Video Input Processor IC: SAA7118
Progressive Scan Deinterlacer IC: None
Progressive Scan Denc IC: ADV7196
I-Link physical layer circuit IC: PDI1394P25
I-Link link layer circuit IC: PDI1394P40
Audio clock: Clock scheme 1
Bit engine connector: available
IDE connector 1: available
IDE connector 2: not available
PCI connector: not available
RAM size 32MByte
ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 1) 8MByte
ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 2) Not available
ROM size (NAND FLASH) Not available
Bit Engine: AV 2.0
122800:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_SettingsGet

Nucleus Number 1229
Description Get the digital board diversity settings string that is programmed in the BROM on the
digital board.
User Input None.
Example DS:> 1229
122900: 6D7920626F61726400020300010101020101000020080000
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_AudioLoopThroughStart

Nucleus Number 1230
Description Description: The audio input is routed from the an input to all outputs. Input is set with
the routing nucleus 1113. All outputs are enabled.
User Input None.
Example DS:> 1230
123000:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_SYS_AudioLoopThroughStop

Nucleus Number 1231
Description Stop routing the audio input to all the outputs
User Input -
Example DS:> 1231
123100:
Test OK @

Electronic Program Guide Board (EPGB)

Nucleus Name DS_EPGB_VersionGet
Nucleus Number 1300
Description Returns the version of the EPG board.
User Input None
Example DS:> 1300
130000:
Version : 6.1.9
Test OK @

PCMCIA INTERFACE (PCMCIA)

Nucleus Name DS_PCMCIA_Reset
Nucleus Number 1400
Description Reset the PCMCIA device by sending a reset command through IDE
Example DS:> 1400
140000:
Test OK @
EN 84 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Nucleus Name DS_PCMCIA_Inquiry

Nucleus Number 1401
Description Get the vendor- and product identification and the product revision level of the media
in the slot.
Example DS:> 1401
140100:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PCMCIA_WriteRead

Nucleus Number 1402
Description Perform a Write Read test to a random sector on the inserted medium in the PCM-
CIA device and check if the data read is equal to the data written.
Example DS:> 1402
140200:
Test OK @

Nucleus Name DS_PCMCIA_Diagnostics

Nucleus Number 1403
Description Shall perform the internal diagnostic tests implemented by the media in the slot.
Example DS:> 1403
140300:
Test OK @

Script
Nucleus Name DS_IH_ScriptHandler
Nucleus Number Script
Description
Included tests: 1. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC
2. DS_DCB_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC
3. DS_BROM_COMMUNICATION_NUC
4. DS_SYS_SETTINGSDISPLAY_NUC
5. DS_CHR_DEVTYPEGET_NUC
6. DS_CHR_INT_PIC_NUC
7. DS_CHR_DMA_NUC
8. DS_BROM_WRITEREAD_NUC
9. DS_NVRAM_COMMUNICATION_NUC
10. DS_NVRAM_WRITEREAD_NUC
11. DS_SDRAM_WRITEREADFAST_NUC
12. DS_FLASH_WRITEREAD_NUC
13. DS_FLASH_CHECKSUMPROGRAM_NUC
14. DS_SYS_HARDWAREVERSIONGET_NUC
15. DS_VIP_DEVTYPEGET_NUC
16. DS_VIP_COMMUNICATION_NUC
17. DS_DVIO_LINKDEVTYPEGET_NUC
18. DS_DVIO_PHYDEVTYPEGET_NUC
19. DS_DVIO_LINKCOMMUNICATION_NUC
20. DS_DVIO_PHYCOMMUNICATION_NUC
21. DS_PSCAN_COMMUNICATIONDENC_NUC
22. DS_PSCAN_COMMUNICATIONDEINTERLACER_NUC
23. DS_BE_COMMUNICATIONECHO_NUC
24. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICNVRAM_NUC
25. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICTUNER_NUC
26. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICSOUNDPROCESSOR_NUC
27. DS_ANAB_COMMUNICATIONIICAVSELECTOR_NUC
28. DS_ANAB_CHECKSUMPROGRAM_NUC
User Input None
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 85

Example DS:> script

Executing User/Dealer script.
Busy executing NUC1100 1-28
Hello Analogue Board
Busy executing NUC1000 2-28
Busy executing NUC200 3-28
Busy executing NUC1228 4-28
Settings ID: 4C4541440D00000000030300010101020101000020080000
Board name: LEAD
Hardware ID: 0
Codec IC: PNX7100_MF3
Video Input Processor IC: SAA7118
Progressive Scan Deinterlacer IC: None
Progressive Scan Denc IC: ADV7196
I-Link physical layer circuit IC: PDI1394P25
I-Link link layer circuit IC: PDI1394P40
Audio clock: Clock scheme 1
Bit engine connector: available
IDE connector 1: available
IDE connector 2: not available
PCI connector: not available
RAM size 32MByte
ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 1) 8MByte
ROM size (NOR FLASH bank 2) Not available
ROM size (NAND FLASH) Not available
Bit Engine: AV 2.0
Busy executing NUC100 5-28
Device ID 7100
Codec ID PNX7100_MF3
F-BCU (0x0102) 1.0 INTC (0x011d) 1.0 PCI-XIO(0x0113) 1.0
SIF (0x013b) 1.0 EJTAG (0x0104) 0.0 S-BCU (0x0102) 1.0
BOOT (0x010a) 1.0 CONFIG (0x013f) 1.0 RESET (0x0123) 1.0
DEBUG (0x0116) 0.0 UART0 (0x0107) 0.1 UART1 (0x0107) 0.1
UART2 (0x0107) 0.1 UART3 (0x0107) 0.1 I2C0 (0x0105) 0.1
I2C1 (0x0105) 0.1 GPIO (0x013c) 1.0 SYNC (0x013a) 1.0
DISP0 (0xa015) 0.2 DISP1 (0xa00f) 0.0 OSD (0x0136) 0.1
SPU (0xa00e) 0.0 MIXER (0x0137) 1.0 DENC (0x0138) 0.1
CCIR (0x0139) 1.0 VDEC (0x0133) 0.1 PARSER (0xa00d) 0.0
DV (0xa00c) 0.0 BEI (0xa00a) 0.0 IDE (0xa009) 0.0
SGDX (0xa008) 0.0 BYTE (0xa00b) 0.0 OUTPUT (0xa003) 0.0
ACOMP (0xa000) 0.0 VFE (0xa001) 0.0 VCOMP (0xa002) 0.0
SCR (0x0000) 0.0 SIFF (0xa011) 0.0 WMD (0xa010) 0.0
AUDIO0 (0xa015) 0.2 AUDIO1 (0xa00f) 0.0 PSCAN (0xa018) 0.0
Busy executing NUC114 6-28
Busy executing NUC115 7-28
Busy executing NUC201 8-28
Busy executing NUC300 9-28
Busy executing NUC301 10-28
Busy executing NUC401 11-28
Busy executing NUC501 12-28
Busy executing NUC503 13-28
BootCode checksum is: 0xBABEB432, which is correct
Diagnostics checksum is: 0xBABED22B, which is correct
Download checksum is: 0xBABE025F, which is correct
Application checksum is: 0xBABE2825, which is correct
Busy executing NUC1200 14-28
Hardware ID = 00
Busy executing NUC600 15-28
Found SAA7118
 EN 86 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software

Example Busy executing NUC601 16-28

Busy executing NUC700 17-28
Device type of the link layer IC: ffc00301
Busy executing NUC701 18-28
Device type of the phy layer IC: 0
Busy executing NUC702 19-28
Busy executing NUC703 20-28
Busy executing NUC801 21-28
Busy executing NUC808 22-28
The IIC acknowledge was not received, which is correct
Busy executing NUC900 23-28
Busy executing NUC1101 24-28
Busy executing NUC1102 25-28
Busy executing NUC1104 26-28
Busy executing NUC1105 27-28
Busy executing NUC1111 28-28
BootCode checksum is: 0xBABE6240, which is correct
Diagnostics checksum is: 0xBABEDC9A, which is correct
Download checksum is: 0xBABEA6B7, which is correct
Application checksum is: 0xBABE5968, which is correct
PASS
DS:>

5.3.4 Menu Mode Interface Digital Board 1.5, Empress

Activation
Plug the recorder to the mains and the following text will appear
on the screen of the terminal (program):

DVD Video Recorer Diagnostic Software version 48

Basic SDRAM Data bus test passed
Basic SDRAM Address bus test passed
Basic SDRAM Device test passed

(M) enu, (C) ommand or (S) 2B-interface? [M] : @ M

Main Menu

1. Digital Board ->

2. Analogue Board ->
3. Front Panel ->
4. Basic Engine ->
5. DVIO ->
6. Progressive Scan Board ->
7. Loop tests ->
8. Log ->
9. Scripts ->

Select>

Figure 5-12

The first line indicates that the Diagnostic software has been
activated and contains the version number. The next lines are
the successful result of the SDRAM interconnection test and
the basic SDRAM test. The last line allows the user to choose
between the three possible interface forms. If pressing M has
made a choice for Menu Interface, the Main Menu will appear.
 Diagnostic Software DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 5. EN 87

5.4 Nuclei Error Codes

DVIO 1.8 Error Codes

Error Code Id Description Hardware
0 0x00 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_OK No Error
6 0x06 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_UNKNOWN Unknown Error(including UART communication
error)
17 0x11 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_1 Link chip incorrect responding µPD72893, Link
18 0x12 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_2 No link register access or link reset failed µPD72893, Link
23 0x17 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_7 Link reset failed µPD72893, Link
38 0x26 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_16 Expecting no 1394 node with GUID connectivity,
while detecting connection
39 0x27 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_TNF_17 Expecting 1394 node with GUID connectivity, while
not detecting connection
48 0x30 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_UPINTRAM Internal ram problem in address lines µPD78F0988,
A Wrapper
50 0x32 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_UPEXTRA External ram problem in address lines µPD4564163G5,
MA SDRAM
51 0x33 DVIOC_ERR_DDS_UPEXTRA External ram problem in data lines µPD4564163G5,
MD SDRAM
58 0x3A DVIOC_ERR_DDS_ROMCHK Checksum of codespace 0x0000-0x1f80, 0x2000- µPD78F0988,
0xeffd is not correct Wrapper
244 0xF4 DVIOC_ERR_LINK_HWPHY PHY chip not responding(PHY down report received) µPD72852, Phy
245 0xF5 DVIOC_ERR_LINK_HWLINK LINK chip not responding µPD72893, Link
EN 88 5. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 Diagnostic Software
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 89

6. Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

Overall Block Diagram Digital Board 1.5 Empress
ANALOG BOARD INTELLIGENT
CONTROL FAN
12VDC
uP SUB BOARD OPTIONAL

1922
AUDIO L
FRONT 1 1942 P50
AUDIO R
Analog input AFCRI
2
1
3 AFCRI
AFCLI 2
CVBSFIN
4 9 ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO
3
5 AFCLI
CVBS 4
CFIN
7
8
5
CVBSFIN
CLOCK & INPUT/OUTPUT
6

S-VIDEO YFIN
9
7
8SW BACKUP PROCESSING &
DVIO 1.8 1500 +3V3
+5V
8
CFIN
SOURCE
9
+12V
DV_HS_OUT
YFIN
SELECTION AUDIO DIGITAL
WRAPPER VSM_UART1 1986
DV_VS 4
CONTROL FOR DVDR70/75
DV_CLK
IRESET_DIG 1
FRONT VSM_UART2 4 10 uP
Digital Video input 1901
YUV(7:0)
1960 AUDIO L/R
4 DV CODEC 1
ANALOG AUDIO L/R ANA_R
IEEE 1394 PHY LINK AUDIO DAC
4
4

(DATA+CONTROL+PSU)
ANA_L

1501
YUV-YCVBS/C U21 1947
NOT USED IN DVDR70 SDRAM EPG D_CVBS F4712
SCART II
60 BOARD 1/2 12 12
C_Y F4714 AUX-
14 14

CVBS-RGB-Y/C-YUV
FOR DVDR80 D_C F4716
I/O
OSD 16 16
D_R F4718
18 18
INSERTION 20 20
D_G F4720

D-B F4722
22 22
1600
DATA U24
&CONTROL 1601
A_R DATA ACQUISITION
DVD+RW ENGINE AV2 DIGITAL PCB 1.5/1.9 SDRAM 1603
22
20
1
3
A_B OSD GENERATION SCARTI
1402 1100, DIG.VIDEO
18 5
A_G TO TV
A_C
1101 16 7 - I/O
VIDEO MPEG2 MPEG VIDEO F4709 EPG
ENCODING VIDEO INPUT 14 9 A_YCVBS
PROCESSING
AUDIO
5 S2B S2B EMPRESS PROCESSING
VSM 1602 1900
TRAY CONTROL 20
AE_WCLK AE_xCLK

AUDIO ENCODER I2S

BE_FAN MPEG ANAL.VIDEO AE_BCLK

Stream FRONT-END I2S or //

AV
21
18 AE_DATAI ADC
DECODER 3 S-VIDEO
SERVO RESETN_BE Manager + HOST DIG. AUDIO 4
SPDIF
2
(Sti5519) MUTEN
BE_LOADN
7
AD_ACLK AD_ACLK
CVBS
DISC READ
9
AD_xCLK

LASER
11 AD_DATAO AUDIO PCM I2S
2MB 12 AD_WCLK DAC
7 I2S SDRAM 14 AD_BCLK

WRITE EPG BOARD 2/2

FRONT-END I2S EMI BUS 2
DAOUT
FOR DVDR80
SDRAM 1604 YUV

OSD
+4V6E

ANTENNA INPUT
+3V3

+12V

+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
+3V3

+12V

FLASH 4/6MB
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND
+5V

+5V
ION

-5V
-5V

INSERTION
TUNER
1000 1900 RS232 1901 TV OUT

PSU
8

8
6
4
2
1

6
4
2
1

I2C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 GLINK
U25 U26 1943
SERVICE PSU
PSU PSU
IPOR_DC
2 I2C

MAINS
+12Vstby

POR_DC
-Vgnstby

U20 U23
5STBY

AC
SDA
SCL
INT

1933
1 +3V3 MULTI-MODE SOPS
2 +5V
4 2 8 5 3 9 10

ENGINE
GND
1910 3
+4V6E
4
5 GND
IO EXTENSION IR_OUT G LINK IR OUT
6 -5V
2
BOARD

+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
GND
+12V
GND
GND

GND
-5V
GND

+5V
+3V3
7
+12V
G LINK UART
8 GLINK_RXD
GLINK_TXD
Y

POWER
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Cb
COMP. VIDEO
OPEN/CLOSE 1932 DIGITAL PCB OUT
PLAY
STOP 1923 Cr
INFRA RED FRONT PROCESSOR
RECORD
LEFT/RIGHT 1946
EYE TRACK AUDIO DIGITAL
CHANNEL
1920 ONLY FOR
TV GUIDE 2

DISPLAY & CONTROL DAOUT DVDR80 AUDIO OPTICAL

TR 17001_001
2021003
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 90

Overall Block Diagram Digital Board 2.1 Chrysalis

ANALOG BOARD INTELLIGENT FAN
CONTROL
12VDC
FOR IDE
uP SUB BOARD DRIVE
1922 1942
AUDIO L
FRONT 1
1 AFCRI P50
AUDIO R
Analog input AFCRI
2
2
3
3 AFCLI
AFCLI 4
CVBSFIN
4 9 ANALOG AUDIO VIDEO CVBSFIN
5
5
CVBS 6
CFIN
7
8
7
CFIN
8SW
CLOCK & INPUT/OUTPUT
8
S-VIDEO YFIN
9
9
BACKUP PROCESSING &
YFIN
SOURCE
SELECTION AUDIO DIGITAL
UART3: GATEWAY 6 CONTROL FOR DVDR70/75
IRESET_DIG 1
10 uP
DIGITAL PCB CHRYSALIS 2.1 1987
1986 1980 1984 AUDIO L/R
2 2

1104
ONLY FOR SETS WITH DV IN
I2C, INT STBY
1203
Digital Video Input 4 EPG BOARD 1/2 IPOR ION

PHY YUV-YC-CVBS U21 1947

LINK FLASH SCART II
IEEE 1394 12 12
CVBS_OUT_B F4712
Y_OUT_B F4714
AUX-
14 14
I/O

CVBS-RGB-Y/C
C_OUT_B F4716
OSD 16 16
V_OUT_B F4718
18 18
INSERTION 20 20
Y1_OUT_B F4720

U_OUT_B F4722
22 22

PCI BUS U24

FOR AV2 1100 1904
V_IN DATA ACQUISITION
1402 FRONT-END I2S 22 1
U_IN OSD GENERATION
SCARTI
I2S 20 3
Y_IN TO TV
DVD+RW ENGINE AV2/AV3 7 18
16
5
7
C_IN - I/O
S2B UART
S2B DIG.VIDEO 656 VIDEO INPUT 14
F4709
9
EPG
CVBS_Y_IN
PROCESSING
5
PROCESSING ONLY DVDR80
BE_DLOAD
CHRYSALIS PNX7100 1900 1900
TRAY CONTROL RESET_BEn
MPEG 2, AC3 CODEC
ANALOG VIDEO
20
A_WCLK A_xCLK

AUDIO ENCODER I2S

A_BCLK
BE_FAN
DIGITAL AUDIO
21
18 A_DAT ADC
1105
3 S-VIDEO
SERVO DIGITAL AUDIO
4
2 SPDIF
DISC 1600-1
7 MUTEN CVBS
9 AD_ACLK
LASER
READ 40
11 D_DATAO
D_xCLK

AUDIO PCM I2S

ATAPI INTERFACE
12 D_WCLK DAC
1102 14 D_BCLK
FOR AV3 I2C I2C EPG BOARD 2/2
WRITE DAOUT
2

DATA BOOT USRDATA 1901

YUV ONLY DVDR80
SDRAM
&CONTROL EEPROM EEPROM
OSD
+4V6E

INSERTION
+12V

+3V3

+12V

+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
+3V3

+12V
GND
GND

GND

GND

GND

GND

GND
GND

GND
+5V

+5V

+5V
ION

-5V
-5V

1600-2
1500 RS232 1103

GLINK

PSU
I2C
8

8
6
4
2
1

6
4
2
1

56 55 54 53 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
U25 U26 IPOR, INT ANTENNA INPUT
1000 SERVICE PSU
FOR AV3 FOR AV2 PSU
IPOR_DC I2C TUNER
PSU PSU 3 I2C, INT TV OUT
ION STBY
1943
U23
+12Vstby

POR_DC

U22
-Vgnstby
5STBY

MAINS
SDA
SCL

1933
INT

DISPLAY & CONTROL FOR IDE DRIVE

1
2
+3V3
+5V MULTI-MODE SOPS AC
4 2 8 5 3 9 10
GND
1910 1934 3
4V6

ENGINE
4

ENGINE
4 +5V 5 GND
IO EXTENSION G LINK IR OUT
3 GND 6 -5V 3 G LINK UART
BOARD IR_OUT

+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
GND
+12V
GND
GND

GND
-5V
GND

+5V
+3V3
2 GND 7 GLINK_RXD
1 +12V 8 +12V GLINK_TXD

Y
FOR
COMP. VIDEO
POWER AV2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Cb
OPEN/CLOSE OUT
1932 DIGITAL PCB
PLAY Cr
STOP 1923
INFRA RED FRONT PROCESSOR
RECORD
LEFT/RIGHT 1946
EYE TRACK AUDIO DIGITAL
CHANNEL
1920 ONLY FOR
TV GUIDE 2
DAOUT DVDR80 AUDIO OPTICAL

A_YCVBS F4709 D_CVBS F4712 D_Y F4714 D_C F4716 D_R F4718 D_G F4720 D_B F4722 AD_WCLK; AE_WCLK AD_BCLK; AE_BCLK AD_ACLK

TR 10002_001
050503
A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div 2V / div AC 10us / div 2V / div AC 200ns / div 2V / div AC 50ns / div
A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div
10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 91

Control Block Diagram Analog Board, uP Board

DVIO-Board Digital Board Basic Engine

DVIO Digital Board WE BE_FAN

BE

FBIN
I2S
P-Subprint 8

BE_FAN Sense 3V3STBY

A0-A7 A0-A7 WE
5
A_DATA Fan_off Fan
D_DATA ext. Latch ext. RAM ext. Flash P50 Reset-IC
A_RDY
Control
D_RDY 2 2

AD0-AD7

AD0-AD7

AD0-AD7
IRESET_DIG P50in

A8-A16

A8-A19
P50out IPOR

LEVELSW INT
only

Central- P
Reset
2 INT, IPOR_DC
int. RAM int. ROM
TMP91CW12AF (3,3V Supply)
I2C I2C 3,3V KILL
>
IPFAIL
Level =1
Shifter

FOME
5

AKILL
5 FBIN

2
Analog Board

I2C 5V

I2C
SWITCH I2C_SW 2
5SW

8
PSS
I2C_SW

I2C_SW
I2C_SW
IPFAIL

PWONSW SB1
I2S

SFS_TS
AFC
5 AGC

ADC/DAC Frontend Frontend DataSlicer

(UDA1334BTS Video Audio (STV5348)
UDA1361TS) SIF1 (MSP)

WU
I2C_SW (for NAFTA only)

WSFI RSA1
RSA2 Follow Me
ASC1M for EUROPE only

5 FBIN
2
P50
8SC2

STBY
EEPROM IO IO ION
Video 3 Audio 2 Power
(M24C16) I2C I2C
VSA1 Supply
( for EUROPE (STV6618) VSA2
(HEF IC’S)
only) ASC1S
For EUROPE only
AKILL
Display Control Board

2 I2C
Front P
2 Display
INT
TMP87CH74F
IPOR_DC

TR 01019_001
130502
 2000-03-10
A
1930

9
8
7
5
6
4
3
2
1

15

20
19
18
17
16
14
13
10

22
12

23

29
28
27
26
25

30
24
21
11
TRAY_LED 1 1 mm

1402
+12VSTBY 2

TRAY_LED2
TRAY_LED1
+12VSTBY

10us/Div
3

V4
K1

N.C.
N.C.

TXD
RXD

CPR

SUR
GND

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

GND

GND
GND
4

GND

GND
GND

GND
BCLK

AIRQ
GND

3
2
1
FLAG
SYNC

GND
WCLK

A_YCVBS F4709
DLOAD

A:DC, 500mV/Div
2 mm
1931
JST DA

JST DA
IISDATA0
IISDATA1

ARESETN

KEYPRINT
2 mm
Wiring Diagram

A:: DC,
8023 .... 3103 601 0017.

10us/Div
1940

D_CVBS F4712
TRAY_LED1 1

, 200mV/Div
IOE

+12VSTBY 2

left
TRAY_LED2 3
(1005)

JST DA
2 mm

TRAY_LED2
+12VSTBY

Traylight
2
1
1941

JST DA
2 mm

A:
: DC,
(1007)

10us/Div
BASIC ENGINE

D_Y F4714
8022 .... 3103 601 0016.

, 200mV/Div
8024 .... 3103 601 0018.
DVDR 80

1950
DVDR 75 APAC

10us/Div
DVDR 80

TRAY_LED2
2

D_C F4716
DVDR 80 EUROPE

+12VSTBY

right

A: DC, 200mV/Div
JST DA
Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram.

2 mm

Traylight
GLINK_TXD
GLINK_RXD

IR_OUT
DAINCOAX
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA
GNDA

DAINOPT
Y

DAOUT
N.C.
V

GNDD
U

GND
5V

GND
GND
GND

3V3
4V6
12V

-5V

5V
5
6

4
5
6

2
3
7

4
1
2
3

1
2
3
1

3
4
6
7
8

2
1
1921
2 mm

1923 1920
1901
D
D
D

8012 .... 3103 601 0040.

10us/Div
1911

D_R F4718
TRAY_LED 1 8020 .... 3103 601 0037.

A: DC, 200mV/Div
+12VSTBY 2
K1 3
GND 4
8026 .... 3103 601 0043.
JST DA
2 mm 1603 22
GNDD 8001 .... 3103 601 0019.
1 mm

6 AE_BCLK 21
1 mm

N.C.
5 AE_WCLK 20 8010 .... 3103 601 0028.
5V
4 GNDD 19
DAINOPT
3 AE_DATA1 18
DAINCOAX 8011 .... 3103 601 0029.
2 GNDD 17
DAOUT
GNDD 1 AE_ACLK 16
GNDD 15 GND 22
A

14
1943

10us/Div
AD_BCLK DAOUT 21

D_G F4720
GNDD 13 N.C. 20 TEMP_SENSE 10
12 9

A: DC, 200mV/Div
1 mm

AD_WCLK N.C. 19 VGNSTBY

DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

8019 .... 3103 601 0036. AD_DATA0 11 N.C. 18 POR_DC 8

GNDD 10 N.C. 17 7
12VSTBY
D

AD_ACLK 9 D_IKILL 16 6

0
INT

3UH000
GNDD 8 GND 15 GND 5
6
5 MUTEN 7 D_PCMCLK 14 GND 4
4
1
2

** +3V3 6 13 5VSTBY 3
A

1201

3 GND
2 ** +5V 5 D_DATA0 12 SDA 2
1
6.

N.C. 4 D_WCLK 11 SCL 1

1800
LED-

1200 3
LED+

N.C. GND 10
1951

A A

2
A

AD_SPDIF33 D_BCLK 9

CONTROL-PANEL
GNDD 7
GNDD 1 8
DAC-B 6 GND
1 mm

GNDD 5 A_PCMCLK 7
1922 1602 4 6

10us/Div
D

DAC-C GND
1 AFCRI_FC GNDD 3 A_DAT 5

D_B F4722
2 GND_FC 2 GND 4

A: DC, 200mV/Div
1600 DAC-A/Y
AFCLI_FC 1 A_WCLK 3 1986
1

3
3
2

9
8
7
5

GNDD
6
4

10
1 mm

4 CVBSFIN_FC A_BCLK 2
DVIO

IRESET_DIG 10
(1003)

8009 .... 3103 601 0027.

5 GND_FC 9 1
1 mm

VSM_UAR T1_RX GND

1 mm

1501
8SW_FC 8
A
WE

6 VSM_UAR T1_TX
N.C.

1
EN 92

FBIN

7 CFIN_FC VOR VSM_UAR T1_CTSn 7 1900

GNDD

2
A_RDY
D_RDY

GND
BE_FAN

GND_FC 6
A_DATA
D_DATA

8 VSM_UAR T1_RTSn
GND 3
9 YFIN_FC ION 5
IRESET_DIG

VOL 4
4
D

1910 ANA_WE 8004 .... 3103 601 0022.

BE_FAN 3

2 mm
JST-KR
SCL 10 VIP_FB 2
9

1 mm
SDA GNDD 1

A
5VSTBY 8
GND 7
GND 6
INT 5 1101 V_IN 22

A
12VSTBY 4
1 mm

GNDD 21
POR_DC 3
U_IN 20
VGNSTBY 2
GNDD 19
TEMP_SENSE 1
Y_IN 18
GNDD 17
C_IN 16 1946

18
GNDD 15 7
GND
A

CVBS_Y_IN 14
Y 6
1 mm

GNDD 13
1933
GND 5
A

GNDD 12 3V3 1
8018 .... 3103 601 0035. U 4

10
CVBS_OUT_B 11 2
8002 .... 3103 601 0020.

5V GND 3
GNDD 10 GND 3 2
V
A

Y_OUT_B 9 4V6 4 1
GND
GNDD 8 GND 5
8007 .... 3103 601 0025.

C_OUT_B 7 5N 6
GNDD 6 GND 7
(1002)

R_OUT_B 5 12V 8
GNDD 4
3
IISDATA0
IISDATA1

BCLK

G_OUT_B
SYNC

WCLK
FLAG
N.C.
GND

GND
GND
GND
GND
GND

130
GND

GND
JST-KR
2 mm

2
DIGITAL BOARD

GNDD 1960
B_OUT_B 1
1
1101

DVAR
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11
10
12
13
14
15

1 mm
1601 GND 2
BCLK_CTL_SERVICE

GND 3
A
For DV-IN

RTS1P

4
CTS1P

ARESETN

DVAL
N.C.
RX1P

GNDD
GNDD
GNDD
GNDD
TX1P

ION

+3V3
+3V3
+3V3
GNDD

-5V

+5V

+3V3

DLOAD
+5V

RXD

CPR
AIRQ
SUR
TXD

GND
GND
GND
V4

GND
N.C.
GND

GND
8014 .... 3103 601 0020.

8006 .... 3103 601 0024.

8015 .... 3103 601 0032.
8016 .... 3103 601 0033.

8003 .... 3103 601 0021.

1
5

3
4
6
7
8
9

2
11
10
12
6
5

3
2
4
7

2
SERVICE
JST-KR

1900

1100
2 mm

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1901

11
10
12
13
14
15

1 mm 2 mm JST-KR 2 mm JST-KR

DV IN
A

1101 8008 .... 3103 601 0006.

8005 .... 3103 601 0023.

8017 .... 3103 601 0034.
1944

1941 D_B 22
1940
1 mm

22 GND 21
TEMP_SENSE 10 D_B 1970
F4722

D_G 20
1 mm

TEMP_SENSE 10 9 GND 21
1 mm

VGNSTBY GND 4 19
9 20 GND
1 mm

VGNSTBY POR_DC 8 D_G

1 mm
F4720

POR_DC 8 19 GLINK_RXD_CHAS 3 D_R 18

12VSTBY 7 GND
7 18 GLINK_TXD_CHAS 2 GND 17
12VSTBY INT 6 D_R
F4718

6 17 IR_OUT_CHAS 1 D_C 16
INT GND 5 GND
5 16 GND 15
1949

GND GND 4 D_C

F4716

D_Y 14
D

GND 4 3 15
D

5VSTBY GND
13
A

5VSTBY 3 2 D_Y 14 GND

SDA
8021 .... 3103 601 0038.

D_CVBS 12
F4714

SDA 2 1 GND 13
SCL 11
SCL 1 D_CVBS 12 GND
F4712

11 GND 10
GND 1
AINFR A_YCVBS 9
A

GND 10
2
9
GND GND 8
D

A_YCVBS 3
F4709

8
AINFL A_C 7
GND 4
1941

7
CVBSFIN GND 6
A_C 5
6
1950 GND A_G 5
GND 6
N.C. GND 4
A_G 5 GND 7 7
4
CFINI A_B 3
GND Y 6 8
1 mm

GND GND 2
A_B 3 GND 5
YFIN 9 A_R 1
GND 2 U 4
A_R 1 GND 3 1942
A

V 2
1947
FFC-Cable

1952 GND 1
2 mm
1948

JST-KR

EPG

Cable Tree assy

B_OUT_B 22
(1006)
1 mm

GNDD 21
G_OUT_B 20
GNDD 19
R_OUT_B 18
GNDD 17
C_OUT_B 16
GNDD 15 1932
Y_OUT_B 14 1953 TUNER
1
D

13 3V3
GNDD 7 2
CVBS_OUT_B 12
GND 3V3 SPLITTER
V 6 3V3 3
FFC-Cable only for DVDR 70/75
1 mm

GNDD 11
GND 5 3V3 4
GNDD 10
U 4 GND 5
CVBS_Y_IN 9
GND 3 12V 6
A

GNDD 8
Y 2 GND 7
C_IN 7
GND 1 GND 8
GNDD 6
5V 9
Y_IN 5
ION 10
GNDD 4
GND 11
U_IN 3
5N 12
GNDD 2

V_IN 1
JST-KR
2 mm
1951
(1001)

8013 .... 3103 601 0031.

ANALOG BOARD

110303
TR 06005_002
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 93

Waveforms

Waveforms Analog Board

Waveforms Display Board
7106/7108-Emitter IC7103-19 IC7103-8 F327 VDrain (Standby) F327 VDrain (no disc loaded) I324 VGate (Standby) I324 VGate (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10us/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div, 10us/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div, 100ns/Div

A: DC, 100V/Div A: DC, 100V/Div A: DC, 1V/Div A: DC, 2V/Div
5us/Div 2us/Div 5us/Div 2us/Div

I324 VSource (Standby) F723 VFV I723 E465 E461 E462 E463
I324 VSource (no disc loaded)

A: DC, 50mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div
A: DC, 50mV/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
5us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
2us/Div

A_CVBS I405 D_CVBS F4712 D_Y F4714 D_C F4716 D_R F4718 D_G F4720 D_B F4722

A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div
A: DC, 200mV/Div
10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
10us/Div

I502/I504 I517/I518 F501/F502 I014/I032 ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011 I623 SYNC F843

A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div
500us/Div 500us/Div 500us/Div 500us/Div 500us/Div 500us/Div 10us/Div

A_CVBS F8008 I818

I994 I989

TR 070018_001
200303
A: DC, 1 V/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div
A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div 20ns/Div 10us/Div
10 /Di 20us/Div
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 94

Waveforms Digital Board 1.5 Waveforms Digital Board 1.5

AD_WCLK; AE_WCLK AD_BCLK; AE_BCLK AD_ACLK
Sysclk_VSM Sysclk_5505

2V / div AC 10us / div 2V / div AC 200ns / div 2V / div AC 50ns / div

2V / div DC 20ns / div 2V / div DC 20ns / div

AD_DATAO; AE_DATAO; AE_DATAI AD_SPDIF I401 VIP_VS

27M_clk_PS acc_aclk_pll

2V / div AC 5us / div 2V / div AC 250ns / div 2V / div DC 5ms / div

R_OUT G_OUT B_OUT

2V / div DC 20ns / div 2V / div DC 50ns / div

EMI_PROCCLK DSP_clk
200mV / div AC 20us / div 200mV / div AC 20us / div 200mV / div AC 20us / div

CVBS_OUT Y_OUT C_OUT

2V / div DC 10ns / div 2V / div DC 10ms / div

200mV / div AC 20us / div 200mV / div AC 20us / div 200mV / div AC 20us / div
VIP_ICLK VSM_M_CLK

VSYNC HSYNC

2V / div DC 20ns / div 2V / div DC 20ns / div

CL 16532145_053.eps
031201
CL 16532145_054.eps
2V / div DC 20ms / div 2V / div DC 20ms / div 031201
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 95

Waveforms Digital Board 1.5 Waveforms DVIO

DAC-B DAC-A/Y Cr-signal F410 F411 F400/F401

500mV / div AC 10us / div 500mV / div AC 10us / div 500mV / div AC 10us / div
A:DC, 1V/Div, 20ns/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 20ns/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 20us/Div

DAC-C HS_IN VSOUT F800 F801 F527

500mV / div AC 10us / div 2V / div DC 20us / div 2V / div DC 10ms / div A:DC, 500mV/Div , 50ns/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 500ns/Div A:DC, 2V/Div
, 20ns/Div

FRAME_IN VS_IN YUV_IN F529 F551 F552

2V / div DC 10ms / div 2V / div DC 10ms / div 2V / div DC 10ms / div A:DC, 1V/Div, 20ns/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 200ns/Div A:DC
, 1V/Div
, 5us/Div

F536 F603 F610

Y-signal Cb-signal HSOUT

500mV / div AC 10us / div 500mV / div AC 10us / div 2V / div DC 10us / div A:DC, 1V/Div, 5us/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 20ns/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 20ns/Div

F609 F620
Y_OUT; Cr_OUT; Cb_OUT

TR 06055_001
110203
CL 16532145_055.eps
A:DC, 1V/Div, 200Us/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 10ns/Div
2V / div DC 20us /div 031201
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 96

Waveforms Digital Board Chrysalis 2.1

IC7703 pin 34 IC7703 pin 36 HS_IN Y 1704-2 PB 1704-4 PR 1704-6

0V
A: DC, 200mV/Div, 5us/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div, 5us/Div A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10us/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div
A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div
10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
IC7402 pin 3, F405 IC7200 pin 60, F203 X1001 A_YCVBS 1904-14 D_YCVBS 1904-11 D_Y 1904-9

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 50ns/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div, 2us/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div
10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div

IC7501 pin 5 IC7501 pin 6 IC7703 pin 25 D_C 1904-7 D_VR 1904-5 D_YG 1904-3

A: DC, 2 V/Div, 1us/Div A: DC, 2 V/Div, 1us/Div A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10ns/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div
10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
VS_IN 1704-2, F1702 IC7703 pin 32 D_UB 1904-1

TR 09014_001
A: DC, 1 V/Div, 5ms/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div, 5us/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div, 5us/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div 220403

10us/Div
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 97

Test points overview Analog Board

F0001 A10 F301 A3 F321 C3 F343 A2 F363 A2 F4205 C6 F5102 A5 F5216 C8 I004 C10 I036 A9 I319 C3 I339 A2 I361 A2 I429 A9 I454 A9 I481 B6 I507 A9 I611 B7 I528 B7 I707 B4 I732 A3 I956 B9
F0002 C10 F302 A4 F322 C4 F344 C9 F364 A3 F4207 C6 F5103 A5 F5219 A4 I005 B10 I300 A1 I320 C3 I340 C1 I402 A6 I431 A7 I456 B6 I482 B6 I508 A7 I612 B7 I529 A8 I708 B4 I733 A3 I957 B9
F0003 C10 F304 B1 F323 B1 F346 A2 F366 B2 F4209 C6 F5106 A5 F5220 A4 I006 B9 I301 A3 I321 B1 I341 A5 I405 A10 I433 A7 I457 B5 I483 B5 I509 A8 I613 C7 I530 A8 I709 B4 I734 A3 I958 B9
F0005 C10 F305 B2 F324 B3 F347 C8 F367 B2 F4210 B5 F5108 A5 F6001 C6 I007 B10 I303 B2 I322 B1 I342 A2 I406 A4 I434 A7 I458 A5 I484 A5 I510 A8 I614 B7 I531 A8 I711 C4 I735 A3 I959 B9
F0007 C10 F306 A1 F325 A9 F348 C8 F368 B2 F4505 A9 F5110 A5 F6002 C10 I008 B9 I304 B3 I323 A3 I343 C1 I407 A4 I437 A6 I459 A5 I485 A7 I511 A8 I615 B7 I532 A7 I712 B4 I739 B4 I987 A10
F0009 C10 F307 B1 F326 B2 F349 C3 F369 B2 F4707 A6 F5113 A4 F6004 C6 I009 B9 I305 B3 I324 B1 I344 C2 I408 A4 I438 B6 I460 A5 I486 A6 I513 B7 I616 B7 I533 A8 I713 C4 I741 B3 I988 A10
I742 B3 D_R F4718 D_G F4720 D_B F4722
F0010 C9 F308 A2 F328 B1 F350 C3 F371 A3 F4712 B6 F5116 A5 F701 A3 I013 B9 I306 A1 I325 B1 I345 A2 I409 A4 I439 A6 I461 A4 I487 A9 I514 C6 I617 B7 I534 A7 I715 A9 I989 A10
F0011 C10 F309 A2 F329 B1 F351 A3 F372 A3 F4714 B6 F5119 A4 F702 B4 I014 B10 I307 C1 I326 A2 I346 A3 I411 B6 I440 A6 I462 A4 I488 A9 I515 B7 I620 B6 I535 A7 I716 A10 I743 B4 I990 A10
F0012 C10 F310 A2 F331 A3 F352 C8 F373 B3 F4716 B6 F5120 A4 F703 A3 I015 B9 I308 B2 I327 B2 I347 B7 I412 B6 I441 A6 I463 A4 I489 A9 I516 B7 I621 B6 I539 A8 I717 B4 I744 B4 I991 A10
F0014 C10 F311 A2 F333 A3 F353 C8 F374 B3 F4718 B6 F5201 A5 F704 A3 I018 B10 I309 B3 I329 A2 I348 C1 I413 C5 I442 B7 I464 A4 I490 A10 I517 B8 I623 B6 I540 A8 I721 C4 I745 B4 I992 A10
F0016 C10 F312 B1 F334 A2 F354 A2 F381 C8 F4720 B6 F5202 A5 F707 A3 I019 B10 I310 C2 I330 C1 I349 B7 I414 A5 I443 A7 I465 A4 I491 A10 I518 B8 I624 B7 I601 B6 I723 C7 I746 B4 I993 A10
F0021 A10 F313 A1 F335 A2 F355 C3 F382 C9 F4721 A6 F5203 A5 F708 B5 I020 A9 I311 B1 I331 C1 I350 C2 I415 C6 I444 A6 I466 B5 I492 A9 I519 A8 I625 B7 I602 C8 I724 C5 I748 B4 I994 A10
F006 C9 F314 A1 F336 A2 F356 C3 F383 C8 F4722 B6 F5206 A5 F709 B4 I021 B9 I312 B1 I332 B2 I351 C2 I416 B5 I445 A6 I467 A6 I493 A9 I520 A8 I630 C6 I603 B6 I725 C5 I749 C4 I995 A10
F007 C8 F315 C1 F337 A2 F357 C3 F384 C8 F485 A6 F5207 A5 F710 B3 I022 C9 I313 B3 I333 A3 I352 B7 I417 B5 I446 B6 I468 B6 I501 A8 I521 A4 I631 C6 I604 B6 I726 B4 I751 C5 I996 A9
F008 C9 F316 C2 F338 B1 F358 C6 F401 A9 F499 A4 F5208 A5 F713 C7 I023 B10 I314 A1 I334 A2 I353 A3 I418 C4 I447 B6 I469 B5 I502 B8 I523 A7 I701 A3 I605 B7 I727 B4 I754 C4 I997 A10
F009 C9 F317 C4 F339 B1 F359 C8 F4102 A9 F501 A7 F5210 A5 F913 B5 I029 C10 I315 B3 I335 C1 I354 A3 I419 C9 I448 A7 I470 B5 I503 A8 I524 A7 I702 B4 I607 B4 I728 B4 I951 C9 I998 A10
F010 A10 F318 C2 F340 A2 F360 C3 F4103 A9 F502 A7 F5211 A5 F950 C9 I030 B9 I316 A1 I336 B2 I355 C2 I420 C9 I449 A6 I476 A5 I504 B8 I525 B9 I703 B4 I608 C7 I729 B4 I952 B9 I999 A10 A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div
F011 B10 F319 C2 F341 B3 F361 C2 F412 A8 F504 A3 F5213 A4 I001 C10 I031 C10 I317 A1 I337 A3 I356 A2 I424 A4 I451 A6 I478 B6 I505 C5 I526 B9 I704 B4 I609 B6 I730 B4 I954 B9 10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
F300 A3 F320 C1 F342 C1 F362 A2 F4203 C5 F5101 A5 F5215 A5 I002 B10 I032 B10 I318 C3 I338 A3 I357 A2 I428 A7 I453 A9 I479 B5 I506 B5 I527 B6 I706 B3 I610 B7 I731 C4 I955 B9

ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011 I623 SYNC F843

A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div

500us/Div 500us/Div 10us/Div

A_CVBS I405 D_CVBS F4712 D_Y F4714

A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div

A: DC, 200mV/Div
10us/Div 10us/Div
10us/Div

I502/I504 I517/I518 F501/F502

A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div

500us/Div 500us/Div 500us/Div

A_CVBS F8008 I818

I994

TR 07002_001 A: DC, 1 V/Div

200303 A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div 20ns/Div
10us/Div 20us/Div

F327 VDrain (Standby) F327 VDrain (no disc loaded) I324 VGate (Standby) I324 VGate (no disc loaded) I324 VSource (Standby) F723 VFV I723 E465 E461 E462 E463 D_C F4716 I014/I032
I324 VSource (no disc loaded)
I989

A: DC, 100V/Div A: DC, 100V/Div A: DC, 1V/Div A: DC, 2V/Div A: DC, 50mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 200mV/Div
A: DC, 50mV/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div
5us/Div 2us/Div 5us/Div 2us/Div 5us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div 10us/Div 500us/Div 10us/Div
2us/Div
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 98

Test points overview UP Sub Board

F8001 C3 F831 C1 F8610 C3 I808 A3

F8002 C3 F832 A2 F8701 A1 I809 C1
F8003 C3 F833 C1 F8702 A3 I810 B3
F8004 C3 F834 A1 F8703 A3 I811 A3
F8005 C3 F835 C1 F8704 A3 I812 A2
F8006 C3 F836 C1 F8705 A3 I813 A1
F8007 C2 F837 A2 F8706 A3 I814 B3
F8008 C2 F838 A2 F8707 A3 I815 A3
F801 A3 F839 C2 F8708 A3 I816 A1
F802 A2 F840 A2 F8802 C2 I817 C1
F803 A1 F8401 A2 F8803 C2 I818 B1
F804 B3 F8402 A2 F8804 C2 I819 C1
F805 B3 F8403 A2 F8805 C2 I820 C1
F807 B3 F8406 A2 F8806 C2 I821 B3
F812 C2 F8407 A1 F8807 C2 I822 B3
F813 C2 F841 C2 F8808 C1 I823 A2
F814 C2 F842 C2 F901 A1 I824 A2
F815 C2 F843 B1 F902 A3 I825 C2
F816 C2 F844 A2 F903 A1 I903 B1
F817 C1 F845 A2 F904 A1 I904 B1
F818 C1 F846 A1 F905 A2 I905 B1
F819 A3 F847 B1 F906 A1 I906 B1
F820 B3 F848 A3 F907 B1 I907 C1
F821 A3 F849 A3 F908 A1 I908 B1
F822 B3 F850 B3 F909 B1
F823 A3 F851 B3 F910 B1
F824 B3 F852 C2 I801 C2
F825 A3 F8603 C1 I802 C3
F826 A3 F8604 A3 I803 C2
F827 A2 F8606 C3 I804 B2
F828 A2 F8607 C3 I805 A3
F829 A2 F8608 C3 I806 A3
F830 A2 F8609 C3 I807 A3

TR 06058_001
250203
 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 99

Test points overview DIVIO Board

 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 100

Test points overview Digital Board 1.5

+3V3 Resetn_BE Resetn +3V3 +3V3 +12V +3V3 +5V Resetn_VE -5V

+3V3

+3V3 Sysclk_Empress
EMI_PROCCLK
Sysclk_ProgScan

AE_DATAO

ACC_ACLK_OSC
Sysclk_VSM_5508

+3V3
VSYNC

HSYNC VE_DSn
VE_DTACKn

+3V3
+3V3 ACC_ACLK_PLL

+3V3
Mute

VIP_ICLK

+3V3

CL 16532145_034.eps
VSOUT HSOUT DAC-A/Y DAC-C Cr Cb Y +5V +5V +3V3 +3V3 +3V3 +3V3 101201

DAC-B Reset_DVIO +3V3 +3V3 +3V3

 Block Diagrams, Waveforms, Wiring Diagram. DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 6. EN 101

Layout Digital Board (Mapping Testlands )

F214 A3 I175 A3 I300 A2 I610 A5 I720 B3 I880 C3
F247 A2 I176 A3 I301 A2 I611 B5 I721 B2 I881 C3
F248 A2 I177 A3 I302 A2 I612 A5 I722 B3 I882 C3
F249 A2 I178 A3 I303 B2 I613 B5 I723 B2 I883 C2
F250 A2 I179 A3 I304 B3 I614 A5 I724 B2 I884 C2
F264 A2 I180 A3 I305 B3 I615 B5 I725 B3 I900 B4
F265 A3 I181 A3 I306 A3 I616 A5 I726 B2 I901 B4
F931 A4 I182 B3 I307 B3 I617 A5 I727 B2 I902 B4
F932 A4 I183 A2 I308 A3 I618 C4 I728 A1 I903 B4
F933 A5 I184 A3 I309 B3 I619 A5 I729 A1 I904 B2
F934 A4 I186 A3 I400 A4 I621 A1 I730 A1 I905 A4
F935 A4 I187 A3 I401 A4 I622 A1 I731 A1 I906 A4
I100 A4 I188 A3 I402 B4 I623 A1 I732 B2 I907 A4
I101 C5 I200 A2 I403 A4 I624 A1 I733 B2 I908 A5
I102 C5 I201 B3 I404 B4 I625 A1 I734 B1 I909 B4
I103 B4 I202 A5 I405 B4 I626 A1 I735 B1 I911 B3
I104 B4 I203 A3 I406 B4 I627 B4 I800 C4 I912 A3
I105 B3 I204 C3 I407 A4 I628 C4 I801 C3 I913 B3
I106 B3 I205 A2 I408 A5 I629 A5 I802 C3 I915 B3
I107 B3 I206 A4 I409 A4 I630 C4 I803 C3 I916 B3
I108 B3 I207 A2 I410 A4 I631 C4 I805 C3 I917 B3
I109 B4 I208 B3 I412 B4 I632 C4 I806 C3 I918 A5
I110 B3 I209 B4 I413 A4 I633 B4 I807 C3 I919 B3
I111 A2 I210 A2 I414 B4 I634 C4 I808 C2 I920 B3
I112 B5 I211 A2 I415 B4 I635 C5 I809 C2 I921 A5
I113 B5 I212 A2 I416 B4 I636 C4 I810 C3 I922 A5
I114 B5 I213 A2 I500 C5 I637 C5 I811 C3 I923 B3
I115 B5 I215 B5 I501 C5 I638 C5 I812 C2 I924 A4
I116 C3 I216 A1 I502 C5 I639 C5 I813 C2 I925 B3
I117 C3 I217 A2 I503 C5 I640 C5 I814 C1 I926 A5
I118 C4 I218 A2 I504 C5 I641 B5 I815 B2 I927 A5
I119 C4 I219 A1 I505 C5 I642 A5 I816 B2 I928 A5
I120 A4 I220 A1 I506 C5 I643 A5 I817 B2 I930 B3
I121 A3 I221 B2 I507 C5 I644 A5 I818 C2 I931 A5
I122 B3 I222 B2 I508 C5 I645 B5 I819 C3 I932 B2
I123 A2 I223 A2 I509 C5 I646 C4 I820 C3 I933 B3
I124 B4 I224 A1 I510 B5 I647 A5 I821 C3
I125 A2 I225 A2 I511 C4 I649 C5 I822 C3
I126 A3 I226 A2 I512 C5 I650 B4 I823 C3
I127 A2 I227 A2 I513 B5 I651 B5 I824 B2
I128 A4 I228 A2 I514 B4 I652 B5 I825 B2
I129 A2 I229 B5 I515 C5 I653 B5 I826 C3
I130 B3 I230 A2 I516 C5 I654 B4 I827 C3
I131 A3 I231 A2 I517 C5 I655 B4 I828 C3
I132 B1 I232 A2 I518 C4 I656 B5 I829 C3
I133 A3 I233 A2 I519 C5 I657 C4 I830 C3
I134 A3 I234 A4 I520 C4 I658 C4 I831 C3
I136 A3 I235 A4 I521 C4 I659 C3 I832 C3
I137 A2 I236 B4 I522 C4 I660 B5 I833 C3
I138 A3 I237 A2 I523 C4 I661 B5 I834 B3
I140 A3 I238 A2 I524 C4 I662 C5 I835 B3
I141 A4 I239 B5 I525 C5 I663 B4 I836 B2
I142 A3 I240 A4 I526 C5 I664 B5 I837 C3
I143 B4 I241 B2 I527 C5 I665 C4 I838 C3
I145 A3 I242 B1 I528 C4 I666 C5 I839 C3
I147 B4 I243 B1 I529 C5 I667 B5 I840 C3
I149 B3 I244 A2 I530 C5 I668 B4 I841 C3
I152 B3 I245 A1 I531 C5 I669 B4 I842 C3
I153 B5 I246 A2 I532 C5 I670 A5 I843 C2
I154 B3 I251 A1 I533 C4 I671 B5 I844 C2
I155 B3 I252 A2 I535 C5 I700 B2 I845 C2
I156 A3 I253 A2 I536 C4 I701 B1 I846 B3
I157 A3 I254 A1 I537 C5 I702 B1 I847 B2
I158 B4 I255 A1 I538 C4 I703 C2 I848 B2
I159 A5 I256 A2 I540 C5 I704 C2 I849 B2
I160 B3 I257 C5 I543 C5 I705 C2 I850 B2
I161 B3 I258 A2 I551 C5 I706 C2 I851 B1
I162 C4 I259 A2 I552 C4 I707 C2 I852 B1
I163 A3 I260 A1 I553 C4 I708 C2 I868 C2
I164 B4 I261 A1 I555 C4 I709 C1 I869 C2
I165 A3 I262 A1 I600 A5 I710 B3 I870 B2
I166 B4 I263 A1 I601 A5 I711 C2 I871 C3
I167 A3 I264 A2 I602 A5 I712 C2 I872 C3
I168 C5 I265 B5 I603 C5 I713 A1 I873 B2
I169 A3 I266 A2 I604 A5 I714 C2 I874 C2
I170 A3 I267 A2 I605 A5 I715 C2 I875 C2
I171 A3 I268 B2 I606 A5 I716 B3 I876 C3
I172 A3 I269 B2 I607 A5 I717 B3 I877 C2
I173 A3 I270 A2 I608 A5 I718 B3 I878 C3
I174 A3 I271 B1 I609 B5 I719 B3 I879 C3
CL 16532145-34m.eps
101201
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 102

7. Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

Display Panel
0005 A4 7100 A5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 0206 C11 7101 B13
0210 I1 7102 D13
0211 C1 7103 E11

FIL1
1110 D9 7104 F4
1111 A1 7105 C3

P27

P26

P25

P24

P23

P22

P21

P20

P19

P18

P17

P16

P15

P14

P1

P2

P3

P4

P5

P6

P7

P8

P9

P10

P11

P12

P13

G1

G2

G3

G4

G5

G6

G7

G8

G9
1160 I7 7106 E7
FIL2 1161 I8 7107 F9

I177
1162 I5 7108 F7
not used 1163 I3 7109 E8

I178
7100 1164 I2 7110 E2
1111 BJ900GNK
+12VSTBY 1165 I6 7112 C4
1 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 45
735187 1166 I3 9101 F5
A A

LTL-1MHHR
0005 1167 I6 F102 G3
F1 F2

P1

P2
P3
P4

P5
P6
P7
P8
P9
P10
P11
P12
P13
P14
P15
P16
P17
P18

G1

G2
G3
G4
G5
G6
G7
G8
G9
PROTECTION FOIL 1168 I4 F103 F2

6101
1169 I6 F104 G3
GND 1170 I4 F1401 F1

RECORD
I182
1910 G1 F1402 F2

LTL-1MHHR
7106/7108-Emitter 1911 H1 F1403 F3
IC7103-19 2100 I8 F1404 G2

6102
2101 D10 F1405 G1
2102 D10 F1407 G2
I183 6105
2103 I9 F1408 G3
V0
LTL-1MHHR BAS316 2104 D11 F1409 G2
2105 G3 F1410 G3
6103

B A: DC, 2 V/Div, 10us/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div, 10us/Div

+5VSTBY
B 2108 D9 F1501 H1
2109 C9 F1502 H1
I190

-23.9V 2110 E6 F1503 H1

7101 2111 E7 F1504 H1
IC7103-8
BC847BW 2112 E9 I100 E12
270R
3137

Tray_Led
I176 -24V 4100 2113 F7 I101 E12
G9
not used 2114 F9 I102 E12
I192

2115 F5 I103 E12

3100

100K
2123

100p

3127
22K
2116 G9 I104 E12
0206 2117 F6 I105 I12

for CSTEP only

270R
3139

A: DC, 1 V/Div, 100ns/Div +5VSTBY

+12VSTBY DISPLAY HOLDER 2118 E13 I106 H12
C C 2119 F13 I107 H12

3143
EPG

1K
I194

VKK VKK 2120 F13 I108 H12

6106 2121 F13 I109 H12
LW-3333-T2-5

0211 7112 5V V2
7.5V 2122 F13 I110 H12
PDTA124EU
6107

+5VSTBY BAS316 2123 C13 I111 H12

3141 2109 2124 D13 I112 H12
7105
BC847BW not used
0.1V 0.1V +5VSTBY I150 +5VSTBY 2125 G13 I113 H12
47K 22p

1
HOLDER EPG not used -23.9V 2126 G13 I114 H12

EFOMC
GND

1110
2 7102
3100 C13 I115 H12
I189

BC847BW

8M0
3101 D13 I116 H12

5100

10u
3
2108 I175 -24V 4101 3102 H8 I117 G12
G8

3142
VKK

10K
GND
180R
3136

22p I151 2101 -26.5V not used 3103 I6 I118 G12

D not used GND D 3104 I7 I119 G12

3101

100K
2124

100p

3128
22K
not used

6110 2102 47n 5.1V 3105 I7 I120 G12

4102

GND 3106 I6 I121 G12

100n
50V
2104
I191

BAS316 22u 16V

+5VSTBY +5VSTBY 3107 H9 I122 G12
39 40 78 3108 I4 I123 G12
Φ

VAREF

VDD

VKK
I156
VKK VKK 3109 I2 I124 G12
180R
3138

1.9V 9
1 MC G8_9 3110 I4 I125 G12
3144

3117
+5VSTBY GND
10K

10K
3113 I147 2.1V XTAL 3111 F3 I126 G12
8
INT 2
3112 G10 I127 G12
I193

6111 1K0 3126

+12VSTBY 10 3113 E6 I128 F12
IPOR RESET
3145

10K

9.4V BAS316 100R 7103 3114 G4 I129 F12

2112

220n
13 TMP87CH74F
3116 I161 TEST 3115 G3 I130 F12
E 0.1V 3146 6112 E 3116 E7 I131 F12

GND
7110 79 SCK1
330R

330R
3118
BC847BW
22K
80 73 I104 P23 VKK 3117 E9 I132 F12
BAS316 SI1 2 I103

2110

2111
1 74

47n
3118 E8 I133 F12

10u
P24
FIL2

GND SO1 3
FIL1
I155 2 75 I102
I184 7109 V3 4 P25
2118 3119 F6 I134 F12
3 76 I101 P26
7106 I160 3125 BC847BW 5 3120 F9 I135 F12
BC337-25 4 77 I100 P27
6 100p 3147 3121 F9 I136 F12
I162 5
GND 470R
for CSTEP only VGNSTBY 0.4V 3120 6
PD<0:4> 2119 22K
3122 F6 I137 H10
GND
2117

5.4V 3123 F6 I142 F10

22u
ZL

1K0
2113 +5VSTBY 41 I136
5104 2114 P0<0:7> 0 V0
100p 3148 3124 F8 I143 F10
I135

I163
42

I144
V2
I159 1 3125 E8 I144 F10
3134 5101 100u 5.4V 1n0 15
INT0 2
43 I134 G8_9
2120 22K
F1401 F1402 F103 680n 3126 E9 I147 E8
9101

470R

I133
3123

16 44 G7 G7
GND VGNSTBY GND INT1 3
F F
470R

220R
3119

3124

3121
7108 V I132 3127 C14 I150 D9

10K
-T BLM18H 17 45 G6 G6
10K GND TC2 4 100p 3149
BC327-25 46 I131 G5 G5 3128 D14 I151 D9
2322640 5V PPG 5
7107 18 47 I130
I157 6100 I158 DVO 6 G4 G4
2121 22K 3129 I8 I155 E10
or EPG Board for sets with Guide Plus

TSOP4836ZC1
VKK

48 I129

I165
G3 G3
F1403 3111 0V
7104 4.8V 19
TC4 7 3130 I3 I156 D7
BZX384-C6V8 VS PDO 100p 3150 3131 I3 I157 F5
BC847BW 1K0 PWM P6<0:7>
22K GND
not used

4.8V I143 I142 20

3122

1 3132 H10 I158 F6

2115

50V

10K

+5VSTBY
47n

GND OUT INT3 2122 22K

2105

4.8V 49 I128 G2 G2 3133 H10 I159 F7

for CSTEP only 3112 TC1 8
21 50 I127
GND INT2 9 G1 G1
100p 3151 3134 F1 I160 E8

2116
22 51 I126

22u
2 INT4 10 P13
3135 I5 I161 E8
1910 GND 3 I125

3140
52

10K
P12
TC3 11 2125 22K 3136 D2 I162 F8
from/to Analogboard

TEMP_SENSE 1 V 53 I124 P9
GND GND GND 12
VGNSTBY
2 54 I123 P11 3137 B3 I163 F8
+5VSTBY P1<0:7> 13 100p 3152
POR_DC 3 55 I122 P10 3138 E2 I165 F10
5103 F104 GND GND 14
G 12VSTBY
INT
4 F1404
5 F1405 INT BLM18H
+12VSTBY
F102
14
INT5
STOP
15
56 I121 P8
2126 22K G 3139 C3
3140 G8
I166 I4
I167 I4
F1408 12
6
GND F1407 XTIN P7<0:7> 100p 3153 3141 C3 I168 I3
7 11
GND
8
GND 6109 XTOUT
57 I120 3142 D6 I169 I8
P7
5VSTBY F1409 3114 I173 16 22K
9 58 I119 P6 3143 C5 I170 I7
SDA BAS316 P2<0:2> 17
10 59 I118 P5 3144 E4 I171 I7
SCL F1410 3115 100R I174 18
23 60 I117 P4
SCL V 19 61 I116
3145 E3 I172 I6
FMN 100R SI0 20 P3
24 62 I115 P2
3146 E2 I173 G4
SDA 21
+5VSTBY 63 I114 P1 3147 E14 I174 G4
SO0 22
25 64 I113 P14 3148 F14 I175 D13
23
+5VSTBY +5VSTBY SCK0 3149 F14 I176 B13
P3<0:2> P8<0:7> 3150 F14 I177 A5
H 1911
H

3132

1K0
F1501
to STBY-PRINT

1 26 65 I112 P15
3151 G14 I178 A12
Tray_Led Tray_Led 3154 0 24
3102

3107

I111 3152 G14 I179 I6

2K2

2K2

I137 27 66 P16
2 F1502 1 25
28 67 I110 3153 G14 I180 I3
+12VSTBY +12VSTBY 10K 2 26 I109
P17
29 68
F1503 not used 3 27 P18 3154 H5 I181 I2

not used
3 30 AIN V 69 I108 P19
K1 4 28 4100 B13 I182 A3

3133
I107

1K0
31 70
for CSTEP only

P20
4 F1504 5 29 I106 4101 D13 I183 B3
32 71 P21
GND 6 30
220R
3109

3110

I105 4102 D2 I184 E4

3131

3130

3108
2K2

33 72
1K0

10K

47K

P22
for CSTEP only

7 31
for CSTEP only

DA 5100 D11 I185 I5

220R
3106

3103

3104

3105
3135

3129

2100

2103
47K

10K

2K2
4K7

1K0

10n

10n

GND P4<0:7> P9<0:7> 5101 F2 I189 D2

I181

I180

I168

I167

I166

OPEN/CLOSE

GND 34
5103 G2 I190 B3
10 5104 F7 I191 D2
I179

I172

I171

I170

I169

35
I185

11
EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R
NEXT
PREV

I AIN
I 6100 F6 I192 C3
LEFT

36
CH-

12
1163

1166

1168

1170

37 6101 A3 I193 E2
1164

0210
RIGHT

13
STOP

GND GND
EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R

EVQ11L05R
EPG
REC

PLAY

6102 B3 I194 C3
CH+
1162

1165

1167

1169

1160

1161

6103 B3

VASS
P5<0:3>

VSS
6105 B14
7 38 6106 C14
LIGHT CHAMBER RECORD 6107 C2
GND GND GND GND GND
TR 06019_002 6109 G8
GND GND GND GND GND GND 110203 6110 D5
6111 E4
GND 6112 E3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 103

Front Connector (FC)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1920 B1
1921 E1
1922 C9
2200 A5
2201 C5
3200
2202 E3
1K0 2203 C6

SIOV-CN0805M4CCG3
3200 A5
3201 A6

DF3A6.8FU
6200
CINCH 3202 B5

not used
3208
3203 C6

2200

330p

3201

1M0
A A

V
3204 C5

6.8V
F1006
3205 C3
CVBS 6 3206 D3
F1003 3207 E3
GND_FC GND_FC
AL/MONO 4 3208 A3
3209 C3
5 GND_FC GND_FC 6200 A4
AR 6201 B4
2 F1002 6202 C4
3 6203 D4
6204 E4
1920
1 F1001 B2
F1002 B2
B B
JPJ1127 F1003 A2
F1001 3202
F1006 A2
F1103
F1101 C8
1K0 F1103 C8

SIOV-CN0805M4CCG3
F1104 C8
6201 F1105 C8
GND_FC F1107 D8

not used
3209
F1109 D8

2201

330p

3203

1M0
V
DF3A6.8FU 6.8V I201 E3
GND_FC

C C
GND_FC GND_FC

TO ANALOGBOARD
GND_FC 3204 F1104
1922
6202 68R F1101

not used
1
AFCRI_FC

2203
2

47p
GND_FC
3205

3
75R

AFCLI_FC
DF3A6.8FU 6.8V 4
S-CONN 5
CVBSFIN_FC
GND_FC
6
GND_FC F1107 NC
7
C 4
GND_FC
8
CFIN_FC
GND_FC F1109 GND_FC
Y 9 YFIN_FC

D D
3 6203
S9B-PH

F1105
2
3206

75R

1 DF3A6.8FU 6.8V

6 GND_FC GND_FC GND_FC

5 GND_FC GND_FC
1921
YKF51 GND_FC 6204

GND_FC
3207

75R

DF3A6.8FU 6.8V
E I201 GND_FC
E
2202

100n

TR 06020_001
GND_FC 030203

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 104

Layouts Display Panel

Part 1
TR 06006a_001

Part 2
TR 06006b_001

TR 06006_001
300103
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 105

Layout Display Panel (Part 1 Bottom View)

TR 06006a_001
240203
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 106

Layout Display Panel (Part 2 Bottom View)

TR 06006b_001
240203
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 107

Standby Panel (STBY) Layout Standby Panel

1130 C1 1931 A4 3301 A3 3303 B3 3305 B2 7301 B2 F3002 B1 F3004 B1 F3103 B4

1930 A1 3300 B1 3302 A3 3304 B3 7300 A2 F3001 B1 F3003 B1 F3101 A4 I300 B1

1 2 3 4

A 3301 3302 A
270R 270R
7300
+12VSTBY PDTC124EU

+12VSTBY 1931
1930 F3101 1

to TRAY LEFT
1 F3001 3305 TRAY_LED1
from DC-BOARD

Tray_Led 2
2 F3002 1K +12VSTBY
+12VSTBY GND F3103 3
3303 3304
3 F3003 TRAY_LED2
K1 270R 270R
7301
4 F3004 DA
B GND
PDTC124EU
not used B
3300
4K7

DA
not used
I300

GND
GND for CSTEP only
POWER
EVQ11L05R
1130

C C
GND

1 2 3 4
TR 07003_001
110303

TR 06007_001
030203
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 108

Tray Left Panel (TRL) Layout Tray Left Panel

1940 A1 1941 B4 3400 A3 6400 A3 6401 A3 6402 A2 F4001 A1 F4002 A1 F4003 B1

1 2 3 4

+12VSTBY
+12VSTBY +12VSTBY
3400

A 680R A
1940 6402 6401 6400
1
F4001
TRAY_LED1
from STBY

2
F4002 LST670 LST670 LST670
+12VSTBY 1941
F4003

to TRAY-RIGHT
3 1
TRAY_LED2 TRAY_LED2
2
DA +12VSTBY

DA
B B

for CSTEP only TR06008_001

030203
1 2 3 4

TR 06021_001
030203
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 109

Tray Right Panel (TRR) Layout Tray Right Panel

1950 A1 3500 A2 6500 A3 6501 A2 6502 A2 F5001 B1 F5002 B1

1 2 3

A +12VSTBY +12VSTBY A
3500

680R

1950 6502 6501 6500

from TRAY-LEFT

1
F5001
TRAY_LED2
2
F5002 LST670 LST670 LST670
+12VSTBY

DA
not used
B B

for CSTEP only

1 2 3

TR 06022_001 TR06009_001
030203 030203
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 110

Analog Board: Frontend Video (FV)

0005 A1 1704 F14 2719 B5 2723 B8 2728 C11 2732 F1 2736 G2 2742 F8 3704 F1 3714 B11 3720 B9 3727 G1 3731 F13 3735 F14 3739 F10 3743 G8 3758 G6 5705 B4 5713 D13 6705 F5 7705 D6 7712 H4 7717 G7 F703 D7 F709 C6 I702 B6 I707 D7 I712 C9 I717 A9 I725 F13 I729 F5 I733 F1 I741 D4 I745 A8 I751 D13
1701 C7 1705 C1 2720 B4 2724 B10 2729 C12 2733 F1 2737 E15 3701 A7 3705 C14 3715 B12 3724 B8 3728 D13 3732 E15 3736 F15 3740 F9 3744 G8 4700 E4 5709 B11 5714 G14 7701 A10 7706 H6 7713 D12 9701 D4 F704 A4 F710 D3 I703 B5 I708 D7 I713 B9 I721 G9 I726 E10 I730 F5 I734 G1 I742 D5 I746 B9 I754 D13
1702 E7 1706 F14 2721 B5 2725 D3 2730 C9 2734 D4 2740 F8 3702 A2 3710 A9 3716 B5 3725 B12 3729 G1 3733 G4 3737 E6 3741 D14 3745 H5 4701 G5 5710 B6 6703 C5 7702 D15 7710 C8 7714 H6 F701 E2 F707 E3 F713 H5 I704 C5 I709 C8 I715 G1 I723 F15 I727 E8 I731 H4 I735 G1 I743 E7 I748 C9
1703 D7 2713 A3 2722 B8 2727 C8 2731 C9 2735 G1 2741 F4 3703 A3 3711 A4 3717 E12 3726 C5 3730 D5 3734 F15 3738 E6 3742 F6 3746 H6 5704 A2 5711 C10 6704 E5 7704 C6 7711 F14 7716 D14 F702 C11 F708 B11 I701 B2 I706 E6 I711 C9 I716 G1 I724 E14 I728 E9 I732 B3 I739 H6 I744 E7 I749 D12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

SB1
5SW
I717 3.5V
F704 3701 I745

680R
0V
A V F V I723
A

3710

5K6
7701

150K
3703

2713

22u
not used
0005 PDTC124EU

470R
3702
5704
BRACKET 5SW GND

3711
33K
GND GND 5SW 5SW

5705
6u8
for MSTD only GND GND GND A: DC, 500mV /Div
10us /Div

3714

5709
18K

6u8
40,4-ADJUST

2u2 low leakage

5SW GND 5SW
I732 7KMY 5710
2721 I702
B 4 3 AGC-ADJUST AFC-ADJUST F708 3715 B
AFC

330R
120p

3720
2 10K

2720

100u
8 7

22K
2719 I746

3716

100n 2722
I703
4K7
6 1 6 1

3724
2723

470p

I712 2730 I713

220p

3725
2724

100n

8K2
8 7 2

2727

2728

2729
10n

10u
I709 2731

220n
I701 4 3

100R
3726

I711
GND GND
8p2
7KMY 5711

F702
N750
GND GND GND GND GND

I748
F709 1 4 3,3V GND

0,7V

0,9V

3,1V

2,5V

3,5V
2,7V

2,7V
C * 5SW C

3V

5V
I704 1701 7710
OFWK3953M TDA9817 22 15 4 6 7 19 18 17 21 20 for MSTD only
2 5 3,3V

BA591
6703

3705
10K
7704 3 14 VOLTAGE
1705 1.9V
PDTC124EU F703 TUNER VIF REFERENCE
UV1316-MK3 AGC AGC 5V 3741
7716 5V
GAIN GND GND AFC BC857BW 4K7
TRACK CTRL TRACK 7702 0.2V
PRE-FIL FILTER PRE-AMP FILTER DETECTOR SB1
BC857BW PDTC124EU
I749 7713 3728 5713 1.9V
1 4 3,3V 1 16

I742
VCO
FPLL
D RF
IN
MIX-OSC
I741
1703 * I707
3,3V 2
VIF
AMPLIFIER
TWD
VIDEO DEMODULATOR
2V 1.9V 100R I754 15u D
IF AMP F710 9701 2734 7705 OFWG3956M
IFOUT 11 I708 AND AMPLIFIER GND
PDTC124EU 2 5 8
1n 3,2V 23 5V
for PAL-I only

QSS MIXER I751

3730
2725

delete for MSTD

4K7
22p

AGC GND 3 SIF INTERCARRIER MIXER

RF 3,2V 24 AMPLIFIER AM DEMODULATOR
DET BA591
6704
4700

3717
4K7
OUT
12
PLL 15 GND FM-PLL DEMODULATOR

I743
MT MT 14 GND GND SIF INTERCARRIER
13
AGC MODE SWITCH
I706 5SW

I744
AGC

VCC

ADC
SDA
NC1

NC2

SCL
33V

AS
VT

E GND
5SW 5SW 2,8V 5 5,2V 3 2V 12 13 9 10 11 E
I726
F707

1 2 6 10 9 7 3 4 5 8
I727 I728
3737

3738 I724

2737
2K2

6K8

47u
F701

3732
1K
1702

2740

2u2
GND 2741 OFWK9656M
33VSTBY

I729 1 7711
220R I733 GND GND
4 BC857BW I723
*317041 VFV

680R
1n

3740
*3731

2742
I730 2.5V

1n
3704 6705 I725

3739
2 1.9V

5K6

3734
2732

2733

100n

2K7
GND O I
2u2

BA591 270R
5MHZ5
F F
3742

GND 0.5V
4K7

2 G TPSR

3735
3K3
3 GND

330R
3736
GND
GND GND GND GND
GND
GND 3.1V
5SW
*1706 GND
GND
3 1
I715 3727 I734
4701
SCLSW
1R delete for MSTD 7717 3743 2 TPS

I716 3729 I735 BC847BW GND

2.5V 56K

I721
SDASW 5714

100K
G G

3744
5SW 5SW
1R
15u
not used

not used
2735

2736
56p

56p

3733

3758
4K7

10K

GND
2.4V 5.1V
GND GND
I731
7706
7712
PDTC124EU 0V
PDTC124EU * VERSION TABLE
Pos. PAL BG (/01) PAL I (/07) MULTISTD (/39)
H GND
4.1V
1703 G3956M K3953M G3956M
H
GND F713 3745 I739
7714 1704 TPS 5,5 MHz -- TPS 5,5 MHz
5K6 0.1V
BC847BW
1706 -- TPS 6,0 MHz --
I
3746

B/G L L’ D/K
5K6

3731 270R 330R 270R

GND
PSS 1 1 0 0 4700 0R 0R --
1
GND 4701 0R 0R --
SB1 0 0 0 1 0 7710 TDA9817 TDA9817 TDA9818
I I
SB1
SFS_TS

SFS_TS 0 1 1 1 1
for MSTD only TR 07004_001
SIF1
PSS
AGC

110303

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 111

Analog Board: In/Out Video (IOV)

1940-1 A8 6417 B12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1940-2 A13
1940-3 A14
6418 B12
6419 B11
1942 E1 6420 A5

YCVBSOUT1
1943 C1 6422 A11

CVBSIN1

CVBSOUT2
YCVBSIN2
1945-1 I2 6423 A8

CVBSIN1

AOUT1R

AOUT1L
RCOUT
FBOUT
VGNSTBY 5VSTBY 5SW 12VSTBY 5NSTBY 1947 I7 6424 B10

AIN2R
GOUT

AIN1R
BOUT

AIN1R

FBIN
AIN1L

AIN1L

AIN2L
8SC1

8SC2
1948 F14 6425 G13

P50
5NESD
3454 F499 1940-3 1949-A H14 6426 G13
1949-B H14 6427 H13
0350808190

1940-1
1949-C G14 6428 H13

1940-2
20A

18A

16A

14A

12A

10A

20B

18B

16B

14B

12B

10B
1K

8A

6A

4A

2A

8B

6B

4B

2B
2401 B4 6429 I14

21A

19A

17A

15A

13A

11A

21B

19B

17B

15B

13B

11B
9A

7A

5A

1A

9B

7B

5B

1B
2402 B1 7401 B2

3A

3B
2464

10u
2403 D3 7402 B3
2404 D3 7403 B1
2405 C8 7404 I4
F5113 F5213 2406 I4 7405 C14
GND GND
A GND F5110 F5108 4401 GND
A 2407 I2
2408 F3
7406 F13
7407 E14
2409 D8 7408 D8

BZX384-C12
VGNSTBY 5VSTBY 5SW 12VSTBY 5NSTBY GND GND 2410 C4 7409 D14

BZX384-C6V8
I459

F5202

F5201
F5210 2411 D6 7410 G11

BZX384-C12
2412 I2 7411 D3

6409

6423
F5211

I341
GND
YCVBSIN2
F5215 F5207 2413 C7 7412 H5
F5219

6420
5VSTBY

I460

BZX384-C3V9
3447 2414 C7 7415 I12

F5206
5VSTBY 5VSTBY

I458
2415 C10 7416 I14
YCVBSIN2 2416 G11 7419 H2

6422
3464 3463 3462 3461

75R 1%

75R 1%

75R 1%
F5119
47K

F5116
GND 2417 F4 7420 H3

GND

GND

GND

GND
4.7/4.5V 3411 2418 F9 7421 H4

3401

3402

3403
BC857BW I408 GND 3465 3466 3467 3468 2419 E6 F401 H2
3446 F5120 V V V V
7402

BZX384-C12

BZX384-C12

BZX384-C12

BZX384-C12
GND

GND

GND

GND
7401 5NESD 75R
2420 F13 F402 H2
2421 E1 F412 I5

BZX384-C12
BC847BW 0.7/0V 47K 3470
V V V V 2422 F13 F4203 F1

6402

6403

6404

6419
BC857BW GND

GND
4.5/5V I407 2450 3469 3477 2423 G9 F4205 F2

6401

GND
7403 0/0.7V

not used
I406 3471 3472 3475 100K AOUT2R 2424 G13 F4207 F1

BZX384-C6V8
3404
2401

100p

75R

GND

GND
GND GND GND 2425 G12 F4209 G1
100n I409 100K 100R 2427 G9 F4210 E1
B 5/0V 100K 100K 100R
B
220K
F5101
3405

3406

6414
2428 F3 F4505 I3
22K

BZX384-C12

BZX384-C12

BZX384-C12

BZX384-C12

BZX384-C12
2429 H13 F4707 I8

3407

3409
75R
3K3

1%
F5102 5NESD AIN2R 2430 E12 F4712 I9
3408
2402

100n

6424

6415

6416

6417

6418
3K9

5NESD 2432 H13 F4714 I9

GND GND F5106 F5103 3476 2433 E9 F4716 I10
WU

5NESD 2434 C8 F4718 I10

100R 3478 2435 C7 F4720 I10

3413
75R
GND GND GND

1%
2436 E10 F4721 I10

F5216
GND GND AOUT2L
5NSTBY 3433 5VSTBY 100R 2437 E9 F4722 I10
5VSTBY 5VSTBY 2438 F9 F485 F14
SDA 5NESD GND 2439 E9 F499 A3
3432 100R 5NESD 2440 E9 F5101 B8
SCL 5403 I457 I456 5406 5402 AIN2L 2441 E10 F5102 B8
100R 2442 H13 F5103 B7
10u 10u 10u 2443 G13 F5106 B6

2414

100n

2435

100n
2434

2405
5SW 2444 H13 F5108 A7

47u

47u

47u
12VSTBY 12VSTBY

3412

3410

2413
F5208 2445 I11 F5110 A5

3414

75R

75R
75R

1%

not used
C C 2446 H6 F5113 A6

3427

3417
2415

100p

75R

75R
2447 I14 F5116 A5
from/to Display Board (1) /EPG Board (11)

2448 I13 F5119 A5

GND GND GND GND GND 2449 F1 F5120 B4

P50

3421
2450 B2 F5201 A14

5401

27K
10u
2459 E2 F5202 A13
GND 2460 H11 F5206 A12
I413 2410 GND GND 2461 G11 F5207 A12
1943 7405 2462 I11 F5208 C12
SCL
SDA

BC847BW 2463 I13 F5210 A11

SCL 1 1u 3422 11.7/0.2V 2464 A3 F5211 A12
SDA 2 3400 H4 F5213 A12
2403

2404

100n
47u

5VSTBY 3401 B11 F5215 A11

5VSTBY 3 820R 11.1/0V I402 3402 B12 F5216 B11
GND 4 GND

390R
3423
3403 B12 F5219 A11
GND 5 GND I414

150R
3490 3404 B4 F5220 F11
INT 6 3405 B2 F913 D10

150R

150R

150R
3491

3492

3493
12VSTBY 3406 B2 I341 A13
D 12VSTBY 7
IPOR_DC 8
GND
7411 GND
5VSTBY 7408
D 3407 B3 I402 D14

2411

100n
3408 B1 I405 H7

2409

100n
VGNSTBY 9 VGNSTBY NJM2285M 36 8 20 24 30 32 STV6618 11.7/0.1V I467 3409 B5 I406 B2
TEMP_SENSE 10 I411 2.5V 1 2.5V 3410 C6 I407 B2
16

VDD

VCC
VCCB-REC
VCCB1
VCCB2
VCCB3
IN1B IN1A I412 3442 0/0.6V 3411 B10 I408 B3
FMN 7409 3412 C5 I409 B3
0V 2 15 GND 3413 B6 I411 D3
CTL1 GND1 3V GND F913 150K BC847BW
3455
3414 C5 I412 D4
10K 1V 2440 3415 H4 I413 C3
2459

1.7V

3426

3424
4402 1.8V 3 14 I461 31 9 I483

33K

33K
GND
1u

TEMP_SENSE OUT1 IN2B R|PR|COUT-TV R|PR|CIN-ENC 3416 H4 I414 D7

3417 C11 I415 F3
4 13 I462 1V 29 10 I482 1u 2.6V 3418 I3 I416 F3
3429 GND2 V+ G|YOUT-TV G|YIN-ENC 5VSTBY 5VSTBY GND 3419 I4 I417 E4
0.8V GND 5 12 0V I463 1V 27 11 I481 3V 11.6/0V
3420 F11
3421 C14
I418 H1
I419 I1
47K OUT2 CTL2 B|PBOUT-TV B|PBIN-ENC GND
2437 3422 D13 I420 I6
1.2V 6 3.5V 34
3489

11 1.5V I464 4 2.5V

82K

3423 D14 I424 I5

E OUT3 IN2A FBOUT-TV CVBSIN-ENC 3428
E

2441

2436
0/0.6V 3424 E14 I428 I4

3431
7407

4K7
not used

1u

1u
1.4V 33 6 3VI479 2439 1u 3425 E12 I429 I2
3482

0V 7 I465

2430

100n
10
1M

CTL3 GND3 I417 Y|CVBSOUT-TV CIN-ENC 100K BC847BW 3426 E13 I431 I11
3427 C11 I433 I13
2V 8 I478 100n 2.5V

470R
9 40 7

3425
GND GND 3428 E14 I434 I13
WSFI

IN3A IN3B CIN-TV YIN-ENC 3429 E1 I437 G14

1942 GND 3445 2419 I466 41 GND GND 3431 E12 I438 G13
9 F4210 2421 1.6V Y|CVBSIN-TV 4V 2433 3432 C3 I439 G13
5 WSRO

GND
150R 1u DECV 3433 C3 I440 F13
YFIN 2.1V 3434 F13 I441 H13
8 10u 47n

2422
5VSTBY 3435 F13 I442 G12
GND

10n
not used

GND 2408 2.4V 3436 F13 I443 G12

3481

3434
4K7
1M
from/to Front Connector (2)

7 Y|CVBSIN-TUN 1.8V 2.2V 3437 G1 I444 H12

2438
21 I476

1u
CFIN F4203 2417 Y|CVBSOUT-REC I449 2420 3438 G1 I445 H12
6 I416
1u 43
CIN-TUN
F5220
REAR OUT 3439 F5 I446 H11
3439

3440 H3 I447 G11

10K

GND
GND

N.C. 10u 23 1.6V 3449 1.6V 100n 3441 H13 I448 G12

3436 I451
7406
F 5 COUT-AUX
S-CONN F 3442 D13 I449 F13
2449

GND BC857BW
68p

GND 0V 150R I484 3443 I11 I451 F13

28 25 1.4V GND 3444 I13 I453 H4
2428 I415 C-GATE Y|CVBSOUT-AUX

150R
4 F4205

3420
1948

68R
3445 E5 I454 I4
CVBSFIN 0V 42 5SW TCS79 3446 B3 I456 C7
3 F4207 10u 5VSTBY DIGOUT1 GND 1
3447 A3 I457 C7
not used

not used

3448 I11 I458 A6

AINFL
17 0V 2418 F485
3484

0V
3483

44
1M

1M

5 3449 F12 I459 A6

2 DIGOUT2 R|PR|CIN-AUX 3435 I440

5404
3450 I13 I460 A5

10u
GND

3
GND
1
0V 2
DIGOUT3 G|YIN-AUX
15 2.5V 2423 1u GND
75R
Y 7 3451 I4
3452 G9
I461 D6
I462 E6
3459

5VSTBY I439
10K

4
AINFR
GND GND
I468 0V 14
DIGOUT4 B|PBIN-AUX
13 4.5V 1u 2427 C 6
3453 D1
3454 A3
I463 E6
I464 E6

BZX384-C12

BZX384-C12
PH-B 2 3455 D4 I465 E6
0V 35 0V 3494 1u

2425

100n
2424
16 3456 I14 I466 E6

47u
AINFR DIGOUT5 FBIN-AUX 3457 I11 I467 D14

6425

6426
F4209 150R 3452 2416 7410 I448 3458 H2 I468 G6
3437

3438

18 19
10K

10K

GND GND 3459 G4 I469 G6

G 0V DIGOUT6 Y|CVBSIN-AUX NJM2267M 7 G 3460 H3 I470 G6

GNDB-REC
AINFL I469 5V 38 2.1V 150R 1u GND GND 3461 A14 I476 F8
SDA 2.3V V+ 3462 A14 I478 E8
2461 2.6V 5NESD 5NESD 3463 A13 I479 E8

GNDD
VSA1 I447

GNDB
I470 1949-C

GND2
GND1
5V 37 1 VIN1 2443 3464 A12 I481 E8
SCL VOUT1 4 I442 I438 1 LPR6520

GND
3465 B7 I482 E8

not used
VSA2 4u7 6DB

3485
3466 B7 I483 D8

1M
100u
SDASW

3467 B8 I484 F12

SCLSW

22 12 3 26 39
VSAG1 3 I443 2442 3441 I437 4
CVBS 3468 B8 I485 I12
SDA
SCL

3469 B14 I486 I14

5VSTBY
2446

BZX384-C12
GND GND GND GND GND 3470 B12
1u

5SW GND 2.5V 22u 75R 3471 B7

5VSTBY

ASC1S

100K
3487

6427
2460 2.3V 3472 B8
3458 3460 2.6V 2432 3473 I12
3415

I446 8 VIN2
1K

3474 I14
VOUT2 5 I444 1949-B 3475 B9
FOME 4K7 4K7 4u7 6DB 1 LPR6520

GND
3476 B9

not used
I441
H 8k2 for C-Step 8k2 for C-Step I405 100u
H

3486
3477 B14

1M
delete for C-Step A_YCVBS VSAG2 6 I445 2429 GND 3478 B14
5NESD 3481 F2
SB1 3
AL
F402

3440
10K

5V 3482 E4
7419 7420 7421 2.5V 22u 3483 F3
I418 3400 I453 3416 1949-A

100K
3488
BSH111 BSH111 BC847BW 5VSTBY GND 3484 F3

BZX384-C12
AGC 7412 3485 G11

2444

470p
GND 1 LPR6520

GND
100K 4K7 0V PDTC124EU 5V 3955 3486 H11
F401

6428
not used 2 3487 H13
WSFI

5NSTBY 3488 H13

PSS
I429
5V F412
0V 10K
GND
2462 I431 3448 I485
GND
3473 I433 GND 2
AR 3489 E1
3490 D4
F4505
TEMP_SENSE

3491 D11
3419

GND GND
22K

SFS_TS 10u 470R 100R 5NESD 3492 D11

7404
3451
I419

10K
A_YCVBS

3493 D12
F4707

F4712

F4714

F4716

F4718

F4720

F4722
2447

100K
BC857BW

3443

2445

470p
5VSTBY 3494 G9

GND
not used
not used

-4.5V
2407

2412

GND 3495 I11

GND
P50
WU

ION 470p 3496 I14

SDASW

SCLSW

5SW 6429

5NESD
2463 I434 3955 H6

21 F4721
3450 0V 3474
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND 4401 A9
I I
100K
3418

2406

I454

I424

GND GND 4402 E1

10n

12VSTBY

AKILL
I420 10u 470R 100R I486 BZX384-C12 5401 C4
5402 C9

100K
3444
0V

2448

470p
20

22
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
GND BC817-25W(COL) BC817-25W(COL)
3
1
2

4
5
6

7
8
9

5403 C6
1945-2
1945-3

1945-4
I428

1947

7415 7416
1945-1

5404 F12
3457 3456
17
18
19
20

21
22
23
24

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8

10
11
12
13
14
15
16

25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

GND GND 5406 C8

AKILL 6401 B4
IPOR_DC
12VSTBY

6402 B6
SFS_TS

PSS

8SC2
PWONSW

SDASW
FOME

INT

SCLSW

FBIN
AGC

SB1

STBY
A_YCVBS
SDA
WSFI

SCL
ION

A_YCVBS
A_G

D_CVBS
A_R

D_Y
A_B

D_G
AFC

D_R
A_C

D_B
ASC1M

WU

D_C 3495 3496 6403 B6

KILL

GND GND
PWONSW

A_YCVBS

6404 B6

ARDAC
ALDAC
DAC_MUTE
IASC1M
IPFAIL

6409 A4
AKILL

VFV

-4.3V
STBY

AFC

470R -4.3V 470R 6414 B5

GND GND
from/to uP Board (2) 6415 B11
from/to uP Board (2) from/to uP Board (1) from/to uP Board (1) from / to Digital Board (6) - EPG Board (11) DAC_MUTE
6416 B12

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
I 465 I 461 I462 I 463 A_C V B S I405 D_C V B S F 4712 D_Y F 4714 D_C F 4716 D_R F 4718 D_G F 4720 D_B F 4722 TR07005_001
110303

A:DC , 500mV /Div A:DC , 500mV /Div A:DC , 500mV /Div A:DC, 500mV /Div A: DC , 500mV /Div A:DC, 200mV /Div A:DC , 200mV /Div A:DC , 200mV /Div A:DC, 200mV /Div A:DC , 200mV /Div A:DC , 200mV /Div
10us /Div 10us /Div 10us /Div 10us /Div 10us/Div 10us /Div 10us /Div 10us /Div 10us /Div 10us /Div 10us /Div
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 112

Analog Board: IN/Out Audio (IOA)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2501 A5 I503 B1
2502 A6 I504 D1
2503 A2 I505 B2

AIN1R
AIN1L

AINFR
AIN2R

RSA1

RSA2
AINFL
VSA1

VSA2

AIN2L
5VSTBY 5VSTBY 2504 A1 I506 B2
5VSTBY 5NSTBY 2505 A1 I507 C3
2506 A4 I508 E4
2510 2519 2507 A6 I509 D3
I502/I504 I517/I518 F501/F502
2508 A6 I510 D3

2506

2501

2502

100n
2509 B4 I511 C3

1u

1u
100u 100u 16 9 10

2503

100n
2510 A3 I513 C6
2504

2505

2511 E4 I514 C6
1u

1u VDD
A MSB LSB
A 2512 D7 I515 B6

2507

2508
GND 5VSTBY 5NSTBY GND GND LOGIC

1u

1u
GND
2513 F4 I516 B6
A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div 2514 C4 I517 B8

100K

100K
3504

3503
A: DC, 500mV/Div
7501 500us/Div 500us/Div 500us/Div 2515 F5 I518 C8
2516 E3 I519 D6
HEF4052BT 2517 F4 I520 D7
0V 2518 E2 I521 D6
3502 I525
I505 I506 GND GND 3 2519 A4
0V 1 LL 2520 F3 I523 D9
16 9 10 1K 1 2521 C9 I524 E9

not used
I515 5 ALADC

2531

100p
0V LH H 2522 E8 I525 B8
VDD MSB LSB 2 0V 2523 E9 I526 C8
LOGIC 2524 F1 I527 F1
B 3506 0V I516 2 HL L 3 I517 0V MC33078
B 2525 F1 I528 F1

GND
7505-A
7503 100K 0V 4 HH 0V
2526 F8
2527 F9
I529 E6
I530 E7

3501
5VSTBY 2530 C9 I531 E3

1K
HEF4052BT 2531 B8 I532 E4
2532 C8 I533 E3
0V I503 1 LL 2509 2535 D5 I534 E8

GND
0V 12 2536 F5 I535 E8
LL
0V I502 5 100n 5VSTBY 3501 B8 I539 F8
LH H
7505-B 3502 B8 I540 F8
0V 14 LH H MC33078 2521 3503 A5

GND
3 0V 3532 I507 7502-A 3504 A5
100K

2 HL L
3534

0V 3 4 I518 I526
MC33079 3505 0V I51315 13 3509 5 8 100n 3505 C6

GND
HL L
C 4 HH
I511 1K 0V 1 C 3506 B5

not used
100K I514 1K 0V 3507 C1
100K
3507

3535
7

not used
3K9
HH 0V ARADC
0V 0V 11 3508 C3

2532

100p
2
6 0V 3509 C8

IASC1M
GND

from IOV

from IOV
ASC1S
11
GND 0V 5VSTBY 4 2530 3510 D1
GND I501
2514 VSS VEE 0V 3511 D1

GND

GND
12
3508
0V LL GND 3512 D8

1K
100n 8 7 6 100n 3513 D3
5NSTBY I521

3512
2535

100n
3514 E1

1K
0V I504 14 LH H 16 9 10

2512

100n
5NSTBY 3515 D7
100K
3510

3516 E1
0V 15 HL L 13 I510 3533 I509
5 7502-B VDD MSB LSB
3517 D8
MC33079 LOGIC
0V 1K 0V 3518 E7
7 GND GND
not used

3519 E8
D AKILL
D
100K

11 HH
3511

3536
3K9

GND 6 0V 7504 5NSTBY -4.3V

from IOV 3520 F3
3521 F4
3517 I523 0V 3522 E9
VSS VEE 0V HEF4052BT 3523 E7
GND
8 7 6 4K7 7506 3524 E9
3513

GND GND
1K

F504 1 LL 3525 F9

GND
I519 I520 7502-D BC817-25W(COL)
3515 3526 F7
100K

100K
3516

3514

2518

100n

12
2511 I508

I531
5 LH H MC33079 GND 3527 F9
GND 1K 0V 14 3528 F2
-4.3V

not used
0V

3538
3529 F3
100u

3K9
HL L 0V 3519 I524 0V
2 3
2516

100u

13 3530 F2

GND
GND GND 3531 F4
5NSTBY 4 0V 0V 4K7 7508
HH 3532 C3
E E

3518
BC817-25W(COL)
I532

3533 D3
I533

1K
0V
GND 3534 C1
I534 2522 I535 GND 3535 C3
3522
AOUT1R 3536 D3
F501 12 100u 220R to IOV 3537 F7
GND

LL I529 I530 3538 E7

3523 7502-C

820R
2523
10

3524
7501 A7

1n
MC33079
0V 14 LH H 1K 0V 7502-A C4
220R

220R

8
3520

3521

not used
7502-B D4

3537
3K9
15 13 0V 7502-C E7
2524

2525

9 GND GND
GND

HL L
1u

1u

3530 2520 3531 2517 7502-D D7

GND

GND

GND

GND

0V 0V 7503 B2
F502 820R 1n 820R 1n 0V 11 HH 7504 D5

3526
1K
F 0V 0V
GND
I539 2526 I540
F 7505-A B9
7505-B C8
VSS VEE 3525 7506 D9
2513

2515
I527

I528

1u0

1u0
X5R

X5R

3528 3529 -4.3V AOUT1L 7508 E9

-4.3V 8 7 6 220R to IOV
100u 7509 F2
from DAC_ADC

from DAC_ADC

4K7 7509 4K7

820R
2527
5NSTBY

3527
7511 7511 F4

1n
2536
BC817-25W(COL) BC817-25W(COL) GND F501 E2
AOUT2R

F502 F2
AFEL

AOUT2L
AFER

ALDAC

ARDAC
AKILL

AKILL

GND GND GND 100n TR 07006_001 F504 D2

GND GND 120303 I501 C1
I502 C1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 113

Analog Board for VAE8020: Power Supply (PS)

1300 A1 3364 G8 F351 H1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1301 B1 3365 F3 F352 H1
1302 A3 3366 G5 F353 I1
1303 E8 3367 G5 F354 I1
1304 C9 3368 D11 F355 I1
1307 1306 G13 3371 H10 F356 C9
GND 5.7V 5.2V
F300 F364 F301 F302
1307 A12 3372 H10 F357 I1
5VSTBY
3300 3301 1308 D13 3373 H10 F358 I1
7317 T1A

not used
GND
1309 A13 3374 A12 F359 I8

470R

470R

470R

470R
3374

3375

3376

3377
MRT

3339
4K7
F305 2316 I303 STD17NF03L
3M3 I300 3M3 1931 B1 3375 A12 F360 I1
12VSTBY 1932 E1 3376 A13 F361 I6
47n 2310 I301

2340

470p
2.5V 1933 H1 3377 A13 F362 G11
A 2301 I302
A

GND
1n 1934 D1 4301 G12 F363 G11
7301

2333
3319

4R7

47n

3
GND 2301 A6 5300 A6 F364 A12

3341
2n2

3340

68K
4K7
1302 I306 3306 3335 3336 2302 B2 5302 B3 F366 E8

2
5300 2303 B4 5304 D6 F367 E8
DSP 220R SRW28EC9-E02V0133 5Vreg 470R I304 470R I305 7.9V
2304 G8 5305 G9 F368 E9
1300 TL431 2305 B8 5306 C8 F369 E9
F307 7 13 6300 5308 5.7V 5.2V GND GND GND F373 F374 1309 2306 B9 5307 E9 F371 G12
F306 F304
5V 2307 C4 5308 A8 F372 G12
F308 F309 1301 F311 F310 5302 22u 12V T800mA
SB340 2308 C5 5309 D9 F373 A12

7302
STP16NF06FP 19372

3342
2309 D4 6300 A7 F374 A12

4K7

1N4003
6302 6303

not used
2303

6304
2305

2306

I311 560u
T1,25A E 12 I308

9306
1m
1931 2310 A10 6301 B4 F381 F1
HF2022R 1n F312 3337 I313 3338 2311 2.5V I309 2311 B10 6302 B4 F382 E13
1 1N4006GP SB340
2312 C8 6303 B7 F383 G1

3305
I310C300

680K
2302

220n
B 2 1K 220R 1n 7304 B 2313 C9 6304 B13 F384 G1

3
6301

3344
2341

2339

3343

68K
9.3V 2314 D5 6305 C4 I300 A6

4K7
1u

1u
I316

4V6
2315 E4 6306 C4 I301 A11

5V
9452A 1N4006GP GNDreg GND GND
I312 3Vreg I315 2316 A7 6307 C7 I302 A6
I314 2317 E3 6308 C7 I303 A8

7 8
F313 F314 GND GND TL431 2318 G5 6309 D5 I304 A10

1 2 3
GNDHOT 18 6307 5306 F316 1304 F356 F317 GND GND GND
3.4V 2319 D8 6310 D7 I305 A10

5 6
3V3
6305 6306 F315 F319 2u2 F318 7303 2320 D9 6311 E5 I306 A3
STPS5L40 T4A 3.4V
STS9NF30L 2321 E10 6312 F7 I307 G4

3314
1K
I317 1N4006GP 1N4006GP 6308 12V 2322 E9 6313 E8 I308 B8

2312

2313

560u
17

1m
2323 E9 6314 I10 I309 B12
2307 F320 STPS5L40 2330 2.5V I318 2324 H4 6315 E7 I310 B8

4
C 1n 1n 7305
C 2325 H4 6316 H4 I311 B9

3311

3V3
3
7.7V

1K
2326 G10 6317 F10 I312 B4

3316
3315

4K7
8K2
GND GND 3312 2327 G11 6318 G11 I313 B10

2
16 2328 G9 6319 G9 I314 B3
GND I319 220R I320

330K
3310

2308
330K

330K
3308

3309
2329 I6 6320 I10 I315 B10

47n
14 2330 C10 6321 G4 I316 B5
GND TL431

2309

68u
GND GND GND F321 F324 1308 F322 F325 2331 I3 6322 F12 I317 C3
I321 12VSTBY 2332 H13 6324 H12 I318 C11
15 F323 6310 5309 500mA 2333 A8 6325 E10 I319 C10
12V 12V

BYT42M
22u PSC 2334 I10 7301 A11 I320 C10

not used
STPS3L60-C2 F326 33VSTBY

SI2306DS
2314
6309
GNDHOT 2335 D9 7302 B10 I321 D5

7318
D D 2336 I8 7303 C10 I322 D6

2319

2320

330u

2335

10u
1m
1934 2337 H3 7304 B11 I323 D11
EH-B

100K
3313
1
22.2V 2338 H11 7305 C11 I324 E3
12V
5304 I322 2339 B10 7306 D12 I325 E5
2 5 7306 2340 A2 7307 E3 I326 E9

12V
GND 3368 22.2V
3 GND GND GND 2341 B9 7308 H13 I327 F10
GND 7307 3K3 I323 F382 2342 F3 7309 E11 I329 F10
ION

220K
340V

3323
2315

4 3300 A5 7310 H7 I330 F3

47p

5V I324 1,9V 0.1V

3301 A6 7311 H8 I331 F3
5N
F328

not used
0V I325 PDTC124EU 3302 F10 7312 F11 I332 F7
STP3NC60FP 9301 3303 F11 7313 G2 I333 F11
GND GND F347 F346 3304 F10 7314 H5 I334 F11
1N4003
E not used -5.5V 5NSTBY E
0R47

0R68
3321

3352

6311
100R
2317

1932 3305 B2 7315 I6 I335 F6

3318

1n

1 1303 I326 3306 A3 7317 A10 I336 F7

3V3 11 F329 6313 F366 F367 F368 F369 5307 6325 -5.5V
5N 3307 F11 7318 D10 I337 F10
2 22u
3V3 T1A 3308 C4 7319 I10 I338 F11

SI2312DS
SBYV27-200 1N5819
3V3 3309 C5 7320 H13 I339 G7

3325

7309
12V

2321

100n
3 MRT

47K
BZX384-C6V8 BAS316
3V3

6315
GNDHOT GNDHOT GNDHOT

2322

2323

100u
GNDHOT 9 3310 C5 7321 I9 I340 G4

1m
4 6322 3311 C9 7322 G12 I342 I12
3V3 3365 3361
TO DIGITAL BOARD

3312 C10 9301 E10 I343 H5

5

I336 6312 I332

GND GND 3K3 I327 5V 1K BZX384-C6V8 3313 D11 9304 F9 I344 H6
6 7312 3314 C11 9305 H11 I345 H8
12V 12V 2342 GND GND I329 3302 3303 55V BF422 F331 F333
I330 3322 32.8V 3315 C11 9306 B13 I346 H13
7 33VSTBY 3316 C12 C300 B8 I347 H10
8 300V

F GND GND
I331 1u 1K I333 1K I334 F
6 2V

3317 H6 F300 A11 I348 I3

8

3350
47R

1K
GND GND not used 3318 E3 F301 A12 I349 H10
7

9 F381 I335 2 3319 A7 F302 A12 I350 I5

DRAIN
HVS
DRIVER
SENSE

5V 5V 6317 3304 3307 I338 33.5V

TEA1507

9304 F334 3321 E4 F304 A7 I351 I6

3346
2K2
10 3322 F9 F305 A7 I352 I10

BZX79-B33
F335 BYD33D I337 10K 10K
3323 E11 F306 A5 I353 I13
11 F383

2326

2327

100n
6318
10n
GND 3324 G4 F307 A5 I354 I12
7313

F336
GND
12 F384
820R

3325 E10 F308 B1 I355 I7

820R
3366
3360

3363
3356

3367
DEMAG

1K5

1K8

2K2
5N 5N

F337
3326 G11 F309 B1 I356 H12
CTRL
GND
VCC

3327 H13 F310 B2 I357 H11

PH-B
F338 F339 5305 6319 GND GND GND F371 F372 1306 F341 F344 3328 H8 F311 B2 I361 I8
3 10 4301
G G
13,9V 1

5V 3
1V 4

3329 I13 F312 B7

F3422

VGNSTBY
I307 6321 2318 not used
3351 5VSTBY Bead BYD33D 12VSTBY 125mA 3330 I6 F313 B1
F363 F362 3326 F343 -26.9V

2304

2328
MP13 3331 I6 F314 B1
I339

2n2

22u
1M0
BAT254 2n2 GNDHOT 3349
47R F340 3332 I7 F315 C7
GNDHOT 7322 3333 I6 F316 C8
3324 GNDHOT 47R

3364
12VSTBY

10K
BAV21 I340

-29.5V BC857BW 3334 I7 F317 C9

33VSTBY 5VSTBY
560K 5VSTBY 3371 9305 3335 A9 F318 C8
-27.5V
not used

5Vreg GND GND

6316
2337

3336 A10 F319 C8

10p

47R not used

3337 B9 F320 C7

3327
680R
3328

3348
10K

1M
I343 3317 3359 3372 3338 B10 F321 D12
5V
I344

7311 3339 A11 F322 D13

1933 I357 I356
1 F348 1K 7310 I345 4K7 33R 3353 3354 3340 A11 F323 D7
7320
H 3V3 3V3 not used
H
2324

100n

2325

3341 A12 F324 D12

BZX384-C27
22u

4 1
2 F350 F349
TO DVD+RW BASIC ENGINE

3357 0V 3373 2K7 2K7

7314
TCET1108G

I346
5V 5V 3342 B11 F325 D13
GNDHOT

680R
3362

2338

100n
6324
F351 4.5V 4K7 BC847BW 33R 3343 B11 F326 D8
3 0.4V SI2306DS
GND GND 7308 3344 B12 F328 E3
3358

I347
10R

F352 BC847BW 10.4V PDTC124EU 20V 2332

4 3 2 3345 I7 F329 E7
GND

I349
4V6 4V6 GNDHOT GNDHOT 5.1V 3346 F7 F331 F13
3330 2329 3331 3332 GND 7321 3355 8.8V
5Vreg

5 F353 I342 1u0

100n I361

7319

GND
GND GND I348 3347 I3 F333 F13
F354 I350 470R I351 10R 5K6 GND 8.8V 47R BC846B 3348 H10 F334 F9

BAS316 BZX384-C8V2
100n

PDTC124EU
6

3329
2M2
5N 5N GND GND 3349 G10 F335 F9
2331

100n

2336

1
3347

4K7

F355 3350 F10 F336 G9

2334

100n
6314
7 7315
GND GND 3351 G3 F337 G9
TL431 8.1V 0V
8 F358 F357 3345
3Vreg

F359

3
0V 3352 E4 F338 G6
I 12V 12V I

I352

I353
I354
F360 2.5V I355 15K 3353 H11 F339 G8
PH-B not used GND GND GND 3354 H11 F340 G11
GNDHOT GNDHOT
3355 I9 F341 G13
3333

3334

6320
56K
4K7

2 GND 3356 G4 F342 G3

F361 3357 H7 F343 G12
3358 H8 F344 G13
GNDreg 3359 H9 F346 E13
IPFAIL

GNDreg GNDreg 3360 G4 F347 E13

8SW
STBY

STBY

5SW
GND 3361 F11 F348 H1
3362 H10 F349 H1
3363 G7 F350 H1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
TR 07007_001
F327 VDrain (Standby) F327 VDrain (no disc loaded) I324 VDrain (Standby) I324 VGate (no disc loaded) I325 VSource (Standby) I325 VSource (no disc loaded) 120303

A: DC, 100V/Div A: DC, 100V/Div A: DC, 1V/Div A: DC, 2V/Div A: DC, 50mV/Div A: DC, 50mV/Div
5us/Div 2us/Div 5us/Div 2us/Div 5us/Div 2us/Div
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 114

Analog Board for VAD8031: Power Supply (PS)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1300 A2
1301 B2
3361 F12
3362 H1 0
F346 E1 3
F347 E1 3
1302 A3 3363 G8 F348 G2
1303 E9 3364 G8 F349 A13
1304 B9 3365 F4 F350 G1
5.7V F30 0 F36 4 130 7 F301 F302 1306 G1 3 3366 G5 F351 A14
GND 5.2V
5VSTBY 1307 A1 2 3367 G5 F352 G2
3300 330 1 1308 D1 3 3368 D1 1 F353 G1
7317 T1 A

not use d
1309 A1 3 3371 H1 1 F354 E1 2

GND
MRT

3374

3375

3376

3377
470R

470R

470R

470R
3339
STD17NF03 L

4K 7
F305 2316 I303
3M3 I300 3M3 1931 B1 3372 H1 1 F355 E1 2
12VSTBY 1932 C1 3373 H1 1 F356 C9
47n 2310 I30 1
A A
2.5V

470p
2340
230 1 I302 1933 G1 3374 A1 3 F357 H2

GND
1n 7301 1934 E1 3375 A1 3 F358 G2

233 3
3319

47n

3
4R7
GND 1935 F1 3376 A1 3 F359 I9

334 1
2n2

3340

68K
4K 7
1302 I30 6 3306 333 5 3336 1936 B3 3377 A1 3 F360 H1

2
5300
DSP 220 R 470R I30 4 470R 7.9V 2301 A7 3378 D1 1 F361 I6
SRW28EC9-E02V0133 5Vreg I305
2302 B2 4301 G1 2 F362 G1 1
130 0 TL431 2303 B4 4304 F2 F363 G1 1
F307 7 13 630 0 5308 5.7V 5.2V GND GND GND F37 3 F374 1309 F349 F351 2304 G9 5300 A6 F364 A12
F306 F304
5V 2305 B8 5301 B1 3 F366 E8
F30 8 F309 1301 F311 F310 5302 22u 12V T 2A
SB340 2306 B9 5302 B4 F367 E9

7302
STP16NF06FP
2307 C5 5304 D6 F368 E9

3342
4K 7
2303 6302 630 3
T1,25A E I308

560 u
230 6
12

2305
2308 C6 5305 G9 F369 E9

1m
delete for HDD
1931

for Card Reader only

1936
HF2022R 1n F31 2 3337 I313 3338 2311 2.5V I309 2309 D4 5306 C8 F371 G1 3
1 4 1N4006GP SB340

for HDD only

I31 0C30 0 2310 A1 1 5307 E1 0 F372 G1 3

3305
B 220n B
2302

680K
3

5301
I311

1u0
1K 220R 1n 7304
2 2 2311 B1 1 5308 A9 F373 A12

3
630 1 9.3V

3344
2341

2339
1 2312 C8 5309 D9 F374 A13

3343

47K
4K7
1u

1u
I31 6

2
9452A 1N4006GP GNDreg GND GND 2313 C9 6300 A8 F381 D1
PSI-SUB
I312 3Vreg I315 2314 D6 6301 B4 F382 E14
I31 4 2315 E4 6302 B5 F383 D1

7 8

5VCR
GND GND

5V
F313 F314 TL431 2316 A8 6303 B8 F384 D1
1304

3
GNDHOT 18 6307 5306 F316 F356 F317 3.4V GND GND GND
2317 E4 6305 C4 I300 A6

5 6

1 2
3V 3
6305 630 6 F315 F319 2u2 F31 8 3.4V 7303 2318 G6 6306 C5 I301 A1 2
STPS5L40 T4 A
STS9NF30 L 2319 D9 6307 C8 I302 A7
193 2

3314
I31 7 1N4006GP 630 8

1K
1 1N4006GP 17 12V 2320 D9 6308 C8 I303 A8

560u
2312

2313
1m
3V3
2330 2.5V 2321 E11 6309 D5 I304 A10
2 2307 F320 STPS5L40 I31 8
C C 2322 E9 6310 D8 I305 A11

4
3V3
3 3V 3 1n 1n 730 5 2323 E10 6311 E5 I306 A3

3311
7.7V

3V3
2324 H4 6312 F8 I307 G4

1K
3V3

3316
3315
8K 2

4K7
4 GND GND 3312 2325 H5 6313 E8 I308 B8

2
3V3 16
GND I319 220R I32 0 2326 G1 1 6314 I10 I309 B12
5

3310
330K
330 8

330 9

2308
2327 G1 2 6315 E8 I310 B8

330K

330K

47n
TO DIGITAL BOARD

GND GND 14
6 GND TL431 2328 G1 0 6316 H5 I311 B9

2309

68u
12V 12V GND GND GND F32 1 F324 130 8 F32 2 F32 5 2329 I6 6317 F10 I312 B5
7 I321 12VSTBY 2330 C1 1 6318 G12 I313 B10
GND GND 15 F323 631 0 5309 500mA
12V 12V 2331 I4 6319 G9 I314 B4
8 PSC 2332 H1 4 6320 I10 I315 B11
22u

not use d
BYT42M
GND GND STPS3L60-C2 F326 33VSTBY

630 9

2314
2333 A8 6321 G4 I316 B5

SI2306DS
9 F38 1 GNDHOT
D D

7318
5V 5V 2334 I10 6322 F12 I317 C4

330u
2319

2320

2335

10u
1m
10 2335 D1 0 6324 H1 2 I318 C12
2336 I8 6325 E1 0 I319 C10

3313
100K
22.2V
11 F383 2337 H3 7301 A1 1 I320 C11
GND GND 530 4 I322 5
12 F384
7306 2338 H1 2 7302 B1 0 I321 D6

12V
3368 3378 22.2V
5N 5N GND GND GND 2339 B1 0 7303 C1 1 I322 D6
7307 1K5 1K5 I323 F382 2340 A3 7304 B1 1 I323 D12
PH- B 340V IO N

332 3
2341 B1 0 7305 C1 1 I324 E3

220K
2315

100 n
234 3
47p

I324 0.1V
1,9 V 2342 F4 7306 D1 2 I325 E5
5N
F32 8

0V I325 PDTC124EU 2343 E11 7307 E4 I326 E10

STP3NC60FP 9301 3300 A6 7308 H1 3 I327 F1 1
1934
GND GND GND F347 F34 6 3301 A6 7309 E11 I329 F1 1
E E
1
not used -5.5V
1N4003
12V 12V 5NSTBY 3302 F1 1 7310 H8 I330 F3
3321

3352

6311
0R47

0R68
100 R
2317
3318

1n

2
GND GND F329 631 3 F36 6 F36 7 1303 F36 8 F369 530 7 I32 6 6325 -5.5V F354 3303 F1 1 7311 H8 I331 F4
11
3 5N 3304 F1 1 7312 F1 2 I332 F8
GND GND T1A 22u F355 3305 B3 7313 G3 I333 F1 1
SBYV27-200 1N5819

SI2312DS
MRT 12V 3306 A4 7314 H5 I334 F1 2

3325

7309
100n
4

2321
47K
5V 5V

BAS316
GNDHOT GNDHOT GNDHOT 9 3307 F1 1 7315 I6 I335 F6

6315

100u
GNDHOT

2322

2323
1m
EH- B 3365 3361 6322 3308 C5 7317 A1 1 I336 F8
5VCR
3309 C5 7318 D1 0 I337 F1 0

I336 6312 I332

3K3 I327 5V 1K BZX384-C6V8 3310 C5 7319 I11 I338 F1 1
7312

BZX384-C6V8
for Card Reader or HDD onl y 3311 C1 0 7320 H1 4 I339 G8
2342 GND GND I329 3302 3303 55V BF42 2 32.8V F331 F333
TO PCMCI A

1935 I33 0 3322 3312 C1 0 7321 I10 I340 G5

33VSTBY
F F 3313 D1 2 7322 G12 I342 I12
1
8 300V

GND
2
GND 4304 I331 1u 1K I33 3 1K I334
3314 C1 2 9301 E10 I343 H6
6 2V

5VCR 12V 47R

3350
for HDD onl y
3315 C1 2 9302 G2 I344 H6

1K
not use d
7

B2B-PH- K I335 2 3316 C1 2 9304 F10 I345 H8

DRAI N

631 7 330 4 330 7 I33 8 33.5V

HVS

9304 F334
3317 H6 9305 H1 2 I346 H13
DRIVER

3346
SENSE

2K 2
not used
TEA1507

F335 I337 10K 10K 3318 E3 C300 B8 I347 H11

BYD33 D

BZX79-B33
1933 3319 A7 F300 A12 I348 I3

100n
2326

2327

6318
10n
F350 F348 3321 E4 F301 A1 3 I349 H10
1

F336
7313

3V3 3V3 3322 F1 0 F302 A13 I350 I6

336 6
3360

3363
820R
3356

3367
820R

1K 5

1K 8

2K 2
DEMAG

2 3323 E12 F304 A8 I351 I7

F337
CTRL
GND

NC
VCC

3324 G4 F305 A7 I352 I11

3
GND GND F338 3 10 F339 5305 6319 GND GND GND 4301 F371 F372 1306 F341 F344 3325 E11 F306 A6 I353 I14
G F35 3 F35 2
G 3326 G1 2 F307 A6 I354 I13
TO BASIC ENGINE

13,9 V 1

5V 3
1V 4
F342 2

4 VGNSTBY
I307 6321 2318 not used
5VCR 5VCR 3351 5VSTBY Bea d BYD33 D 12VSTBY 125mA 3327 H1 3 F308 B1 I355 I7
F36 3 F362 332 6 F343 -26.9V
5 MP1 3 3328 H8 F309 B2 I356 H12

2304

2328
I33 9

22u
2n2
GND GND 1M0
BAT254 2n2 GNDHOT 334 9
47R F340 3329 I13 F310 B3 I357 H11
6 9302 GNDHOT 7322
5N 5N 3324 GNDHOT 12VSTBY 47R 3330 I6 F311 B2 I361 I8

3364
-29.5V BC857B W
BAV2 1 I340

10K
7 F358 33VSTBY 5VSTBY 3331 I7 F312 B7
GND GND 560K 5VSTBY 3371 9305 -27.5V 3332 I7 F313 B1
F360 F357 GND GND
not used

8 5Vreg 3333 I7 F314 B2

6316
2337

10p

12V 12V 47R not use d

3334 I7 F315 C7

3327
3328

3348
680R
10K
3335 A1 0 F316 C9

1M
PH- B I34 3 331 7 5V 3359 3372
I34 4

7311 3336 A10 F317 C9

1K 4K 7 33R 335 3 I35 7 3354 I356
3337 B10 F318 C9
H H
7310 I345
not used 7320
3338 B1 0 F319 C8
100n
2324

2325

22u

4 1 3357 0V 3373 2K 7 2K7

BZX384-C27

I34 6
3339 A12 F320 C7
TCET1108 G
7314

GNDHOT

100 n
233 8
3362
680R

6324
4.5V 4K 7 0.4V BC847BW 33R 3340 A12 F321 D12
7308 SI2306DS
3341 A12 F322 D13

I34 7
3358

BC847BW 20V
10R

3 2 10.4V PDTC124EU 233 2 3342 B12 F323 D7

GND

I349
GNDHOT GNDHOT 8.8V 5.1V 3343 B12 F324 D13
3330 2329 3331 3332 GND 732 1 3355 I34 2 1u0
5Vreg

7319
I36 1

3344 B1 2 F325 D13

GND
I348
I35 0 470R I351 10R 5K 6 GND 8.8V 47R BC846 B 3345 I7 F326 D8
100n

2M2
3329
GND GND 3346 F8 F328 E3

BZX384-C8V2
PDTC124EU
1
100n

100n
334 7

2331

2336
4K 7

3347 I3 F329 E8

100 n
233 4
7315

6314
TL431 3345
8.1V 0V 3348 H1 0 F331 F1 3
3Vreg

F35 9

I I
3 0V 3349 G1 1 F333 F1 3

I35 2

I35 3
I35 4
2.5V I355 15K 3350 F1 1 F334 F1 0
GNDHOT GNDHOT
not used GND GND GND 3351 G4 F335 F1 0

BAS316
3352 E5 F336 G9
3333

3334

6320
56K
4K7

2 GND
3353 H1 1 F337 G9
F361
3354 H1 2 F338 G6
3355 I10 F339 G9
GNDreg 3356 G5 F340 G12
IPFAI L

GNDreg GNDreg 3357 H7 F341 G13

8SW
GND
STBY

STBY

5SW
3358 H8 F342 G3
3359 H9 F343 G12
3360 G5 F344 G14

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
F327 VDrain (Standby) F327 VDrain (no disc loaded) I324 VDrain (Standby) I324 VGate (no disc loaded) I325 VSource (Standby) I325 VSource (no disc loaded) TR 13020_001
260803

A: DC, 100V/Div A: DC, 100V/Div A: DC, 1V/Div A: DC, 2V/Div A: DC, 50mV/Div A: DC, 50mV/Div
5us/Div 2us/Div 5us/Div 2us/Div 5us/Div 2us/Div
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 115

Analog Board: Multi Sound Processing (MSP)

7
1600 F7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1960 E1
2600 A6
2601 A6

RSA1

RSA2
8SW 5SW 2602 A7

8SW
GND 2603 A7

5SW
I601 2604 A9
GND GND 2605 F5
2606 B8
2607 C2

2600

2601

2611
2602

2603

100n
10u

47u
10n

10u
A 3600
A

4601
2608 C9
I603 10K 2609 C2
5SW1
I602 I624 I625 I604 2610 C8
8SW 5SW 7.6V 2611 A7
7600

2604
0V 0V

10n
GND GND 2612 D8
2.6V 5.9V
MSP3415G 18 10 8 9 4 42 33 34

5600
2616 E8

10u
2617 E8

ADR_CL

ADR_SEL

D_CTR_IO1

D_CTR_IO0

TESTEN

VREFTOP

AHVSUP

CAPL_M
3601 I615 5V 2618 E9
12 GND
SCLSW I2C_CL 2619 E9
100R I616
3603 5V 13 2620 F7
SDASW I2C_DA QFP44 I614

2606

100n
11 2621 F7
100R 14
STBYQ
2623 F6

BAS316
B I2S_CL 5.1V
B

6600

3602
4K7
I605 2626 E2
15 19
I2S_WS DVSUP 2627 E2
16 5V 3600 A8
I2S_DA_OUT I617 GND
22 3601 B2
RESETQ
17 3602 B9
I2S_DA_IN1 5.1V
3603 B2
21
3606 E2

2608
I2S_DA_IN2

10u
S1...4 I2SL/R I2SL/R
DACM_R 26 3607 E2
2607 1.5V FM1 LOUDSPEAKER R D/A
GND

3 ANA_IN- 3611 D9
FM2 LOUDSPEAKER 3612 E8
56p DEMODULATOR NICAM A DACM_L 27
I607 2609 I608
1.5V LOUDSPEAKER L 4601 A5
2 ANA_IN+ NICAM B D/A GND 5600 A8
C SIF1
56p
C 5601 F5
5602 F6
6600 B9
2610 7600 A3
F6001 E1
43 MONO_IN IDENT IDENT 10n F6002 E1
DFP
F6004 E1
2612 I601 A7
I609
36 I602 A4
AGNDC
4u7 I603 A6
HEADPHONE R 3.8V
A/D SCART-L I604 A7
D D I605 B8
I607 C1
41 SC1_IN_R GND
SCART-R HEADPHONE L I608 C3
A/D
I609 D8
40 SC1_IN_L SC1_OUT_R 30 3.8V 3611 I610 F7
SCART-R AFER
1960
D/A I611 F7
2626 100R I612 F5
I630 3606 I620 I623 3612
1 F6001 38 SC2_IN_R SC1_OUT_L 31 I613 F6
from DV - Board

DVAR SCART-L AFEL

F6002 2u2 1K 3.8V D/A 3.8V 100R I614 B8
GND

2
GND I615 B3

2618

2619
37 SC2_IN_L

4n7

4n7
3 I616 B3
GND

2616

2617
2627 SCART Switching Facilities I617 B8

1n

1n
I631 I621
E 4
F6004 3607
E I620 E3

XTAL_OUT
DVAL
3.8V GND GND I621 E3

XTAL_IN
2u2 1K
AHVSS

AVSUP
VREF2

VREF1

PH-B
DVSS
AVSS

I623 E8
ASG

NC GND GND

TP
I624 A5
I625 A5
25 29 35 39 44 20 23 24 28 32 1 7 5 6
I630 E2
2.3V 2.2V I631 E2
5SW1
5V 1600
I610 I611
5SW HC-49/U
GND GND
5601 I612 5602 I613 18M432

F F

2620

2621
3p3

3p3
10u 10u
2605

2623
10u

100n

GND GND GND GND TR 07008_001

120303

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 116

Analog Board: VPS Analog Board: Follow Me (FOME)

1990 D1 2934 B1 2937 D1 3932 C4 3935 E1 5932 A3 I988 B2 I991 C1 I994 C1 I997 D1 2940 A2 2944 D4 3937 C1 3941 D3 3945 E3 3950 A3 3954 C2 7934-B B4 I951 B3 I956 D2
2932 B4 2935 C1 2938 B3 3933 C4 3936 E3 7931 B2 I989 C1 I992 C4 I995 D1 I998 E1 2941 B3 2945 D2 3938 C1 3942 E1 3946 E2 3951 B2 7932 B2 7934-C C2 I952 B3 I957 D2
2933 B4 2936 C1 3931 B2 3934 D1 5931 A4 I987 B4 I990 C4 I993 C1 I996 D1 I999 E3 2942 D2 2946 E1 3939 C3 3943 E2 3947 E4 3952 B3 7933 B3 7934-D C3 I954 C3 I958 D3
2943 D4 2947 E3 3940 D1 3944 E3 3948 A2 3953 B2 7934-A A2 F950 A2 I955 C1 I959 D3

A_YCVBS
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

FOME
5SW
I994 5SW

5SW
I989

2940

GND

F950
100n
3948

5931
10u
5SW A 4K7 A

2
A: DC, 1 V/Div
A A

100K
3950
A: DC, 200mV/Div
20ns/Div 10us/Div 7934-A
LM339D
5932

12

GND
5SW

3
5SW

2938

100n

2932

100n

2933

47u

4
GND GND I951
3951 3952

GND
GND GND
22K 15K
3931
47K

GND GND 3953 I952 2941

GND
GND
B B B B

BC847BW

BC847BW
I987
4K7 10u
2934

100n

I988

7932

7933
7931
STV5348 5 6 2 4 18 22 3

1
POL

VDDD
MA_|SL

VDDA
L23
STTV

FFB

7934-B
0.4V I989
1 CVBS Data
LM339D
DATA DECODING 5V
CLAMPING
Clock
SYNCHRONIZING DATA DV_ 19 I990 3932
I991

3954
2935

I954
4K7
28 CBLK DATA EXTRACTION PROCESSING

6
47K
I992 3937
C 3933
C

5SW
100n 1.6V 20
C C

GND
TEST1
GND 2K2
Address

21 VCR_|TV 0V 47K
I993

CTRL
Data

5V 27 3938 I955 3939

TEST2

5SW

14

13
2936 2.4V I994 24 XTI 2K2 4K7
8 PAGES
HC-49/U
13M875

OSCILLATOR 7934-C 7934-D

22p
1990

MEMORY
GND

GND LM339D LM339D

2937 23 XTO FREQUENCY
Address

BLAN 12
CTRL

SYNTHETIZER
Data

22p 2.7V I995

10

11
TIME BASE

9
I996
D D D D
GND

25 VSSO R 8
I956 2942 I958 2944

GND

GND
DISPLAY G9
3934 I997 16 SCL 2n2 2n2
SCLSW INTERFACE
I2C BUS 3940 I957 2945 3941 I959 2943

GND

GND
5SW

5SW
100R 4.5V B 10
3935 I998 INTERFACE 10M 180p 10M 180p
ODD_|EVEN

17 SDA
RGBREF

SDASW Y 15
100R

3942

3943

3944

3945
4.5V

33K

33K

33K

33K
COR_
VSSD

VSSA

7 26 11 14 13 3946 3947
E E

GND

GND
E E
I999

0V 33K 33K

2946

1u
GND GND

2947
3936

1u
10K

CVBSIN1

VFV
GND TR 07010_001
TR 07009_001 120303
120303

1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 117

Analog Board: Digital In / Out (DIGIO)

1951 A4 2585 C3 2590 A3 3582 D2 5580 A2 7580-A C2 7580-D D3 F4102 A4 I488 C2 I491 D2
2580 A3 2586 D3 3580 A3 3584 C1 5581 A1 7580-B C3 7580-E C3 F4103 A4 I489 C3 I492 C3
2581 A1 2587 D2 3581 C2 3585 C3 6580 C4 7580-C C3 7580-F D3 I487 A3 I490 C1 I493 B4

1 2 3 4
from PS
5V

1951
F4103 YKC21-3416
3

I487
DIGITAL
5581 3 4 2590 3580 F4102 2
5VDD OUT
A 10u
2 150p 75R
1
A
GND
2581

100u

2580

100n
1 6 GND

5580 6RG
Ground not connected
to the rear plane
GND
GND

I493

B B

7580-A 7580-B
PC74HCU04D PC74HCU04D
3584 1 2 I488 3 4 I489 2585
DAOUT A Y A Y

BZX384-C6V8
from DAC_ADC 470R 100n

not used
7580-C 6580
3581 PC74HCU04D
C I490 2K2
5
A Y
6 C
7580-E GND
PC74HCU04D I492
11 10 3585
A Y
5VDD 560R
2586

7580-F
1n

PC74HCU04D
330R
3582

13 12
A Y

GND
D I491 7580-D
PC74HCU04D D
14
9 Vcc 8
A Y
2587

Vss
1u

7
GND

GND

E E

delete for IOE

TR 07011_001
120303

1 2 3 4
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 118

Analog Board 603 3033: Audio Converter (DAC_ADC)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1001 A7 4003 F1
1900 B1 4004 F1

3V3DD
I002

3V3DD
3001 from PS 2001 A4 4006 A8
3V3 5VSTBY 5NSTBY 5V 5N 2002 A4 5001 A8
6001 3008 2R2 2003 A6 6001 A1

2002

2003
2001

100n

100n
47u
IPFAIL 5VSTBY 3002
from PS 2004 A9 6002 B1
BAS316 1K 7001
2R2 2005 A9 6003 F3
13 4 UDA1334BTS

not used
2006 A2 7001 A6

Bead
4006

5001

2004

2005

100u
47u
GND I003 GND VDDA VDDD GND 2007 B6 7002-A C9
A F0021
1.6V
1 BCK
F009 F008 1001 F007 F006
A 2008 B7 7002-B E9

3V3DD
DAOUT 1.6V 2 WS DIGITAL 2009 C5 7003 B4
to DIGIO
INTERFACE 2010 C6 7005 D5
1.2V 3 DATAI 125mA GND GND
5VSTBY 5NSTBY 5V 5N 2011 C6 7006 E1
SFOR0 11 MP13
2012 E9 7008 C2
DE-EMPHASIS 3009 3010 3052

3003
GND 2013 D6 7009 C3

2006
SFOR1 7

10K
47p
I006 2.1V 6 SYSCLK 2014 D6 7010 C4
4K7 100K 3K3

3007
47K
INTERPOLATION 2015 D5 7011 F7

1%
1900 0V 8 MUTE 1% 1%
FILTER 2016 D5 F0001 E1

4n7 5%
not used

4n7 5%
22

3011
2022
3005

3004
22R

22R

47p
GND GND

1R
GND GND 2024 2018 D9 F0002 E1

2033

470p
2008

2037
9 DEEM

5% NP0

2038
1n
21 NOISE SHAPER 2019 E6 F0003 D1
DAOUT 3V3DD 27p

2007
10 PCS 2020 E7 F0005 D1

10u
DAC
DAC
20
3006

B B
22R

2035 2022 B4 F0007 D1

3013
22R
GND

330R 1%
19 I033 2023 F1 F0009 D1
3.3V 14 VOL VOR 16
10p 2024 B8 F0011 C1

3012
5V GND 1.6V GND GND GND GND not used
18 PDTA124EU 1.6V 2025 D7 F0012 C1
BAS316
6002

7003 VSSA VSSD VREF-DAC 2026 D8 F0014 C1

17 3V3DD 0V I008
15 5 12 4 2029 F1 F0016 C1
1.6V 0V 2 0V 2031 D2 F0021 A1
16 F0016 I011
D_IKILL 2032 F8 F006 A8

3014
10K
15 3V3DD 1 F010 ARDAC 2033 B7 F007 A7
GND

2009

100n
2010

47u
MC33078 to IOA, IOV
from / to Digital Board

100R
3048

GND 2034 D7 F008 A7

F0014 3 8
14 7002-A 2035 B8 F009 A7
D_PCMCLK

3044
10K
13 2036 D8 F010 C9
GND

C GND
12 F0012 3046
1.2V
7008 7009
GND GND GND GND GND
2011
3024 I012 3027 GND
C 2037 B7
2038 B8
F011 E9
I002 A5
D_DATA0 BC847BW BC847BW 7010
F0011 0V PDTC124EU 2039 D8 I003 A4
11 470R 3045 0.6V 10u 47K 4K7
D_WCLK 1% 2040 D7 I006 A4
3V3DD 1%
10 2.7V 100K 3V3DD 3053 3054 3001 A4 I008 B8
GND

NP0 5%
GND 3002 A4 I011 C5
100K
3047
2031

2034

470p
2025
2u2

1n
9 F0009 100K 3K3 3003 A3 I012 C7
D_BCLK 1%
GND 2026 3004 B2 I013 D6

4n7 5%
5%
3015

3017
8
GND

2R2

2R2
GND 3005 B1 I014 E2

2015

2040

2039
100n
GND GND GND

4n7
F0007 3018 2016 3.2V 3006 B2 I015 D4

GND
7 27p
A_PCMCLK GND GND 3007 B6 I018 E7
6 22R 47p 2036

3029
3008 A2 I020 E1
GND

D D

1R
GND not used I013
GND 3009 A7 I021 F1
5 F0005 7005 10p
A_DAT 1.6V 3.2V GND GND not used 3010 A8 I022 E2
5N

2014

100u
UDA1361TS 16 9

100n
2013
4 3011 B8 I028 F2
GND

GND VDDA VDDD 3012 B8 I030 F1

8 SYSCLK
F0003 3019 I015 2018

330R
3030
3 3013 B2 I032 E2

1%
A_WCLK
14 FSEL VREFP 5
GND

CLOCK 3014 C4 I033 B6

DECIMATION
2 F0002 3020 22R GND GND ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011 100n
CONTROL 3015 D6 I036 E1

FILTER
A_BCLK 7 PWON VREFN 4 0V GND
4 3017 D6
1 22R
GND

GND I032 1.6V 1 VINL 6 0V 3018 D4

VREF 2
F0001 ADC
3026

ALDAC 3019 D3
47K

FMN 3V3DD 1.6V 1.6V GND 7 F011 to IOA, IOV

I018 MC33078 3020 E2
E 7006 3.3V I014 1.6V 3 VINR A: DC, 500mV/Div 5 8
7002-B E 3024 C6

2019

100n
ADC 500us/Div 3026 E2
BC857BW I022 DC-CANCEL

2020

47u
GND 3027 C7
I036 3035 I020 FILTER 100n

5VSTBY
3034

GND
1.6V 11 BCK 3029 D8
47K

PWONSW GND
DIGITAL DATAO 13 GND 3030 D8
from IOV 10K 3.2V 1.6V 12 WS INTERFACE 2012
GND 3034 E2
1.2V
BAS316

1.6V 6 SFOR 3035 E1

6003

VSSD VSSA 5V 3039 F2

2023 3041 F2
I021 4003 3039 10 15
GND 7011 3043 F5
ALADC
from IOA 10K 3043 GND GND BC857BW 3044 C3
47u
5.1V 3045 C3
F I014/I032
22R
3049 4.1V
DAC_MUTE
to IOV
F 3046 C2
3047 D3
2029 I030 I028
4004 3041

100K
3050

3051
2032
3048 C2

22K
10n
ARADC 4K7
from IOA 10K 3049 F6
47u
3050 F7
from IOV

3051 F8
A: DC, 500mV/Div
ION

GND GND 5NSTBY TR 07012_001 3052 A9

500us/Div
120303 3053 C8
3054 C9

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 119

Analog Board 603 3028: Audio Converter (DAC_ADC)

1001 H10 F006 H11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1900 C2 F007 H11
2000 H13 F008 H10
2001 H13 F009 H10
2002 B6 F010 E14
2003 B6 F011 B14
5V 5V 5VSTBY
2004 B7 I001 D3
2006 B10 I002 C5
5VSTBY 2007 B12 I004 D5

100R
3029

3031

3045
2008 B11 I005 D5

10K

1K0
2009 B12 I006 D5
2010 C13 I007 D5
A 7005
A 2011 B13
2012 C13
I008 I1
I009 H1
1.2V 3049 7009
7006 BC847BW 5.1V 2013 E12 I013 F7
BC847BW BC857BW
3025 0.6V 0V 4K7 2014 F13 I014 G6
7010 5.1V DAC_MUTE 2016 B3 I015 F6
2.7V 100K
PDTC124EU 5V 4.1V to IOV 2017 C13 I018 G7

100K
3051

3052
2049
2018 E5 I020 G2

470R

22K
3015

10n
2u2 50V

1N4148
2002

GND
100K
2016

3011

6003
2019 E8 I021 H2
100u 6.3V 2020 E8 I022 G6
AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND
2021 E8 I023 D8

AGND
2003 2004

GND
GND GND 5NSTBY 2023 D10 I029 G6

1%
5V 2025 D11 I030 I2

NP0 5%
GND GND GND GND

not used

NP0 5%
B B

NP0 5%
7004 100n 100n

2006

2008

2009

100p
3004

27p
2007
1n0

1n0

33K
2026 E4 I031 G6

AGND
ION AD1852 28 18 2011
from IOV 2027 E4 I032 G6
DVDD AVDD 100n 2028 E4 I036 G1
6 NC
OUTL+ 17 2.3V 3001 3008 3010 1.2V 3 7003-A 2030 E10

MULTIBIT SIGMA-
8
2.1V 2 MCLK AUTO MC33078 2032 E11

DELTA MOD
5K6 27K 7K5
1 F011
0V CLOCK OUTP. 1% 1% 1% 2033 E12
7 192|48_ ALDAC
DIVIDE DAC BUFFER 0V 2035 F7
1.2V 2 to IOA, IOV
0V 10 96|48_ CIRC 2.3V 2036 F5
OUTL- 16 4
IPFAIL 2037 F7

AGND
from PS 2012
F0021 2038 F8

1%
3005

3006
2041 F13

4K7

4K7
100n

3013
DAOUT 3 CLATCH ZEROL 22

7K5
2042 G8
C to DIGIO
4 CCLK
SER. 5N C 2043 G8
1900 CONTR. 2017 2045 F10
5V INTERF.
22
GND

GND GND 5 CDATA 2047 F11

GND 2.3V 3009 3016 100p

MULTIBIT SIGMA-
OUTR+ 12 NP0 5%
2048 H2
21

DELTA MOD
BAS316

8X INTERP.
DAOUT 7001 I002 1.6V 25 L|RCLK 5K6 27K 2010 2049 B9
6005

OUTP. 1% 1% 2050 I2
20 PDTA124EU
ATT./ DAC BUFFER 27p
1.6V 26 BCLK 2051 E3

NP0 5%
MUTE

NP0 5%
19 I001 OUTR- 13 2.3V not used

2023

2025
3001 B10

1n0

1n0
I004 SER.
1.2V 27 SDATA 3004 B11
18 5.1V DATA 3017
INTERF. 3005 C5
1N4148

20 IDPM1
6004

8X INTERP.
17 ATT./ ZEROR 8 33K 3006 C5
0V
D 16 F0016
I005 5V 21 IDPM0 MUTE AGND AGND
1%
D 3008 B11
3009 C10
D_IKILL I006 0V 23 MUTE FILTR 14 2.4V
3010 B12
15
GND

VOLT. 3011 B3
from / to Digital Board

GND I007 5V 24 PD_|RST

F0014 REF. I023 3012 E4
14 3054 FILTB 19
D_PCMCLK 9 DEEMP 3013 C12
13 22R 3.3V
GND

AGND AGND AGND AGND AGND 3014 E10

10u 25V

GND DGND AGND

3012

2018

3020

3021
3015 B2
10K

4K7

10K

10u 25V

10u 25V
12 F0012 3019

2019

2020

2021

100n

1%
D_DATA0 1 11 15 3016 C11

NP0 5%

NP0 5%
not used
NP0 5%
11 F0011 3022 22R 3017 D13

2030

2032

2033

100p
5V

2013
3027
1n0

1n0

27p
33K
D_WCLK
3018 F10
10 22R
GND

GND GND 5V 5V GND GND AGND 3019 E3

E GND
9 F0009 3023 AGND AGND AGND 3014 3030 3032 1.2V 5 8
7003-B E 3020 E5
D_BCLK MC33078 3021 E5
8 22R 5K6 27K 7K5 F010 3022 E3
GND

7
GND 1% 1% 1% ARDAC 3023 E2
2051

2026

2027

2028
47p

47p

47p

47p

7 F0007 3024 1.2V 6 0V to IOA, IOV 3024 E3

A_PCMCLK 3V3DD 3V3DD
22R 4 3025 A3
6
GND

3026 F2

1%
GND
5 F0005 3026 3027 E11

3036
7K5
A_DAT GND GND GND GND 2035 3028 F3

GND
22R 5N
4

3034

3035
not used
GND

2R2

2R2
2041 3029 A3
GND 100n
F0003 3028 3030 E11
3 GND 3031 A4
F A_WCLK
2 F0002 3033 22R 3.2V 3018 3039
100p NP0 5%
F 3032 E12
A_BCLK I013 2014 3033 F2
not used

1 22R 7007 5K6 27K

GND

2036

3034 F7
47p

GND 3.2V 1% 1% 27p

2037

100u
UDA1361TS 16 9

100n
2038
F0001 not used 3035 F8

NP0 5%
FMN VDDA VDDD 3036 F12

NP0 5%
1.6V I015

2045

2047
8 SYSCLK

1n0

1n0
3039 F11
14 FSEL VREFP 5 3040 3040 G13
GND

CLOCK DECIMATION
AGND AGND
CONTROL 3042 H2

AGND
I022 33K
FILTER
1.6V 7 PWON VREFN 4 3043 H3
1%
I032 AGND AGND 3044 H3
1 VINL VREF 2
ADC 3045 A5
1.6V I018 1.6V
G G 3047 I3

2042
3049 A8

100n
2043

47u
3V3DD 1.6V I014 3 VINR 3051 B9
ADC
DC-CANCEL 3052 B9
7008 FILTER
BC857BW 1.6V I029 11 BCK 3053 I3
AGND AGND
I036 I031 DIGITAL DATAO 13 3054 D3
3042 I020
3043

1.6V 12 WS
47K

PWONSW
INTERFACE 4000 H11
1.2V
from IOV 10K 4001 I2
3.2V 6 SFOR
VSSD VSSA 4002 I2
from PS 5001 H11
1.6V 10 15 3V3 5VSTBY 5NSTBY 6003 B4
GND 5V 5N
6004 D2
H H
3044
47K

GND AGND 6005 C2

7001 C3

not used

Bead
7003-A B13

4000

5001

2000

2001

100u
47u
GND 7003-B E13
F009 F008 1001 F007 F006
7004 B5

3V3DD
I009 2048 7005 A3
I021 4001 3047
ALADC 125mA 7006 A3
5VSTBY 5NSTBY GND 5N GND
from IOA 47u 10K MP13 5V 7007 F6
I014/I032 ARDAC/ALDAC F010/F011 7008 G2
7009 A9
I008 2050 I030 7010 A5
4002 3053
F0001 F2
I ARADC
from IOA 47u 10K I F0002 F2
F0003 F2
F0005 F2
F0007 E2
A: DC, 500mV/Div A: DC, 500mV/Div F0009 E2
500us/Div 500us/Div F0011 E2
TR 07013_001 F0012 E2
120303 F0014 D2
F0016 D2
F0021 C2

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 120

Layout Analog Board 603 3033 (Top View)

TR 07014_001
120303
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 121

Layout Analog Board 603 3033 (Overview Bottom View)

Part 1
TR 07015a_001

Part 2
TR 07015b_001

TR 07015_001
120303
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 122

Layout Analog Board 603 3033 (Part 1 Bottom View)

TR 07015a_001
120303
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 123

Layout Analog Board 603 3033 (Part 2 Bottom View)

TR 07015b_001
120303
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 124

Layout Analog Board 603 3028 (Top View)

TR 07016_001
120303
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 125

Layout Analog Board 603 3028 (Overview Bottom View)

Part 2
TR 07017b_001

Part 1
TR 07017a_001

TR07017_001
120303
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 126

Layout Analog Board 603 3028 (Part 1 Bottom View)

TR 07017a_001
120303
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 127

Layout Analog Board 603 3028 (Part 2 Bottom View)

TR07017b_001
120303
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 128

UP Sub Board: Central Controller (CECO)

0606 B15 2801 B8 2810 B3 2819 A5 2828 H13 3801 A8 3810 E10 3819 G15 3828 F13 3837 B4 3846 A4 3856 F3 3866 A2 3875 C4 3887 I14 6800 H1 7804 B4 7815 H3 F8003 B1 F804 B14 F813 C14 F822 C15 F831 C15 F840 E8 F843 F4 F852 E8 F8702 H9 F8804 I8 I805 F10 I814 F2 I823 H2
1801 B8 2802 B8 2811 C3 2820 A6 2829 H5 3802 E1 3811 C3 3820 H5 3829 A4 3838 H5 3847 B7 3857 G2 3867 A2 3876 F12 3888 F2 6801 A2 7805 B14 7816 A3 F8004 B1 F805 C14 F814 C14 F823 C15 F832 C15 F8401 H11 F844 D15 F8603 E1 F8703 H9 F8805 I8 I806 G5 I815 H3 I824 H3
1805 B9 2803 B6 2812 E14 2821 A3 2830 H4 3803 E2 3812 C2 3821 E14 3830 G12 3839 H1 3848 C9 3858 G9 3868 F3 3878 H8 3889 G8 6802 A5 7806 A9 7817 F2 F8005 B1 F806 C14 F815 C14 F824 C15 F833 C15 F8402 H11 F845 D15 F8604 E1 F8704 H10 F8806 I8 I807 H4 I816 A2 I825 G7
1980 B1 2804 B6 2813 B8 2822 A2 2831 H9 3804 B2 3813 G15 3822 E15 3831 H11 3840 H3 3849 H2 3860 G10 3869 I3 3879 E2 4801 F4 6803 G11 7807 E15 7818 H6 F8006 B1 F807 C14 F816 C14 F825 C15 F834 C15 F8403 H11 F846 A7 F8606 E1 F8705 H10 F8807 I8 I808 H4 I817 I4
1984 I11 2805 B6 2814 B9 2823 I4 2832 G8 3805 C3 3814 H10 3823 E14 3832 G1 3841 H2 3850 B4 3861 H2 3870 I4 3881 D2 4802 C4 6804 G8 7808 H13 7821 C2 F8007 B1 F808 C14 F817 C14 F826 C15 F835 C15 F8405 H11 F847 A3 F8607 E2 F8706 I10 F8808 I9 I809 A8 I818 I6
1986 E1 2806 B11 2815 H1 2824 I4 2833 G14 3806 B3 3815 G10 3824 I7 3833 G11 3842 H2 3851 E9 3862 A6 3871 I6 3882 D2 5801 B12 6805 F8 7810 G14 7822 B2 F8008 B1 F809 C14 F818 C14 F827 C15 F836 D15 F8406 H12 F848 E8 F8608 E1 F8707 H10 I801 B8 I810 B10 I819 I14
1987 I9 2807 A8 2816 A5 2825 I6 2834 H14 3807 D10 3816 C2 3825 E8 3834 G9 3843 I1 3852 G12 3863 A1 3872 I6 3884 I14 5802 B14 7801 B11 7811 H13 7825 H5 F801 E12 F810 C14 F819 D14 F828 C15 F837 D15 F8407 H12 F849 B6 F8609 E2 F8708 H10 I802 B8 I811 E7 I820 I14
1988 I8 2808 B13 2817 G9 2826 I14 2835 H15 3808 D10 3817 F10 3826 H8 3835 G9 3844 I1 3854 G5 3864 A1 3873 I7 3885 I15 5803 A11 7802 A7 7813 H1 F8001 C1 F802 D11 F811 C14 F820 B15 F829 C15 F838 D15 F841 F8 F850 C4 F8610 F1 F8802 I8 I803 B8 I812 E7 I821 D4
2800 A9 2809 B14 2818 H2 2827 I15 3800 E2 3809 E10 3818 F11 3827 B2 3836 H10 3845 A4 3855 A8 3865 A2 3874 C4 3886 I15 5804 A6 7803 B12 7814 H3 F8002 C1 F803 D11 F812 C14 F821 B15 F830 C15 F839 D15 F842 F8 F851 C4 F8701 H9 F8803 I8 I804 B9 I813 A2 I822 D4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

from H8

from H8
from H10
5VSTBY 3V3STBY

8SC2
WSFI
7816 3V3STBY
4.7V BC847BW 3V3STBY

WU
3863 3864 3865 3866 F847 A(8:19)
3V3STBY 7802 7806

3801

10K
4R7 4R7 4R7 4R7 I813 3.5V 6802 3862 F846 PDTC124EU NCP301LSN30 AD(0:7)

BAT254 2807
A A
10K 3855 1 2
3867 I816 4.2V OUTP INP
220n 470R I809

3829
2821

2820
GND NC2 NC1 3V3STBY

10K
10n

10n
75R

Bead

A(0)
5804

2800

100n
BZM55-C3V9
TEMP_SENSE 3 5 4 3V3STBY

220m
2822

100n

6801

2819

100u
2816
3V3STBY_R

to G13
to FACO GNDD

Bead
3845

3846

5803
3V3STBY

1K0

33K

IPOR
GNDD GNDD GNDD 0606
1980 GNDD

Bead

Bead
5801

5802
GNDD
3837 2803

F849
F8008
A_YCVBS A_YCVBS GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD 2806 2809
8 GNDD GNDD
F8007 3827 to H3 12K 100n 2808
PWONSW PWONSW 3850 2804 100n 100n SOFTWARE
7 from E7 GNDD
B B
F8006 1K0 100n
3V3STBY 7801
TEMP_SENSE GNDD 18K

20
100n

2801

2802

2813

2814
74LVC573
from / to IOV

15p

15p

10p

10p
6 3804 2805
F8005 1 7805
IPOR_DC IPOR_DC GNDD GNDD GNDD I810 EN
11 37 M29W800DT-70N6
5 from I12 7822 ALE
F8004 10K 100n C1 A(0:7)

I801

I802

I803

I804
INT INT BSH111
7804 GNDD 7803 EPROM
3806

3847
2810

2 19
22K

10K
AD(0) A(0)
10p

4 F8003 to I12 1D
TMP91CW12AF/LIRP1 89 25 64 1801 1805 AD(1) 3 18 A(1) CY62128VLL-70SC 32 1Mx8/512Kx16 25 F820 A(1)
GNDD GNDD 0
3 DVCC1 DVCC2 DVCC3 AD(2) 4 17 A(2) VCC AD(0) F804 29 24 F821 A(2)
F8002 3805 0 1
92 AN0|P50 AD(3) 5 16 A(3) A(0) 12 AD(1) F805 31 23 F822 A(3)
SDA 0 1 2
2 93 AN1|P51 X1 28 CX-11F DT-38 AD(4) 6 15 A(4) A(1) 11 1 AD(2) F806 33 22 F823 A(4)
F8001 3811 100R 1 RAM NC 2 3
SCL 94 AN2|P52 H-OSC X2 26 24M576 32K768 AD(5) 7 14 A(5) A(2) 10 AD(3) F807 35 21 F824 A(5)
GNDD

2 3 4
1 100R
3874 95 AN3|ADTRG_|P53
CLOCK GEAR
EMU0 33 AD(6) 8 13 A(6) A(3) 9
3
128Kx8 AD(4) F808 38
4 5
20 F825 A(6)
10K F850 96 AN4|P54 EMU1 34 AD(7) 9 12 A(7) A(4) 8 AD(5) F809 40 19 F826 A(7)
C36 10-BIT 8-CH CLOCK DOUBLER 4 5 6
2811

97 AN5|P55 P96|XT1 31
3812

GND A(5) 7 AD(6) F810 42 18 F827 A(8)

10p
22K

5 6 7
C I818 7821
10K
3875
F851
98
99
AN6|P56
AN7|P57
A/D
CONVERTER
L-OSC P97|XT2
RESET_
32
30
not used
10 A(6)
A(7)
6
5
6
AD(7) F811
F812
44
30
7
D 0
8
8
7
F828
F829
A(9)
A(10) C

GNDD
BSH111 3816 3848 7 8 A 9
100 VREFH AM0 24 A(8) 27 0 F813 32 8M-1 6 F830 A(11)
GNDD
GNDD

8 A 9 10
1 VREFL AM1 29 A(9) 26 128K-1 F814 34 5 F831 A(12)
10K 10K 9 10 11
2 AVSS CPU ALE 43 ALE A(10) 23 F815 36 4 F832 A(13)
GNDD 3 AVCC P00|AD0 44 AD(0) A(11)
10
39
11 12
3 A(14)
3V3STBY 25 11 F816 12 13 F833
P01|AD1 45 AD(1) A(12) 4 F817 41 2 F834 A(15)
4802 3V3STBY 18 P90|TXD0 P02|AD2 46 AD(2) A(13)
12
43
13 14
1 A(16)
SCL 28 13 F818 15 F835
A: DC, 1 V/Div 14
to H13 not used 19 P91|RXD0 SIO/UART/IrDA P03|AD3 47 AD(3) A(14) 3 13 AD(0) F819 45 48 F836 A(17)
20us/Div PORT 0 AD(4) 14 0 15 16
20 P92|SCLK0|CTS0_ ( SIO0 ) P04|AD4 48 A(15) 31 14 AD(1) 17 F837 A(18)
SDA AD(5) 15 A-1 17
from/to H15 21 P93|TXD1 P05|AD5 49 A(16) 2 15 AD(2) 16 F838 A(19)
AD(6) 16 18
A_CVBS F8008 22 P94|RXD1 SIO/UART P06|AD6 50
F802 17 AD(3)
23 P95|SCLK1|CTS1_ P07|AD7 51 AD(7) RD_ 24 18 AD(4) 15 RY|BY_
( SIO1 ) OE DQ RB
P10|AD8|A8 52 A(8) 29 19 AD(5) 9 12 F845

D D
WE RP
I821 83 P60|SCK P11|AD9|A9 53 A(9) 22 20 AD(6) 10 11 F844
SERIAL BUS CE1 WE
84 P61|SO|SDA P12|AD10|A10 54 A(10) 30 21 AD(7) 13 NC 28 RD_
INTERFACE 3V3STBY_R CE2 7 OE
85 P62|SI|SCL WATCH P13|AD11|A11 55
3882

3881

14

VSS2

VSS1
A(11) 26 F839
47K

47K

CS0_
( SBI ) CE

WR_
PORT 1 P14|AD12|A12 56 A(12) 47

CS2_
A: DC, 500mV/Div I822 DOG TIMER P15|AD13|A13 57 A(13)
BYTE
3807 16
10us/Div 4 P70|TA0IN 8-BIT TIMER ( WDT ) P16|AD14|A14 58 A(14) A(16) 46 27 GNDD

F803
( TMRA0 ) P17|AD15|A15 59 A(15)
P20|A16|A0 60 A(16) A(17)
100K 3808 GNDD
GNDD GNDD 3V3STBY

F801
BE_FAN
5 P71|TA1OUT 8-BIT TIMER REAL- P21|A17|A1 61 A(17)
P22|A18|A2 65 A(18) A(18)
3809 100K GNDD PMBT2369
from FACO ( TMRA1 ) CLOCK P23|A19|A3 66 A(19) 7807
TIMER P24|A20|A4 67 A(19)
100K 3810 3821
PORT 2 THG WE
from/to Digital Board

1986 8-BIT TIMER ( RTC ) P25|A21|A5 68 from E2

100K 10K
( TMRA2 ) P26|A22|A6 69

3822
1

10K
GNDD GNDD F848
E E
3825
2 P27|A23|A7 70
FBIN FBIN
6 P72|TA3OUT 8-BIT TIMER RD_|P30 71
F852 3V3STBY
3 F8603 from H11 RD_ 10K
BE_FAN
4 F8604 ( TMRA3 ) WR_|P31 72 WR_
WE WE
5 to E13 HWR_|P32 73 I811
N. C. 3802 3V3STBY 3V3STBY
6 F8606 7 P73|TA4IN BUSRQ_|P34 75 F840 FLASH_TOSHIBA
D_RDY 8-BIT TIMER PORT 3 PWONSW to B2 3V3STBY

100K
3823
2812
7 22K F8607 3879 BUSAK_|P35 76

10n
A_RDY ( TMRA4 ) FAN_OFF 3851
8 F8608 3800 1K0 RW_|P36 77 I812
D_DATA
8 P74|TA5OUT P37 78
to FACO 3V3STBY
A_DATA
9 22K F8609 3803
8-BIT TIMER 4KB RAM 10K
3V3STBY 3V3STBY
CLOCK_ADJ

3876

3828
10 F8610 3888 SCOUT|P64 87

10K

10K
IRESET_DIG LEVELSW LEVELSW
1K0 ( TMRA5 ) 3817 3818
470R
3V3STBY P65 88 F841 to H8
PORT 6 P66 90
PA4 39 BOOT EXT_DL 2K2 4K7 GNDD GNDD
10FMN-SMT-A-TF 3.3V 8-BIT TIMER
PA5 40 RY|BY_ F842
( TMRA6 ) PORT A
3868

4801 PA6 41
10K

SYNC F843
F 7817
0V 3856 not used 9 P75|TA7OUT 8-BIT TIMER
( TMRA7 )
PA7
CS0_|P40
42
79 CS0_ F
BC847BW CS1_|P41 80
10K
10 P80|TB0IN0|INT5
CS/WAIT CS2_|P42 81 CS2_
F843 CONTROLLER
11 P81|TB0IN1|INT6 16-BIT TIMER CS3_|P43 82
12 P82|TB0OUT0
( 4-BLOCK ) WAIT_|P33 74 I805
A: DC, 500mV /Div 13 P83|TB0OUT1 ( TMRB0 ) 128KB ROM NMI_ 63
6805
3V3STBY
10us /Div GNDD SYNC INT0|P63 86
IPOR for EU+EPG only
I814

GNDD
BAT254 from A9 2833
from I7 14 P84|TB1IN0|INT7 INT1|PA0 35
INTERRUPT

3830

3819
15 P85|TB1IN1|INT8 INT2|PA1 36 7810

3813
1K0

10K
16-BIT TIMER

10K
CONTROLLER PCA9515DP 8 100n
16 P86|TB1OUT0 INT3|PA2 37
( TMRB1 )
17 P87|TB1OUT1 INT4|PA3 38 VCC
3V3STBY

I825

BAT254
not used

100K
3857
3889

3858
2832

2817

100n

3815
6804
3V3STBY

3833
18K

3834
47p
3 SDA0 SDA1 6

1K0

1K0
18K
KILL SDA
G G
3832

3852
DVSS1 DVSS2 DVSS3
33K

10K
10K to H8 SDASW GNDD 3V3STBY
91 27 62

BAT254
6803
3835

3860
2 SCL0 SCL1 7

1K0

2K2
P50 SCL
from/to H8 3V3STBY GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD SCLSW
5VSTBY
GNDD GNDD 5 EN
NC
1
5VSTBY I806 GND

not used
3854

2834

2835
10p

10p
4
7811
I807 3820 1K0 PDTC124EU
3849

3840
47K

4K7
3839

27K

2815 I808 1K0 3838 GNDD

GNDD GNDD GNDD

100R
3836

3814
LEVELSW

10K

5VSTBY
12VSTBY
I823
from/to G2

220p 6800 3842 3861 1K0

3831
I815

GNDD
1K0

GNDD
from F9

H H
8SC2

SDASW

SCLSW

5VSTBY
to A4

to A4

2831

10n
WU

WSFI
220K 2M2 I824 3878

to A4
BAS316
P50

7815

GNDD
7813 5VSTBY KILL 2828
BC847BW

PCB-Test
from G3 1K0
BC847BW 5VSTBY 3V3STBY 5VSTBY 5VSTBY
SYNC

7814 FBIN
2829

100n
to F3
2830

100n

7808
10u

BC847BW to E2 8
M24C16-MN6
3826

1K0

GNDD
F8701

F8702

F8703

F8704

F8705

F8707

F8708

F8401

F8402

F8403

F8405

F8406

F8407
5.1V
Φ
100K
3841

2818

220p

GNDD 7825 7818 3.5V

220R
3843

3844

3871

3887

3886
PDTA124EU
33K

10K

4K7

4K7
F8706
LA7213 5 (2Kx8) 7
GNDD GNDD GNDD WC GNDD
2 F8802

3 F8803

4 F8804

5 F8805

6 F8806

7 F8807

8 F8808
VCC

3824

4.3V EEPROM
1K0

I818 3872 I819 3884

2 1 6
3869 2824 I817 3V CSYNC 0 SCL SCL
1 2
1

8
GNDD GNDD A_YCVBS VIN 4.5V 10K 0.3V 1 ADR I820 100R 3885 from D2
4 3 5
GNDD GNDD from B2 330R 1u0 VSYNC 2 SDA SDA
1988

C36

1987

1984
C36

C36
GND

VSS
from/to D2
I I
100R
100K
3870
2823

2825

100p
1n0

not used

not used
WSRI/ AGC

SB1
WSFI

FOME
PSS
ION

2826

100p

2827

100p
12VSTBY

SFS_TS

GNDD
GNDD
8SC2
WU

FBIN

IPOR
AFC
STBY

5VSTBY
P50
KILL

ASC1M

SDASW

SCLSW
N.C.

N.C.
3 4
3873

to KUCO
4K7

STBY

IPOR_DC
to B2
from B2
INT
GNDD
GNDD GNDD GNDD GNDD TR 06031_001
GNDD from / to IOV from / to IOV from / to IOV GNDD GNDD GNDD 030203

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 129

UP Sub Board: Fan Control (FACO)

1301 B4 3915 B3 3922 C1 3929 A4 4902 D3 7902-3 C4 7908 B1 F905 A1 I904 C2

1901 A4 3916 D1 3923 E1 3930 A4 4903 D3 7902-4 D4 7909 B4 F906 A2 I905 C2
2911 D1 3917 C1 3924 A2 3931 A4 6901 E3 7903 A1 7910 B3 F907 A2 I906 E2
2912 B3 3918 B2 3925 D1 3932 B4 6902 A1 7904 A3 F901 A4 F908 B4 I907 E4
2913 B4 3919 C1 3926 A2 3933 B4 6903 C3 7905 A3 F902 A4 F909 C3 I908 D1
3913 B2 3920 E1 3927 D2 3934 A4 7902-1 C2 7906 A1 F903 B4 F910 E3
3914 C4 3921 E4 3928 C3 4901 A1 7902-2 D2 7907 A2 F904 B4 I903 C2

1 2 3 4

6902 3V3STBY 5VSTBY 12VSTBY 1

1901
STBY

to FAN
from CECO BAT254 MOT
F905

not used 2
GNDD
GNDD

F901
3924

3926
10K

4K7
4901 EH-S
7903 12VSTBY

A A
7904
PDTC124EU
PDTA124EU GNDD

F902
FAN_OFF 7905
F906

3934

3929
PDTC124EU

22R

22R
from CECO

F907

3930

3931
22R

22R
7906 7907
PDTC124EU PDTC124EU
GNDD

12VSTBY

3932

3933
22R

22R
3918

2912

100u
1K0

GNDD GNDD
B B
1301 F904
7908
PDTC124EU

BC636

F908
7909
315mA F F903

2913

100u
7910
3913

3915
1K0

1K0
PDTC124EU
GNDD
3928
GNDD
18K

3914
12VSTBY

1K0
not used
GNDD
7902-3
F909

12VSTBY LM324D
10
36K 1%

C C
3917

8
9
33K 1%

7902-1
3919

I904 3 LM324D
1
3922 I903
TEMP_SENSE 2 I905
from CECO 1K0 6903
BAV70W for SET FAN only
10K 1%

3927
3925

delete for SET FAN

delete for SET FAN

3916

27K

33K
4902

4903

D GNDD D
I908

12VSTBY 12VSTBY
not used

7902-4
2911

1n0

12 LM324D
4 7902-2 GNDD GNDD 14
3920

5K6

5 LM324D 13
F910
7
6
GNDD I906
6901
11 BAV70W
GNDD
3923

10K

E GNDD
E
I907 3921
GNDD BE_FAN
470R to CECO

TR 06032_001
030203

1 2 3 4
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 130

Layout UP Sub Board (Top View)

TR 06012_001
040203
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 131

Layout UP Sub Board (Bottom View)

1301 A1 2824 C1 3822 A2 3856 C1 3886 C1 6801 A1

2801 C2 2825 B1 3823 A2 3862 A1 3888 C1 6902 A2
2802 C2 2827 C1 3826 C2 3863 A1 3913 A1 7801 B3
2803 B3 2831 A3 3827 A3 3864 A1 3917 B1 7803 B2
2806 A3 2911 A1 3829 C2 3865 A1 3918 B1 7807 A2
2808 A1 3807 A1 3833 A2 3866 A1 3920 B1 7816 A1
2809 B2 3809 A2 3836 A3 3867 A1 3923 A1 7817 C1
2810 C3 3810 A2 3845 A3 3868 B1 3925 B1 7818 B1
2811 C3 3813 A2 3846 C2 3869 C1 3926 A1 7905 A1
2812 A2 3814 A2 3847 C3 3870 B1 3928 B1 7906 B1
2813 C2 3815 A2 3848 C3 3871 B1 4901 A2 7907 A1
2814 B2 3818 A2 3850 C2 3872 B1 4902 B1
2822 A1 3820 A2 3851 C2 3873 B1 5801 A1
2823 C1 3821 A2 3854 A3 3885 C1 5803 A2

TR 06013_001
040203
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 132

DVIO Board: 1394 Interface

1400 F3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1901 B1
2400 F8
3V3_D 3V3_A 2401 C2
2402 C2

1394 INTERFACE 3V3_A

2403 E1
2404 E1
2405 E2
2406 E2
2407 E2
2408 E2
A A

60

56

20

10

4
7400

54

47

40

31

25
UPD72852 2412 F4
2413 F3
DVDD AVDD 2415 F1

3407
10K
2416 F1
F421 2417 F2
CMC 30
39 TPA0P 2418 F2
F0106 PC0 26 2419 F2
38 TPA0N 2420 F2
PC1 27 3400 C8
GND 3401 C2
DV INPUT PCB

GND
8 7 6 5 PC2 28 3402 C2
FROM FRONT

1901 3403 B8
4 F0104 SUS|RES 19
4401
3V3_D 3404 C2
B 3 F0103
CABLE
PORT0 61
B 3405 C2
3406 C2
SPD 3V3_D
F0102 3407 A8

GND
2 37 TPB0P 62 {CTL0,CTL1,SCLK,LKON,LPS,LREQ}
TEST 3408 F7
3409 F3
1 F0101 36 TPB0N
F416 3403
LREQ 63 LREQ
3410 C8
56R 1%

56R 1%

56R 1%

56R 1%
3411 C9
F417 22R 3410 3412 E9
3404

3405

3402

3401
LPS 59 LPS LPS
3413 C8

only for development

DIRECT 50 F424 3400 22R 3414 C8
3V3_A

3411
3415 C8

10K
ARBITRATION F415 10K 3413
AND CONTROL SCLK 2 SCLK 3416 C8
F402 F122 3417 C8
STATE MACHINE F418 3414 22R
C C
2402
270p
3406

LKON 3418 D8
5K1

LOGIC LKON 58
2401

3419 D8
1u

46 TPA1P CTL0 5
F419 22R 3415 CTL0 3420 D8
GND 3421 D8
F420 3416 22R CTL1
45 TPA1N
LINK
CTL1 6
PHY_D(0:7)
3422 D8
INTERFACE F400 22R 3417 3423 D8
GND D0 8
PHY_D(0)
I/O 3424 D8
GND
F401 3418 22R PHY_D(1) 4401 B7
D1 9 4402 E4
F403 22R 3419 PHY_D(2) 5400 E1
F410 F411 F400/F401 D2 11
CABLE 5401 F1
PORT1 F404 3420 22R PHY_D(3) 6401 F9
D3 12
44 TPB1P
7400 A4
F405 22R 3421 7401 E8
D D4 14 PHY_D(4)
D F0101 B2
GND
43 TPB1N
F406 3422 22R PHY_D(5) F0102 B2
D5 15
F0103 B2
A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20us/Div F407 22R 3423 PHY_D(6) F0104 B2
D6 17
F0106 A1
F408 3424 22R PHY_D(7) F122 C2
D7 18
3V3 3V3_A F400 C7
22R F401 D7
5400 F409 41 TPBIAS0 F402 C2
VOLTAGE RECEIVE DATA
IC(AL)1
29 F403 D7
100MHZ 48 TPBIAS1 AND DECODER AND F404 D7

GND
CURRENT 51 F405 D7
F423 RETIMER IC(AL)2
2403

2404

100n
2405

100n
2406

100n
2407
100n

2408
100n
47u

34 RI1 GENERATOR F406 D7

E IC(DL)
3
E F407 D7
F408 D7
CRYSTAL 3V3_D 3V3_D
OSCILLATOR F425 F409 E2
F411

23 XI TRANSMIT DATA RESETB 55

PLL F410 E4
F413 ENCODER
4402 F410
SYSTEM F411 E3
GND GND GND GND GND GND 22 XO AND CABLE F422 F412 F7

330R
3412
TRANSMIT CPS 32
3V3_D CLOCK
POWER 7401 F413 E4
1400 STATUS F414 F2
GENERATOR 74LVC1GU04 5 6401
2 1 4 F415 C7
5401 F414 DGND AGND
to be 9K1 0.5%

F416 B7

2400

100n
100K
3408
CX-11F
24M576 TLMH3100 F417 C7
100MHZ 3
2412
2413

F418 C7
3409

64

57

21

16

13

53

52

49

42

35

33

24
10p
10p
8K2

1
2417

100n
2415

2416

100n

2418

100n
2419
100n

2420
100n

F419 C7
47u

F F F420 C7
F421 A7

F412
GND GND F422 E7
F423 E4
GND F424 C7
GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND F425 E7
only for development
GND GND
TR03014_002
040203
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 I
F
E

H
D
C
B
A

G
3V3_LINK
10K
10K 3445 MD(15)
GND
3444 10K MD(14)

10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K

3462
3460
3459
3458
3457
3456
10K 3443 MD(13)

MD(12)

1
1

3442 10K

91
39
99
82
68
56
35

10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
10K
3465 10K
10K

3454
3469
3468
3467
3466
10K 3464
3455
3463
195
144
188
173
148
131
201
200
10K 3441 MD(11)

3440 10K MD(10) 2.5GND 3.3GND

32 TSSUB1
10K 3439 MD(9)

PLLAGND

PLLDGND
28 TSERROR1
30 SYNC1
MD(8)

HS_CLK
3438 10K

CLK27M_CON
27 PACKETEN1
29 TSRW1
10K 3437 MD(7)

3V3_LINK
{SCLK,CTL0,CTL1,LREQ,LPS,LKON}
26 STREAM17
3436 10K MD(6)
25 STREAM16
3426 24 STREAM15
MD(5) ALRCK
10K 3435 23 STREAM14 LINKON 18 LKON

2
2

10K 22 STREAM13 LPS 17 LPS

3434 10K MD(4) 3427

1R
ABCK 21 STREAM12 LREQ 16 LREQ

3563
20 STREAM11 SCLK 15 SCLK

GND
10K 3433 MD(3) 10K 19 STREAM10
3428 CTL1 12 CTL1
PCM1

MD(0:15)
3432 10K MD(2) PHY_D(0:7)
3562 10K F432 38 TSSUB2 CTL0 13 CTL0
10K GND
34 TSERROR2|HSYNC
10K 3431 MD(1) 3429 PHY_D(7)

{APWM,AMCLK44,AMCLK48}
SELECTOR
PCM2 3471 10K F431 37 SYNC2 PHY_D7 2
GND
DVIO Board: Link+Codec

33 PACKETEN2|VSYNC PHY_D6 3 PHY_D(6)

3430 MD(0) 10K PHY_D(5)
36 TSRW2|FLD PHY_D5 4
PHY_D4 6 PHY_D(4)
YUV(7:0)
YUV(7) 47 STREAM27|VD7 PHY_D3 7 PHY_D(3)
{AFS1,AFS2,ALRCK,ABCK,AEMP1,PCM1,PCM2} YUV(6) 46 STREAM26|VD6 PHY_D2 8 PHY_D(2)

IEEE 1394 LINK CORE

YUV(5) 45 STREAM25|VD5 PHY_D1 10 PHY_D(1)

3
3

YUV(4) 44 STREAM24|VD4 PHY_D0 11 PHY_D(0)

SELECTOR
YUV(3) 43 STREAM23|VD3
YUV(2) 42 STREAM22|VD2
YUV(1) 41 STREAM21|VD1
YUV(0) 40 STREAM20|VD0

MD(9)
MD(8)
MD(7)
MD(6)
MD(5)
MD(4)
MD(3)
MD(2)
MD(1)
MD(0)

MD(15)
MD(14)
MD(13)
MD(12)
MD(11)
MD(10)
AFS2 49 AFS2
AFS1 48 AFS1

3531
53 VPWM

FLD
VD[7:0]
VSYNC
HSYNC
51 VCLKO
TSSUB
50 VCLKI

22R
3556 22R
3553 22R
3549 22R
3545 22R
3541 22R
3537 22R
3533 22R

22R 3558
22R 3555
22R 3551
22R 3547
22R 3543
22R 3539
22R 3535
22R 3532
SYNC
ABCK 94 ABCK PACKETEN
ALRCK 93 ALRCK TSRW

4
4

APWM

33
100 AEMP2
STREAM[7:0]
AEMP1 98 AEMP1
PCM2

37 NC
97 PCM2

40 DQ9
39 DQ8
12 DQ7
11 DQ6
9 DQ5
8 DQ4
6 DQ3
5 DQ2
3 DQ1
2 DQ0
PCM1 96 PCM1

49 DQ15
48 DQ14
46 DQ13
45 DQ12
43 DQ11
42 DQ10
22R
F440 3446

3564
101 AMCLKO
102 APWM IFIROME 208
Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts

OUTPUT BUFFER AMCLK44 103 AMCLK44 IC4 207

10K
BLOCK

47 41 10
VSSQ
AMCLK48 104 AMCLK48 TEST IC3 206
3V3_LINK

IC2 205

LWE

4
MD(15)

LDQM
73 MD15 IC1 203
GND

SENSE AMP MD(14) 72 MD14

GND
MD(13)

LWCBR
I/O CONTROL 71 MD13

MD(0:15)
MD(12) F441 10K 3449
70 MD12
MD(11) 69 MD11 HCLKSEL 197
GND

CONTROL HS_CLK

5
5

44 38 13
MD(10)

COLUMN
66 MD10 SYSTEM HS_CLK 202

DECODER

LATENCY &

REGISTER
512Kx16
512Kx16
VDDQ
3453

50 26
MD(9) 65 MD9 RESETB 1

VSS
BURST LENGTH
RESTB

PROGRAMMING
7
MD(8) 64 MD8 F443
MD(7) 62 MD7
1K
ROW DECODER F438
MD(6) 61 MD6

3V3_RAM
COL. BUFFER 3461

25
MD(5) 60 MD5 PSSEL1 106

REGISTER
LCAS

DATA INPUT
MD(4)

LQDM
59 MD4 PSSEL0 105
GND

LCBR REFRESH COUNTER 47K

1
MD(3) 58 MD3

VDD
ROW BUFFER MD(2) 57 MD2 P_D15 143 PD(15) 3470
LRAS

LRAS

LCBR

LWE
MD(1) 55 MD1 P_D14 142 PD(14)
GND

MD(0) 54 MD0 P_D13 141 PD(13) 10K

3V3_LINK

7430
PD(12)
2
1

TIMING REGISTER ADDRESS REGISTER P_D12 139

MA(11) PD(11)

BANK
92 MA11 P_D11 138

SELECT
MA(10) 90 MA10 P_D10 137 PD(10)

LCKE

6
6

MA(9) PD(9)
1905

89 MA9 P_D9 136

DV CODEC CORE

MA(8) 88 MA8 P_D8 135 PD(8)

MA(7) 87 MA7 P_D7 134 PD(7)
MA(6) 86 MA6 P_D6 133 PD(6)
MT48LC1M16A1TG
only for development

DQML 14
DQMH 36
WE_ 15
CAS_ 16
RAS_ 17
CS_ 18
CKE 34
CLK 35
A10 20
A9 32
A8 31
A7 30
A6 29
A5 28
A4 27
A3 24
A2 23
A1 22
A0 21
BA 19
MA(5) 85 MA5 P_D5 132 PD(5)
DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1

MA(4) 84 MA4 P_D4 130 PD(4)

MA(3) 83 MA3 P_D3 129 PD(3)
MA(2) 81 MA2 P_D2 128 PD(2)

22R
22R

3557
3530

MA(1) 80 MA1 P_D1 126 PD(1)

MA(0) 79 MA0 P_D0 125 PD(0)

22R
3560 22R
22R
3552 22R
3548 22R
3544 22R
3540 22R
3536 22R

22R 3561
3559
22R 3554
22R 3550
22R 3546
22R 3542
22R 3538
3534 MWE AD(10)
7.

74 MWE AD10 116

MA(11)

MA(0:11) MCAS 75 MCAS AD9 115 AD(9)

AD(8)
HOST

MRAS 76 MRAS AD8 114

7
7

MCLK 77 MCLK AD7 113 AD(7)

MA(6')

MA(10)
MA(9)
MA(8)
MA(7)
MA(5)
MA(4)
MA(3)
MA(2)
MA(1)
MA(0)

AD6 112 AD(6) PD(0:15)

INTERFACE

177 WRZ AD5 111 AD(5)

MWE
MCAS
MRAS
MCLK
{MCAS,MRAS,MCLK,MWE} 176 RDZ AD4 110 AD(4)
AD3 109 AD(3)
D(15) 196 D15 AD2 108 AD(2)
D(14) 194 D14 AD1 107 AD(1) AD(1:10) {INT,IOR,RWZ,CS}
D(13)

10K
193 D13

10K
3447
INT

3451
D(12) 192 D12 INT 124
EN 133

D(11) 191 D11 IOCHRDY 123 IOR

D(10) 190 D10 IOR 120
INTC RWZ
D(9) 189 D9 RWZ 119 CS
D(8)

10K
186 D8 CS 117

10K
3452

3448
D(7) 185 D7 DMAACK 121
3V3_LINK

8
8

D(6) 184 D6 DMAREQ 122 F442 10K 3425

D(5) 183 D5
3V3_RAM D(4) 182 D4
D(3) 181 D3 P34 155
GND D(2) 180 D2 P33 154
D(1) 179 D1 PORT3 P32 153
D(0) 178 D0 P31 152
3V3_F P30 204
A(17) 175 A17 F439
7432 PORT4
A(16) 174 A16
37 M29W800AT A(15) 172 A15 CTRL
A(14) MEMORY SIO_CNTI
VCC 171 A14
11 A(13) SIO_CNTO
169 A13
D(0:15)

W_ A(12) <SCI>
168 A12 SI|P41 146
INTERF

9
9

26 F433 A(11) 167 A11 SERIAL SO|P40 145

E_ A(10) 165 A10 SCK|P42 147
GND

28 A(9) 164 A9 SCS|P45 151

3489 D(0) G_ A(8) 163 A8
F434 A(7) 60K BYTE <UART?>
12 162 A7 INTERF RXD|P44 150
3481 10K D(1) RP_ A(6) INTERNAL RAM
161 A6 SERIAL TXD|P43 149
A(5) HIGH-SPEED CORE
15 160 A5
CPU <TMD>
1K

10K 3490 D(2) R-B_ A(4) 192K BYTE

10K
10K
10K

159 A4
3475
3477
3474

3450

INTERNAL ROM UNIT D

47 A(3) 158 A3 16-BIT TIMER
3482 10K BYTE_ HIGH-SPEED
D(3) D(0) 29 A(2) 157 A2
7431

3V3_F

DQ0 A(1) 156 A1

10K 3491 D(4) D(1) 2.5VDD 3.3VDD
PLLAVDD

31
PLLDVDD
UPD72893
1K
1K

DQ1 25
10K
10K

A(1)
3476
3473
3478
3472

3483 10K D(5) D(2) 33 A0

170
118
67
14
187
166
140
127
95
78
63
52
31
5
198
199

DQ2 24 A(2)

10
10

10K 3492 D(6) D(3) 35 A1

DQ3 23 A(3)
3484 10K D(7) D(4) 38 A2
A(1:17)

DQ4 22 A(4)
GND
10K 3493 D(8) D(5) 40 A3
DQ5 21 A(5) GND
3485 10K D(9) D(6) 42 A4 2V5 3V3_LINK 2V5
DQ6 20 A(6)
10K 3494 D(10) D(7) 44 A5 2431
3V3_LINK

DQ7 19 A(7)
3486 10K D(11) D(8) 30 A6
3V3
3V3

GND

DQ8 18 A(8) 47u 2449

10K 3495 D(12) D(9) 32 A7
3V3

GND

DQ9 8 A(9) 100n

11
11

3487 10K A8
IN

D(13) D(10) 34
DQ10 7 A(10)
5433
5432

10K 3496 D(14) A9

GND

D(11) 36
100MHZ
100MHZ
7433

GND
LF25C

DQ11 6 A(11)
3488 10K D(15) A10
OUT

D(12) 39
DQ12 5 A(12)
10K D(13) 41 A11 2436
2450
F430

DQ13 4 A(13)
2432
GND

D(14) 43 A12 100n

GND
GND

3V3_RAM

DQ14 3 A(14) 100n 10u

3V3_LINK

D(15) 45 A13 2439

F435

DQ15|A-1 2 A(15)
2433
A14 100n
5431

9 1 A(16) 100n
100MHZ

12
12

F437

A15 2441
10 48 A(17)
2434
A16 100n 2451
NC

13 17 100n
2V5

GND

A17 2444 100n

14 16 2435
A18 100n 2452
GND

3497 3499
VSS2
VSS1

100n
2446 100n
GND

GND

46 27 2437 10K 10K

100n 2453
100n 3498
2447 100n
not used

GND
GND

2438 10K
13
13

100n 2454
100n
100n
2440 3V3_LINK +5V
2455 GND
3V3

not used
100n
100n
3479 2442
not used

2456
GND
5434
F0205
F0204
F0203
F0202
F0201

47K 100n
100MHZ

100n
5
4
3
2
1

2443
1K
not used

3480
F436
1902

2448 100n
14
14

GND

2445
3V3_F

100n only for development

100n
DV_STATUS

RESTB

LINK + CODEC
I
F
E

H
D
A

C
B

090702
TR03015_001
3489 I9
3481 I9
3451 I8
3448 I8
3445 I1
3444 I1
3443 I1
3442 I1
3441 I1
3440 I1
3439 I1
3438 I1
3437 I2
3436 I2
3435 I2
3434 I2
3433 I2
3432 I2
3431 I2
3430 I3

3534 F7
3533 F4
3532 F4
3531 F4
3530 F7
3471 F3
3467 F1
3466 F1
3465 F1
3464 F1
3459 F1
3458 F1
3457 F1

3463 E1
3456 E1
3455 E1

3557 H7
3556 H4
3555 H4
3554 H7
3553 H4
3552 H7
3551 H4
3550 H7
3549 H4
3477 A9
3475 B9
3474 A9
3470 A6
3461 A5
3453 A5
3452 H8
3450 A9
3449 B5
3447 H7
3446 B4
3429 H3
3428 H2
3427 H2
3426 H2
3425 A8
1905 A6

3548 G7
3547 G4
3546 G7
3545 G4
3544 G7
3543 G4
3542 G7
3541 G4
3540 G7
3539 G4
3538 G7
3537 G4
3536 G7
3535 G4
3469 G1
3468 G1
3462 G1
3460 G1
3454 G1

3496 I11
3495 I11
3494 I11
3493 I10
3492 I10
3491 I10
3490 I10
3488 I11
3487 I11
3486 I11
3485 I11
3484 I10
3483 I10
3482 I10
2448 E14
2447 E13
2446 E13
2444 E12
2441 E12
2439 E12
2436 E12

3499 A13
3498 B13
3497 B13
3478 A10
3476 A10
3473 A10
3472 A10
2456 C14
2455 C13
2454 C13
2453 C13
2452 C13
2451 C12
2450 C12
2449 C11
2445 D14
2443 D14
2442 D14
2440 D13
2438 D13
2437 D13
2435 D12
2434 D12
2433 D12
2432 D12
2431 D11
1902 B14

3480 G14
3479 G14
3561 I7
3560 I7
3559 I7

7430 F6
3562 F2

F432 F2
F431 F3
3564 E4

7432 H9
3563 H2
3558 H4

F443 B5
F442 B8
F441 B5
F440 B4
F439 B9
F438 B5
F434 G9
F433 G9
5434 E14
5433 E11

F437 E12
F436 E14
7433 C11
7431 B10
5432 D11
5431 C12

F435 D12
F430 C12
F0205 B14
F0204 B14
F0203 B14
F0202 B14
F0201 B14
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 134

DVIO Board: uP-Part

1800 C6 F837 C2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1903 E13 F838 C2
1904 G12 F839 E2
2801 B6
2802 C6
2803 E13

uP- Part 3V3_uP 3V3_uP 3V3_uP

3V3_uP 3V3_uP
2804 E13
2805 C2
2806 C5
2807 H11
F800 F801 2808 H12
2809 H12
A

3820

3817
A

3819
47K

10K

1K
2810 H13

BAS316
2811 C1

2814

6804
22u
F827 2812 H13
2813 A2

F830
F829 3818 F836 2814 A5
5802 2813 7803
3838 7805 7804 2816 G3
RESETn BC847BW 10K A: DC, 500mV/Div A: AC, 500mV/Div
10u BC847BW BC847BW 50ns/Div 2817 H3
1K 100n 50ns/Div
2818 H3

3802
22K
2822 2819 I2
2820 D5
1n 2821 E6
2822 B2
3800 E11
B GND GND B 3801 C1
GND GND GND 3V3_uP 3802 B5
3803 F4
RESET_FM
3804 F2
7801 +12V F805
3805 F2
VPP 7810 LM2931D 3806 G2
2801 F800
6803 F837 BC857BW F832 2806 3807 G2
1 8 7802 3808 C7
VOUT VIN 27p VPP

35

10

24
UPD78F0988A
3809 C5

CX-5F
330R
100n
3823

3815

1800
BAS316 4 5 41
Φ

6M
1%

1%
1K
ADJ INHIBIT 1 3810 F2

3809
10K
GND GND CPT 3811 F3
XTAL 39
2802 F801 3808 F811 TEST 3812 F3

GND
7 6 3 2 40
3814 2
C F833 27p P6<4:7> C 3813 F3

GND
34 3814 C2
4K7 AVREF
3824

3816
3K9
1%

3815 C3
1%
53 AD(7)
1K
not used

F835 RD
3801

3821
2811

2805
F838
10K

10K
10n

47u

36 54 AD(8) 3816 C3
RESET WR
55 AD(9) 3817 A3
GND VCTL F819 WAIT
7806 INT 56 AD(10)
3818 A5
P0<0:3> ASTB
PDTC144EU F808 3819 A4
BZX384-B5V1

DV_STATUS
43
TOFF7 3820 A2
to be 1%

F809 0 P3<0:7> 3821 C2

6802 F834 6801

44 45
GND RESTB 1 0 A_MUTE 3822 G2
37 INTP 46
GND GND GND GND F810 2 1
AD(1) 3823 C3
38 47
3 2
3839

3824 C3
2K2

48 AD(2)
3V3_uP 3V3_uP ADTRG 3
RTP 49 AD(3) 3825 G3
4
D AD(4)
D 3826 I2
BAS316

50
P1<0:7> 5
51 AD(5) 3827 I3
2820 6

GND
33 52 AD(6)
0 7 GND 3828 D5
F831

100K
3831

7809 32 +5V
74LVC1G32 5 100n 1 3829 H2
RESETn 31
1 30
2 3831 D4
4
3828 29
3 3832 E4
ANI
GND 4 only for development 3833 I6

5800

2803

100n
2 28
F839 3835 CTSN 100R 5 P5<0:7> 3834 I6
7811 27 1 PD(8)
6 1903

2821
3 PD(9) 6800 3835 E3

22p
BC847BW 26 2 F802 PH-S
1K 7 SCK
3 PD(10) 3800 F0301 1 3836 E2
3V3_uP SI
4 PD(11) 3837 I3
P2<0:6> SO
5 PD(12) F803 7800 330R TLMH3100 F0302 2 To front DV input PCB 3838 A2
3836 17
INTP4
GND GND RXD00 TI000 PDTC144EU 3839 D2
E 4K7
18
TXD00 TO00 E 5800 E12
3832

2804

100n
10K

not used CS F817 19 6 PD(13)

RXD01 INTP5 5801 H12
RWZ F820 20
TXD01 TI010 5802 A1
GND IOR F818 21 7 PD(14)
TO INTP6 6800 E12
ISPN 0
TI TO001 GND 6801 D3
22
TO TO01
1 8 PD(15) 6802 D3
3V3_uP TI INTP7 GND
23
TO
6803 C1
TI
2 6804 A6
7800 E11
P4<0:7> 7801 B4
11 7802 C8
10K not used

70
PD(0) 57 12
0 71 7803 A4
3810

3811
10K

10K

PD(1) 58 13
1 72 7804 A4
F PD(2) 59
2 ADR
TO
73
14
AD(1:10) F 7805 A3
3812

3813

PD(3)
10K

60 15
3803 F822 3 74
GND

not used PD(4) 61 DATA 16 7806 C4

4 75
PD(5) 62 7807 G2
3804 10K F823 5
GND

PD(6) 63
6
7808 H2
PD(7) 64 7809 D5
10K 3805 F824 7
7810 B2
3806 10K not used F825 7811 E1
1904

25

42
F0301 E13
10K 3807 F804 RF F0302 E13
F0401 1 2 F0402 F0401 G12

F812
10K GND RESET_FM F0402 G13
F0403 3 4 F0404 F0403 G12
3V3_uP 3V3_uP TXD 3V3_uP
G GND F0405 5 6 F0406 G F0404 G13
F0405 G12
RXD VPP
2816 F0406 G13
GND

7 8 F800 B7
100K
3822

7807
100n F801 C7
74LVC1G32 5 9 10
F802 E11
1
3825 F826 not used F803 E10
4
2 F804 G4
RXD 100R F805 B8
2817

3 F806 I4
22p

F808 C7
F809 D7
{CS,RWZ,IOR,INT} 3V3 3V3_uP F810 D7
H +5V GND GND H F811 C7
F812 G8
5801
not used F815 H6
3V3_uP
100MHZ F816 H6
F816 F817 E7

2807

2808

100n

2809

100n

2810

100n

2812

100n
3829

47u
47K

7808 2818 BUFENn_VID F818 E7

BSH111 F815 F819 C7
3826 100n BUFENn_AUD
F820 E7
TXD 3827
F822 F4
100R
10K F823 F4
GND GND GND GND GND GND F824 F4
3837
2819

3834

3833
10K
22p

10K

10K

F825 G4
F826 G4
I F806 I F827 A3
F829 A5
F830 A2
GND F831 D2
3V3_uP F832 C3
not used
PD(0:15)
F833 C3
F834 D3
F835 C4
F836 A5

TR03016_001
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 090702
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 135

DVIO Board: Interface+DAC

0003 I4 F542 G14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 0004 I5 F543 G14
0005 I5 F544 G13
0006 I6 F545 G11
0007 I7 F547 G9

Interface + DAC not used

1500 C7
1501 H14
1502 E9
1503 F9
F548 G13
F549 H7
F550 G7
F551 F11
1906 I8 F552 F11
+3V3_dly +3V3_dly +3V3_dly +3V3_dly +3V3_dly 3V3 +3V3_dly F567 4507 1907 I9 F553 G10
1908 I9 F554 E5
1909 I9 F555 F5
7500-A 7500-B 7500-C 7500-E 7500-D 2500 A6 F556 F5
A 74LVC04A 74LVC04A 74LVC04A 74LVC04A 74LVC04A
5500
3V3
5505
3V3_32KHz
2527
3V3_32KHz
A 2501 C3 F557 F6
14 14 14 14 14 2502 C3 F558 F6
1 2 3 4 5 6 4500 11 10 9 8 F501 2503 C3 F559 E6
CLK27M_CON 100MHZ 100n 2504 C3 F560 G10
F563

F502

2500

100n
7 7 7 7 7 2505 C3 F561 F11
GND 2506 E12 F562 F7

3511
2507 E12 F563 A10

47R
2508 E12 F564 B12
7507-A 7507-B

3500
47R
GND GND GND GND GND 2509 C5 F565 B10
74LV74 14 74LV74 14

3512

3501
47R

47R
2510 C6 F566 B12
GND F564 2511 C6 F567 A10
4 5 10 9 2512 E12
GND Clock delay F565 F566
PCM1_NEW
2513 E7
B not used 3 11
B 2514 G11
2515 C6
PCM1 2 12 2516 D5
4501 2517 D6
1 6 13 8 2518 D6
F510 3502 F509
2519 D6
F508 3503 47R F507 2520 F9
3V3 7 7 2521 F9
2505 F506 47R 3504 F505 2522 G13
2523 G10

100MHZ
100n F504 3505 47R F503 3V3_32KHz 2524 G14

5501
GND GND
2525 H12
47R 2528 2526 H13
2501 2527 A11
C 100n C 2528 C12

2509

2510

2511

2515
18p

18p

18p

18p
2502 100n 7508 2529 F9
74LVC1GU04 5 GND 2530 F5
100n 2503 ABCK 2 1 4 2531 F5
not used
2532 F6
2504 100n 1500 2533 F6
3
GND GND GND GND 179161 2534 E10
100n 1 2

GND
7505 3500 B5
74LVT16244
7 18 31 42
3506 F511 3501 B3
GND F519 3 4 GND

GND
4 3502 B5
VC 10
3507 47R F513 3503 B5
F520 5 6

GND
BUFENn_VID 1 15 3504 C5
EN1 21
48 3505 C5

GND
EN2 F522 47R 3508 F512
D 7 8
D

GND
25 28
EN3 3506 D5
24 34
BUFENn_AUD
EN4 F524 3509 47R 3507 D5
9 10

GND
39
45
3508 D5
47R F514 11 12 3V3 3V3 3509 D5

GND
3510 E5
F518 13 3511 B3
2 GND

2516

2517

2518

2519
14

GND
18p

18p

18p

18p
YUV(0) 47
46
1 1
3
3512 B2
YUV(1)
F515 3514 E5

5503

5504
15 16

GND
YUV(2) 44 5
YUV(3) 43 6
3515 F5
not used F521 17 18 3516 F5
DAC

GND
YUV(4) 41 8
YUV(5) 40
1 2
9 2506 2507 3517 G10
3518 G13

F526
F525
19 20

GND
YUV(6) 38 11 GND GND GND GND
YUV(7) 37 12 3519 G11
3510 F516
E 21 22 47u 47u
E 3520 G13

GND
36 13
1 3
35 14 3V3 4500 A3
F527 GND F529 47R 23 24 ABCK 2508 2512 4501 B2

GND
33 16
32 17 4502 F9
F530 F531 25 26
1502 F532 F533 3V3_LINK 100n 100n 4503 G9
ABCK 30 19
1 4 3514 F559

ALRCK_NEW
29 20
2534 4504 G10
PCM1_NEW 750mA F

2513

100n
27 22 27 28 GND GND 4507 A12
ALRCK_NEW F554 47R 7506

2520

100n

2521
5500 A5

47u
26 23
F534 29 100n

GND
30 4502 UDA1334ATS 13 4 5501 C4
F555 3515 F558 not used
F551 VDDA VDDD 5503 E12
Buffer

GND
31 32 GND 7501 1 BCK 5504 E12
GND 74LVC1GU04 5
47R F535 33 F552 5505 A10
34 2 WS PLL0 10

GND
GND ALRCK 2 1 4 DIGITAL 7500-A A1
PLL
F556 3516 F557 F536 INTERFACE 7500-B A2
F F

GND
35 36 3 3 DATAI 7500-C A2
PCM1_NEW SFOR0 11
47R 7500-D A4

GND
37 38

To analog PCB - Sound Processing

not used DE-EMPHASIS 7500-E A3

F517
SFOR1 7
40 F523 F528
1503 F537 7500-F I1
2530

2531

2532

2533
39 6 SYSCLK|PLL1

GND
GND
18p

18p

18p

18p
+5V 7501 F10
not used
F562 41 750mA F INTERPOLATION FILTER 7505 D4

2529

100n
+12V 42 GND
4504 F561 8 MUTE 7506 E11
not used F550 43 44 4503 A_MUTE 7507-A B11
RESETn NOISE SHAPER 7507-B B13
F560 7508 C11

GND

GND
GND GND GND GND 45 46 AEMP1 9 DEEM|CLKO

DAC
DAC
F501 A5
F538 47 48 F539 F502 A3
ISPN
CTSN F553 3517 F540 2514 14 VOL VOR 16
2522 F541
3518 F542 1 F503 C7
G 49 50
100R 47u F545 F544 47u 100R F543 2 G F504 C5
F505 C7
F547

220K
3520

2524
51 52 VSSA VSSD VREF-DAC

2523

3519
F506 C5

220K
10n

10n
TXD RXD
15 5 12 F548
3 F507 B7

GND

GND
53 54 F508 B5
4 F509 B7
55 56 F510 B5

2526

100n
2525
F549 PH-S F511 D7

47u
57 58 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND F512 D7
1501
F513 D7
59 60 F514 D7
F515 E7
F516 E6
GND F517 F10
H YUV(7:0)
To digital PCB H F518 D7
F519 D5
F520 D5
F521 E7
F522 D5
{ALRCK,ABCK,PCM1,AEMP1,AMCLKO} F523 F8
F524 D5
F525 E12
F526 E12
Shielding connection on mounting holes F527 E3
F528 F8
Hole 4.9mm Hole 3.6 mm F529 E5
+3V3_dly F527 F529 F551 F552 F536 F530 E7
0003 0004 0005 0006 0007
I 7500-F
74LVC04A
I F531 E7
F532 E9
14 F533 E9
13 12
1906

1907

1908

1909
F534 F7
1

1
F535 F7
7 F536 F11
A:DC, 2V/Div, 20ns/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 20ns/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 200ns/Div A:DC, 1V/Div, 5us/Div A: DC, 1V/Div, 5us/Div F537 F9
OPTION

GND F538 G7
GND GND F539 G9
GND GND GND GND GND F540 G11
F541 G13
TR03017_002
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 040203
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 136

DVIO Board: Clock

2600 B4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 2601 C5
2602 D3
2603 D5
2604 E3
2605 E2
3V3_LINK
+5V 3V3_LINK 3V3_AC 3V3_AC 3V3_AC 3V3 3V3_AC 3V3_AC 2606 F8
2616 2607 A8

GND
5603 5601 2608 B7
100n 2609 A8
100MHZ
A A 2610 B9

not used
7600 7601 2607 2609

4604

4605
74LVC1GU04 4 FXO-31FL 2611 A5
5 100n 100n 2612 C3
F603 3601 VDD 5602 2611
4 1 2 3 1 GND GND 2613 E9
HS_CLK OUT TS 2614 D3
1R OSC 100MHZ 100n

3617
10K
3 2615 F3

2600

100n

2617

100n

2608

100n
GND

12

5
27MHz
7605
not used

GND 2616 A2
2619

18p

2 BU2288FV
2617 B4

DVDD

VDD2

AVDD
7606-A 2618 E3
74LV74 14 3 CLK27M XTALO 7 2619 B1
not used GND GND GND GND 3600 D3
5 4 GND 15 CLK33M
F621 1/4 PLL1 XTAL 3601 A1
B GND 4606
F619 F620 2610 B 3602 D5
Host CLOCK 3 10 CLK512FS
FSEL
1/6 XTALI 8

100n
3603 B3
2 13 CLK16M TEST 4 3604 F8
1/8 3605 F7
6 1 9 CLKA OE 16
F623
4608 F610 3603 1/4 PLL2 3606 E2
AMCLK44 FSEL F618 3607 F3
14
1/6

DVSS
1R

AVSS
FSEL1

VSS2
3608 D4
7
AMCLK48 4609 3609 F6
3610 F7

not used
3616
10K
11
3612 E2

6
GND
F622 3613 F8
5V_PLL
C C 3614 E9
3616 C9
2612
3V3_AC 3617 A6

AFS1
GND
7602 100n 3618 E1
74HCT1G04 5 GND +5V 5V_PLL 4602 F3
2601 4603 F7
5600
F609 2 F603 F610 4604 A4
APWM 4 F611 3600 F601
4605 A5
100MHZ 10u
220K 4606 B2
F614 3602 2603 4608 B2
2602

470n

NC 220K
470n
2614

3608

4609 C2
3 1 10K 100n 5600 C5
D Audio CLOCK GND
D 5601 A8

10
7604 A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div A: DC, 1 V/Div, 20ns/Div
BA7082F
5602 A4
GND GND GND VCC
5603 A8
3V3_AC 3V3_AC 5V_PLL 2.5V 15 7600 A2
IN2 - 14 2.4V F609 7601 A3
F605 VO F620
2.5V 16
+ 7602 C2
10K 1%

IN1
7606-B
3618
10K

SW1 1 7604 D4
3606

74LV74 14 4 BW
7605 B8
9 10 5 BWB 7606-A B5
SW2 2 7606-B D1
11 7608 F8
A: DC, 1 V/Div, 200us/Div
A: DC, 1 V/Div, 10ns/Div
F601 D4
E 12 not used GND
3614 E F603 A1
1%

SW3 3
8 13 2604 5.1V F604 F3
6 FB
100K
3612

2605

100n
10K

T F605 D2
3-10p F606 F9
3V3_AC
7 2618 F609 D2
2.1V 12 CT1 2613 F610 B3
SW FOUT 7
GND GND 22p 1% 2.1V 11 F611 D3
CT2 VCO 5.1V 7608
GND GND 1/2 100n F614 D4
3607 F604 F615 3610 74LVC1GU04 GND
4602 4603
F624

2.4V 13 VCTL FADJ 9 5 F615 F6

2606 2 4 F606

3613 F616
1
180K not used
2.6V 18K 1% F616 F8
GND
F617

not used
1n F617 F8

3604
33K
3

1R
not used
2615

560K
F 3609 F F618 B9

5K1
3605
8

F619 B7
100n
F620 B9
F621 B6
F622 C6
{APWM,AMCLK44,AMCLK48} GND GND GND GND GND GND F623 B9
TR03018_002 F624 F2
040203

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 137

Layout DVIO Board (Overview Top View)

 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 138

Layout DVIO Board (Part 1 Top View)

 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 139

Layout DVIO Board (Part 2 Top View)

 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 140

Digital Board 1.5: VSM, Buffer Memory and Bit Engine Interface

1100 C1 2104 A5 2110 A5 2116 A6 2122 B14 2128 B3 2135 G14 2141 G2 2147 D1 2153 H15 3103 D11 3109 F2 3115 E3 3121 H12 3127 G2 3133 E2 3139 H4 4105 G7 4111 G13 7100 B4 I100 A4 I106 G15 I112 B3 I118 C3 I124 H15 I130 F14 I137 E2 I145 F6 I155 E10 I161 E3 I167 B15 I173 C15 I179 F1 I186 E3
1101 H1 2105 A5 2111 A5 2117 A6 2123 B14 2129 G13 2136 F1 2142 G2 2148 E1 2154 H15 3104 C2 3110 F2 3116 E3 3122 H13 3128 G2 3134 E2 3140 G3 4106 G12 5100 A4 7101 B14 I101 B10 I107 G13 I113 B3 I119 C3 I125 C3 I131 C3 I138 F4 I147 D10 I156 E3 I162 E10 I168 F6 I174 C15 I180 G1 I187 E3
2100 A4 2106 A5 2112 A5 2118 A6 2124 B13 2130 G15 2137 G4 2143 H1 2149 E1 2160 H15 3105 D2 3111 B3 3117 D11 3123 H12 3129 H2 3135 E2 4100 C15 4107 G12 5101 A12 7102 G13 I102 C10 I108 G13 I114 B3 I120 C3 I126 G1 I132 G4 I140 C15 I149 G13 I157 E3 I163 E3 I169 B12 I175 C15 I181 G1 I188 H3
2101 A4 2107 A5 2113 A5 2119 A4 2125 B13 2131 H15 2138 G1 2144 H1 2150 E1 3100 D11 3106 F2 3112 B3 3118 D11 3124 H13 3130 H12 3136 G1 4102 F6 4108 G12 5102 B1 7103 C1 I103 C10 I109 H13 I115 B3 I121 C3 I127 C3 I133 F4 I141 A12 I152 E10 I158 E10 I164 E10 I170 F6 I176 F1 I182 H13
2102 A5 2108 A5 2114 A5 2120 B15 2126 B12 2132 B1 2139 G14 2145 H1 2151 F1 3101 F10 3107 C3 3113 B3 3119 F10 3125 F13 3131 D2 3137 B2 4103 F7 4109 G12 5103 F14 7104 G4 I104 C10 I110 H13 I116 C3 I122 H13 I128 C3 I134 F4 I142 D10 I153 E10 I159 E3 I165 E3 I171 B15 I177 F1 I183 B1
2103 A5 2109 A5 2115 A6 2121 B15 2127 B12 2134 D1 2140 G2 2146 A4 2152 G1 3102 E3 3108 F2 3114 B2 3120 G15 3126 H13 3132 E2 3138 B2 4104 G6 4110 D11 6100 F13 7105 H3 I105 G15 I111 D1 I117 C3 I123 C3 I129 C3 I136 F4 I143 D10 I154 E10 I160 E10 I166 E10 I172 B12 I178 F1 I184 D10

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

DIGITAL VIDEO(CCIR656)
acc_aclk_pll VSM_M_CLK
MPEG2 VIDEO
{VSM_M_LDQM,VSM_M_UDQM,VSM_M_WEn,VSM_M_RASn,VSM_M_CASn,VSM_M_CLKEN,VSM_M_CLKOUT}

GNDD

2146 100n
2100 100n
2101 100n
2102 100n
2103 100n
2104 100n
2105 100n
2106 100n
2107 100n
2108 100n
2109 100n
2110 100n
2111 100n
2112 100n
2113 100n
2114 100n

100n
100n
100n
100n
VSM_M_A(13:0)

2119

4u7
A VSM_M_D(15:0)
A

2115
2116
2117
2118
VCC3_VSM_MEM
2V / div DC 50ns / div 2V / div DC 20ns / div 5101 I141
5100 +3V3
VCC3_VSM 100MHZ
+3V3
+5V +5V +5V +5V +5V +5V 100MHZ I100

2127

2126
100n
2125
100n
2124

100n

2123

100n
2122

100n
2121

100n
2120

100n
4u7
7100

201
183
169
156
144
126
108

181
129
95
85
73
62
52
41
31
15

77
25

72
71

74
70
76
75
79

68
65
69
63
66
64
61
59
56
54
53
55
58
60

98
96
93
91
88
86
83
81
82
84
87
89
92
94
97
99
5
SAA7333HL
4K7

4K7
4K7

4K7
4K7

4K7

VDD_201
VDD_183
VDD_169
VDD_156
VDD_144
VDD_126
VDD_108
VDD_95
VDD_85
VDD_73
VDD_62
VDD_52
VDD_41
VDD_31
VDD_15
VDD_5

VDD_181
VDD_129
VDD_77
VDD_25

M_CLKOUT
M_CLKEN

M_CASn
M_RASn
M_Wen
M_UDQM
M_LDQM

M_A13
M_A12
M_A11
M_A10
M_A9
M_A8
M_A7
M_A6
M_A5
M_A4
M_A3
M_A2
M_A1
M_A0

M_D15
M_D14
M_D13
M_D12
M_D11
M_D10
M_D9
M_D8
M_D7
M_D6
M_D5
M_D4
M_D3
M_D2
M_D1
M_D0
UART1
I101 GNDD 7101
47 131 VIP_ICLK
SYSCLK_VSM_5508 SYSCLK VBI_ICLK GNDD MT48LC4M16A2TG-7E GNDD
B RESETn
48
RESETn VBI_IPD0
133 49 43 9 3 27 14 1
B
3137

3138
3114

3113
3112

3111

2128 134
UART2 1n
VBI_IPD1
136 VDDQ VDD
VBI_IPD2
VSM_UART1_RX GNDD I112 145 137
VSM_UART1_TX I113 146
UART1_RX VBI_IPD3
138 BANK0 CKE 37 I167 VSM_M_CLKEN
I183
5102 VSM_M_LDQM I169 15 DQML
UART1_TX VBI_IPD4
VSM_UART1_RTSn I114 147 139 ROW- CTRL
+3V3 VSM_UART1_CTSn I115 148
UART1_RTSn VBI_IPD5
140 ADDR LOGIC CLK 38 I171VSM_M_CLKOUT
2132 UART1_CTSn VBI_IPD6
141 VSM_M_UDQMI172 39 DQMH LATCH &
VBI_IPD7 CS_ 19 I173
100n I116 I102 VIP_ERROR
DECODER
VSM_UART2_RX 149 142

COMMAND
UART2_RX VE_VIP_ERROR
WE_ 16 I174

DECODE
GNDD VSM_UART2_TX I117 151 128 I103 VE_DTACKn VSM_M_WEn
UART2_TX VE_DTACKn

REFRESH
7103

COUNTER
I104

4100
VSM_UART2_CTSn I118 153 127 VE_DSn
NC7SZ58 5 VSM_UART2_RTSn I119 152
UART2_CTSn VE_DSn
109 2 DQ0 CAS_ 17 I175 VSM_M_CASn
UART2_RTSn VE_D0 BANK0
6 110
BCLK_CTL_SERVICE VCC VE_D1 MEMORY RAS_ 18 I140
C C

DATA OUTPUT REGISTER

111 4 DQ1 VSM_M_RASn
1 4 3104 BE_BCLK_VSM I120 101
VE_D2
112 ARRAY

ACLK_EMP
BE_BCLK VE_D3 5 DQ2
BE_WCLK I121 102 113 (4,096x256x16) REG MODE
3 47R BE_DATA_RD I123 103
BE_WCLK VE_D4
114 GNDD
BE_DATI VE_D5
GNDD GND BE_DATA_WR I125 10R 3107 104 DVDR VERSATILE STREAM MANAGER 115 7 DQ3 SENSE AMPLIFIERS BA0 20
1100 BE_DATO VE_D6 ROW
BE_SYNC I127 I128 105 117

VCC3_VSM
DQMH DQML
FMN 2 BE_SYNC VE_D7 8 DQ4 BA1 21

AE_ACLK
BE_FLAG I129 106 118 ADDR
BE_FLAG VE_D8
BE_V4 I131 107 119 MUX

VSM
BE_V4 VE_D9
10 DQ5 A0 23

OPTION
15 120 I/O GATING
VE_D10
GNDD

3118

22R
D_PAR_REQ 121 DQM DATA LOGIC
VE_D11 11 DQ6 READ DATA LATCH A1 24
14 D_PAR_D(7:0) 30 122
D_PAR_REQ VE_D12 WRITE DRIVERS BANK
33 123
34
D_PAR_D0 VE_D13
124 13 DQ7 CTRL A2 25
13 D_PAR_D1 VE_D14 LOGIC

3100

3117

22R
10K
39 125 GNDD

ADDRESS REGISTER
D_PAR_D2 VE_D15
D D

4110
12 40 42 DQ8 A3 26
I111 3105 D_PAR_D3
BE_DATA_WR 42
D_PAR_D4 ACC_ACLK_DAI
160 I142 COLUMN
43 51 I184 44 DQ9 A4 29
11 2134 GNDD 47R D_PAR_D5 ACC_ACLK_DEC ADDR
35 I143

DATA INPUT REGISTER

158
37
D_PAR_D6 ACC_ACLK_OSC
159 45 DQ10 COUNTER/ A5 30
10 ACC_ACLK_PLL
10p OPTION 3131 BE_SYNC D_PAR_DVALID 38
D_PAR_D7 ACC_ACLK_PLL
143 I147 LATCH
D_PAR_SYNC 29
D_PAR_DVALID ACC_FID
157
3103 47 DQ11 A6 31
TO BITENGINE

9 2147 GNDD 1R D_PAR_STR

D_PAR_SYNC ACC_PWM
32 10K
I186 D_PAR_STR
I152 GNDD 48 DQ12 A7 32
8
3132 VCC3_VSM 3115 45
D_V4 AE_CS
174
10p OPTION BE_FLAG 3116 10K I187 44
VCC3_VSM D_WCLK COLUMN
7 10K 176 I153 AE_BCLK_VSM 50 DQ13 A8 33
2148 GNDD 1R AE_BCLK
I154 AE_WCLK_VSM
DEDCODER
177
AE_WCLK
6 I156 50 178 I155 AE_DATAO 51 DQ14 A9 34
10p OPTION 3133 BE_BCLK CPUINT0
I157 49
CPUINT0 AE_DATA
CPUINT1 CPUINT1
E 5
2149 GNDD 1R I137
I159 171 162 I158 JTAG3_TCK
53 DQ15 A10 22
E
EMPRESS_IRQn EXT_INT0 TCK
I160 A11 35
4 VCC3_VSM 3102 10K I161 170 163
10p OPTION 3134 BE_DATA_RD I163 168
EXT_INT1 TDI
164 I162 JTAG3_TD_VSM_TO_VIP
I165 EXT_INT2 TDO
I164 NC VSS VSSQ
3 2150 GNDD 5508_odd_even 167 165 JTAG3_TMS
1R EXT_INT3 TMS
166 I166 JTAG3_TRSTn

ACC_ACLK_OSC
TRSTn 40 36 54 41 28 52 46 12 6

2K2
172

2K2
2
HO_PROCCLK

10p OPTION 3135 BE_WCLK TEST0

173
TEST1
SDRAM
HO_CSHn

HO_BEN1
HO_BEN0
HO_WAIT

HO_CSLn

2151 GNDD VIP_INT

HO_RWn

1
VSS_155
VSS_154
VSS_132

VSS_208
VSS_192
VSS_175
VSS_161
VSS_150
VSS_135
VSS_116
VSS_100

VSS_182
VSS_130

1R GNDD

HO_D15
206 HO_D14
207 HO_D13
HO_D12
HO_D11
3 HO_D10
HO_A22
HO_A21
HO_A20
HO_A19
HO_A18
HO_A17
HO_A16
HO_A15
HO_A14
HO_A13
HO_A12
HO_A11
HO_A10
VSS_24

VSS_90
VSS_80
VSS_67
VSS_57
VSS_46
VSS_36
VSS_21
VSS_10

VSS_78
VSS_26

HO_D9
HO_D8
HO_D7
HO_D6
HO_D5
HO_D4
12 HO_D3
13 HO_D2
14 HO_D1
HO_D0
HO_A9
HO_A8
HO_A7
HO_A6
HO_A5
HO_A4
HO_A3
HO_A2
HO_A1

3101
3119
BE_V4
15
10p OPTION BE_SERIAL AUDIO ENCODER DATA STREAM BUS
I176 3106
155
154
132

208
192
175
161
150
135
116
100

182
130

179
180
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
202
203
204
205
24

80
67
57
46
36
21
10

78
26

19
18

22
23

11

16
17
90

20

27
28

1
2

4
6
7
8
9
F
14 2136 47R JTAG_CHAIN3 F
I134
I138
I133
I136

GNDD

GNDD
I177 GNDD
OPTION

13 3108 I168 22R

47p
4102

4103
I145
I170

12 I178 3109 47R 3125 6100 5103 I130

AD_BCLK +5V VCC5_4046
AE_BCLK
11 I179 3110 47R BAS316 100MHZ

4u7
BE_IRQn

100n
OPTION
10 I180 GNDD
3127 47R
GNDD

4106
4111

2135
GNDD

4109

2139
9 3136 47R
+3V3 7102
8 OPTION 16
1R 74HCT9046AD
OPTION

I132 OPTION
OPTION
4104

4105
2152

2138

2140

2142

2141
10p

10p

10p

10p

47p

7 VCC
I149 GNDD
G 4107 3
G
100n 2137

COMPI PC1O|PCPO GNDD

6 OPTION 2 I105 3120 I106
+3V3 4108 14 13
VIP_FID_FF SIGI PC2O
5 I107
I181 GNDD 2129 6 56R
4 I126 3128
BE_FAN 7104 SYSTEM DATA BUS I108
C1A PLL OPTION
5 74HC1G04GW 33p 7 2130
3140

4K7

RESETn_BE C1B
3
47R I109
GNDD SYSTEM ADDRESS BUS 3121 3122 15K

2160

100n
I188 11
3129 4 2 R1 2u2
2 BE_LOADN 3123 1R I182 3124 5K6 I110
12 10
47R SYSTEM_CONTROL R2 DEMO
1 11K I122 I124 2154
1101 NC 15 4 OPTION
3130 RB VCOO
FMN 1 3
H GNDD
t
9
VCOI
220n
H
NTH5G16P

2131

2153

100n
GNDD 5

4u7
3139 INH
2143

2145

2144
10p

22p

10p

7105
BFS20 GND
22K 3126 220K
OPTION

GNDD 1 8 Encoding OPTION

GNDD GNDD
GNDD GNDD
Audio PLL GNDD GNDD
TR 06038_001
040203

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
 Circuit Diagrams and PWB Layouts DVDR70 & DVDR75/0x1 7. EN 141

Digital Board 1.5: AV Decoder STI5519

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 1200 A11
2200 C5
I201 C6
I202 E13
2201 C11 I203 C6
F265 2202 A3 I204 C6
GNDD 7 DCU 2203 I2 I205 C6

6 connector VDD_CORE
+5V
2204 B4
2205 B13
I206 C6
I207 C8

VDD_STI

VDD_STI

VDD_STI
2206 B13 I208 C7

P_SCAN_YUV(7:0)
5
2207 B5 I209 C7

EMPRESS_BOOT
2208 B13 I210 F13

100MHZ
4

A A

{BCLK_CTL_SERVICE,TX1P,RX1P,RTS1P,CTS1P}

5212
5211

5210
2209 B12 I211 E13
I2C BUS 2231 I264 5209

RSTN_DVIO
3
VDD_CORE 2210 B14 I212 F13

RSTN_BE
5207 I265 HW version 100n OPTION 2211 H3 I213 F13
2
+3V3 2212 H3 I215 B3
100MHZ 7201 2202 control GNDD 2213 H3 I216 G13
(See Doc on J-Drive) 1

3201

3212
2214 H3 I217 F13

1K5

1K5
M24C64 +3V3 FMN 5202
8 100n 2215 H4 I218 E13
1 1200 VDD_RGB
VCC 5201 2216 H4 I219 H11

10K
E0 GNDD 3209

10K

10K
2 10K
VDD_YCC 2217 H4 I220 H11

VDD_STI

VDD_STI
E1 3216 5203 7203 2218 I10 I221 H11

3215

3220

3219
I229

OPTION
VDD_PLL

10K
10K

10K
10K
3205 LF25C
3
E2 SDA
5 OPTION 10K 5204 5205 2219 I9 I222 H11
I266
100R 3233 GNDD VDD_PCM +3V3 2220 H8 I223 H12
6

3238

3240
3242

3244
2221 H9 I224 G13
OUT IN
SCL GNDD I267 GND 100MHZ

2209

2228
2205

2206
B B 2222 H9 I225 H12
I239 7 I215 3206 10K
WC_

100n 2208
VSS 2223 H9 I226 H12

VDD_STI
GNDD GNDD GNDD 100R

AE_ACLK_OEn

2230

2210

100n
2224 H10 I227 H12

4u7
D_PAR_D(7:0)
4

100n

100n
100n

100n
NVRAM

ANA_WE_LV
10K

10K

RESETn_VE
2225 H10 I228 I8

SEL_ACLK1
MUTEN_LV
LOAD_DVN
BE_LOADN

CPUINT0
CPUINT1
Flash_Oen
EMI_WAIT
2204

2207
33p

33p
GNDD 2226 H10 I229 B3

RESETn

3221

3222
VDD_STI
2227 H10 I230 I8

100R
100R

BCLK_CTL_SERVICE

3241 10K
3243 10K

3245 10K
10K
2228 B12 I231 I8

VDD_STI
3223
GNDD 2229 H13 I232 I8

2K2

33R
33R
33R
33R
33R
33R
33R
33R
3224

3239
GNDD GNDD 2230 B13 I233 G2
SYSTEM ADDRESS BUS

3K3
10K 2231 A10 I234 C7

5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8
3217
3200 C5 I235 C7

3218
3225

10K
2200

2201
2K2

22n
1n
VDD_STI 3201 A4 I236 C7
SYSTEM DATA BUS
C C
GNDD 10K

10K

F249
3226
VDD_125 3202 C12 I237 C7

3200

3211
3202

4
3
2
1
4
3
2
1
7202-A

10K
3203 E13 I238 C8

F247

F248
3213

3214
74HCT125D

F214
AUDIO_OUT

F250
3204 E13 I239 B2

3236-D
3236-C

3237-D
3237-C
3236-B
3236-A

3237-B
3237-A
I268
I269

I237
I238
I235
I234
GNDD 10K 14
3205 B4 I240 C8

I201
I203
I204
I205
I206
I208

I236
I209

I243
I241
I242
I240
GNDD 2 3 AD_ACLK

I200
F264
AE_ACLK 3206 B4 I241 C8

I207
GNDD 7 3207 I13 I242 C8
7200
3208 F1 I243 C8
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158

161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170

173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183

115

124

131

186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193

194
195
196
197
200
201
202
203

204
205
206
207
208

113
112
111
110
109

127
126
125
10
11
12
13

39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
STI5508 GNDD AE_ACLK_OEn

1
2
3

6
7
8
9
1 3209 A8 I244 H2
GNDD 3211 C11 I245 I7

IRQ0
IRQ1
IRQ2
CPU-DATA10
CPU-DATA11
CPU-DATA12
CPU-DATA13
CPU-DATA14
CPU-DATA15
CPU-DATA8
CPU-DATA9

CPU-WAIT
CPU-ADR10

CPU-ADR11
CPU-ADR12
CPU-ADR13
CPU-ADR14
CPU-ADR15
CPU-ADR16